Caliber Collision - O`Haver Contractors

Transcription

PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
Caliber Collision
Onion Creek
11206 South 1-35E/Lot 1A1-1
Austin, Texas
OWNER/DEVELOPER:
CROSS DEVELOPMENT
17430 Cam pbell Road
Da llas, Texas 75252
2 14.6 14.8252 voice
Contact: Kevin McKinnen
ARCHITECT:
CROSS ARCHITECTS
1255 W. 15 th Street, Suite 125
Plano, Texas 75075
972.398.6644 voice
Contact: Shawn Offutt
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER:
RAYLOND L. GOODSON JR INC.
5445 La Sierra, Suite 300
Da llas, T exas 7523 1-41 38
214.739.8 100
Contact: Mike Powell
CIVIL ENGINEER:
CLAYMORE ENGINEERING
1903 Central Drive
Bedford , Texas 76021
817.281.0572
Contact: Matt Moore
MEP ENGINEER:
JJA MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
8150 N. Central Expressway
Dallas, Texas 75206
214.335.0880
Contact: Dereck Michel
LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT:
BELLA FIRMA
4245 North Central Expressway
Dallas, Texas 75205
214.865.7192
Contact: Kori Haug
METAL BUILDING VENDOR:
CBC STEEL BUILDINGS
1700 E. Louise Ave .
Lathrop, Californ ia 95330
209.676. 1846
Contact: Anshum an Sehdev
PROJECT NO.:
15100
DATE:
29 October 2015
Caliber Co lli sio n , O ni o n C ree k, Au stin , T X
C ross A rchitects Project 15100
Page - 1
29 Octobe r 201 5
Outline Spec ificati ons
SECTION 000110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE NO
SECTIONTITLE
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
003 132
007000
..4
... 4
Geotechnical Data
....... ..... ....... ... .... .... ..
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction ..
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
013100
013200
013300
Project Management and Coordination
Construction Progress Documentation . ..... ... ... .... .... ... . .
Submittal Procedures .... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. ..... ..
014000
Quality Requirements .......... ......... .... ....... .
0 14200
015300
016000
0 17000
References .. ..
..................... ..
Mold Prevention Measures .... ... ........................ .
Product Requ irements ... ...... .. ... .... .... ... .
Execution and Closeout Requirements
... 4
.... 5
.... 6
... 7
... 9
... 9
..10
... 11
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS - not used
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
Refer to Structura l drawings for conc rete, reinforcement, form work, and finishing sections.
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
042000
044510
047200
... 14
..... ..... .. .. .. ........ .... 17
........... . 20
Unit Masonry
Stone Masonry Veneer .. .... ... .... ... .... .
Cast Stone Masonry ................ .
DIVISION 05 - METALS
054000
055000
Cold Formed Metal Framing .. .. . .. ... .... .... ... ... ... .. .. ... .... .... .. .. .... ... ... .
..... 22
........................................... ~
Metal Fabrications ..
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
061000
Rough Carpentry..
........................ .
... .. .... .... ........ .. ... .. ... .. .. ....... 25
061600
Sheathing ..
.. ..... ... ... ... ... .... ... .. ..... .. .. ... .... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. .. ..... ... .
..... 26
064023
066400
Interior Architectural Woodwork
Plastic Paneling ........ ... ... .... ... .. .. ... .... .... ... ..
.................. ........ 27
... 29
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
072418
072500
072600
078413
079200
Water Drainable Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS) .. .. ... .... ........ 30
Weather Barriers (alternate to fluid applied behind masonry) ............... ...... 31
Under Slab Vapor Barrier.
..............................
. .. .... .... .... 35
Penetration Firestopping .. .. .... ... ....... ... .. .. ... .. .. ... ... .. .. .. .. .... .... .. .... ..... .... .... .... 36
Joint Sealers ..
.......................
. .... .... 39
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
08 111 3
08 121 6
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames .................
................. ....... 41
Aluminum Frames ...... ... .. .... ... .. ..... .... .... ... ....... ... .... .... .... .. ... ... ...
....... 42
08141 6
Flush Wood Doors .. .... .. ... .... ... .... .. ... ...
083113
083611
084313
087 100
Access Doors and Frames .....................
........................
. ... .... ...... 45
Sectional Doors .. .. . ... .. .... .... ........ ... ... .. .. ... .
....................... 46
Aluminum Framed Storefronts ..................
........................... .. ..... .48
Door Hardware
... ..... ..... .... .. ... .. .... 50
...................... 43
088000
Glazing . ............. .. ...
...... ................
.... 50
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
0922 16
Non·Structural Metal Framing..
092900
Gypsum Board
...................... ...... 53
09511 3
096116
096513
096519
Acoustical Panel Ceilings
............... 57
Concrete Floor Sea ling.. .
. ........................ .............................. 59
Resilient Base and Accessories
.......... 60
Resilient Tile Flooring .
... .... ... .. .. .... ... ...
.......................... 61
096816
Sheet Carpeting
099100
Painting .
.................
. ... ....... .. .... .. ... .... .. ...... 54
.... .... .... ... .. .
............... ...............
... .... 63
.. .. ... .... ... ... ....... .. .. .... .. .. ...... .. .. . ....... ...... 64
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
102800
104400
109900
Toilet Accessories.
Fire Protection Specialties ...
Miscellaneous Specialties
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT - not used
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
122114
123600
........... 68
.... ........ . 69
Horizonta l Louver Blinds
Countertops .................. .
Caliber Collision, Onion Creek, Austin, TX
Cross Architects Project 15100
Page - 2
29 October 2015
Outline Specifications
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
1334 19
Metal Build ing Systems ........ .
... . 70
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT - not used
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
03 11 00
Sile Clearing ............... ...... .... ...
03 1200
Earthwork ..
3 13 11 6
T erm ite Control ... .... ....... ....... .... ... ... .... .. .. ... ... .. .. .... ..... .... ... ... ...... .
... 79
... 79
..82
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 13 13
Concrete Paving .... ... .. ..... ... ..
3217 13
Precast Concrete Site Accessories ..
.................. ..
32 1723
Painted Pavement Ma rki ng
323 11 3
Chain Lin k Fences and Gates . ... .... .... ... .. .. .... .... ..... ....... .
323 129
Wood Fencing and Gates.
..... .. .. .... ... .. .. .... .... ... .. ....... .... .... ..
..82
..85
... 86
... 87
..87
Caliber Collision, Onion Creek, Austin , T X
Cross A rchitects Project 15100
Page - 3
29 Octobe r 20 15
Outline Specificati ons
SECTION 003132 - GEOTECHNICAL DATA
1.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
INVESTIGATION
An investigation of subsurface soil conditions at the building site was authorized by the Owner, A copy is attached as
an appendix to these specifications.
The Geotechnical Investigation Report is for information only, and is not a warranty of subsurface conditions.
The Report is made available for information only, and is not a Contract Document.
The information contained in the Report represents design criteria, recommendations, and guidelines that were
utilized as the basis of design for the engineering of the earthwork operations, paving design, and foundation design
indicated in the Contract Documents. No changes in this design criteria will be considered or permitted.
RESPONSIBILITY
Bidders are expected to examine the site and subsurface investigation reports and then decide for themselves the
character of the materials to be encountered.
The Architect and Owner assume no responsibility for variations in subsoil conditions, quality, or stability, or for the
presence, level, and extent of underground water.
The Architect and Owner assume no responsibility for Bidder’s interpretation of data contained in the Report.
DOCUMENT 007000 - GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
A.
The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201, Sixteenth Edition, 2007, Articles
1 through 15 inclusive, is a part of this Contract, and is available for review from the Architect. The General
Conditions and all modifications listed hereinafter shall apply to all various subcontracts and sub-subcontractors.
B.
Refer to Document 008000 for Supplementary Conditions.
SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
1.1
COORDINATION
A.
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure
efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in
different Sections,that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of
one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.
2.
Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for
required maintenance, service, and repair.
3.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
1.2
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A.
General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract
Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI. All RFIs should be sent directly to the Architect via
email or posted to project collaboration site (if one is being utilized). The Architect will redistribute to the
appropriate reviewer.
1.
Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no
response.
2.
Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of
subcontractors.
1.3
PROJECT MEETINGS
A.
General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date
and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.
2.
Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements
achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within
three days of the meeting.
B.
Pre-construction Conference: Schedule and conduct a pre-construction conference before starting construction,
at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.
1.
Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
2.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, Construction
Manager, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors;
suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall
be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
3.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.
Page - 4
29 October 2015
C.
D.
E.
Pre-Installation Conferences: Conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each construction
activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1.
Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the
installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or
will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.
2.
Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required
corrective measures and actions.
3.
Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring
information.
4.
Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever
actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference
at earliest feasible date.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at agreed upon intervals.
1.
Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
2.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority , Construction
Manager, and Architect, each contractor, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All
participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to
the Work.
3.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to
each party present and to parties requiring information.
a.
Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting
where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule
concurrently with the report of each meeting.
Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at regular intervals. Project coordination
meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.
1.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor,
supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or
performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings
shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2.
Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others
affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.
SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
1.1
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1.
PDF electronic file.
B.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire
construction period.
1.2
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and
with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
1.3
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Substantial
Completion.
1.
Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early
completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B.
Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the
Work.
C.
Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the
Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.
D.
Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed
specifically to manage construction schedules.
1.4
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Format:
1.
Submit a horizontal bar chart with separate line for each major section of Work identifying first work day
of each week.
2.
Sequence of Listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of Work.
3.
Scale and Spacing: To provide space for notations and revisions.
4.
Sheet Size: Minimum 11 by 17 inches.
B.
Content:
1.
Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each
element of construction.
2.
Identify each item by major Specification section number.
3.
Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration.
4.
Identify work of separate stages or separate floors or buildings, and other logically grouped activities.
5.
Provide sub-schedules to define critical portions of entire Schedule.
Page - 5
29 October 2015
6.
C.
Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work completed, as
of the first day of each month.
7.
Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and product delivery dates,
including those furnished by Owner.
8.
Show delivery dates for Owner furnished products.
9.
Coordinate content Schedule of Values specified in Section 01290.
Revisions to Schedules:
1.
Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion date of each activity.
2.
Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and other identifiable
changes.
3.
Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on Schedule. Report
corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect.
4.
Update regularly.
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
1.1
1.2
SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.
1.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related
activities that require sequential activity.
2.
Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals
for portions of the Work are approved by Architect.
3.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not
be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
4.
Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals
until related submittals are received.
B.
Identification and Information: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:
1.
Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file with links enabling navigation to each
item.
2.
Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
a.
For typical projects that do not require separate submittals for different buildings or sub the
submittal file name shall use Specification Section number followed by a dash and then a
sequential number. Resubmittals shall include an numerical suffix after another dash. Include
brief description of submittal after sequential number or resubmittal suffix. (e.g., 061000-001-0
Rough Carpentry).
b.
For complex projects that require project identifier for separate buildings within a project or
require individual submittals to be submitted by multiple subcontractors, the submittal file name
shall follow the following. Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a
sequential number. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and
approval markings and action taken by Architect.
C.
Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Architect.
D.
Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.
E.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers,
authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show
distribution on transmittal forms.
F.
Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with ‘Reviewed’ , ‘Furnish as Corrected’ notation
from Architect's action stamp. , or with approval notation from alternate reviewer.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification
Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.
1.
Email or upload electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Architect.
a.
Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project
record document file.
2.
Action Submittals: For large format drawings and submittals (larger than 11 x 17), submit PDF file plus 2
hard copies. For smaller format drawings and submittals (11x17 or less), provide only PDF file. Architect
will return only the marked-up PDF.
B.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or
equipment.
1.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable
for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3.
Submit Product Data in the following format:
a.
PDF electronic file.
C.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on
reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data
1.
Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents.
2.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on
sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.
3.
Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a.
For large format drawings and submittals (larger than 11 x 17), submit PDF file plus 2 hard
copies. For smaller format drawings and submittals (11x17 or less), provide only PDF file.
Architect will return only the marked-up PDF.
A.
Page - 6
29 October 2015
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.3.
Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with
other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as
delivered and installed.
Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal
package.
Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where
required.
Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies
with requirements in the Contract Documents.
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the
Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with
approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B.
Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout
Procedures."
C.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location,
submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and
statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract
Documents.
A.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
ARCHITECT'S ACTION
General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them
without action.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications
required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp
appropriately to indicate action, as follows:
1.
Reviewed
2.
Revise and Resubmit
3.
Rejected
4.
Furnish As Corrected
5.
No Action Taken.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not
comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received
prior approval from Architect.
Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered non-responsive, and will be returned without review.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
1.1
CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish
different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent
requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
B.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum
provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified,
or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric
values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to
Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual
Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to
produce required units.
C.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and
with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required
units.
D.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a
record of successful in-service performance.
E.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and
capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with
additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that
is acceptable to authorities.
1.
NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2.
NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation
Program.
Page - 7
29 October 2015
F.
G.
H.
Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is
trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are
similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is
trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in
material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction
and finish indicated in the technical specifications.
1.
Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
3.
Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
4.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the
completed Work.
5.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
1.3
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's
responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with
requirements, whether specified or not.
1.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities
having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having
jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
2.
Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform
these quality-control services.
a.
Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by
Owner.
3.
Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting
will be performed.
4.
Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written
report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
5.
Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are
Contractor's responsibility.
6.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so
direct.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing
as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."
C.
Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to
observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of
Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
D.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide
qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1.
Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during
performance of its services.
2.
Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.
3.
Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work
complies with or deviates from requirements.
4.
Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service
through Contractor.
5.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any
portion of the Work.
6.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
E.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control
services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate
testing and inspecting.
1.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
1.4
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction
and restore substrates and finishes.
1.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or
matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining
areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document
requirements for cutting and patching in Division 01 Section "Execution."
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for qualitycontrol services.
Page - 8
29 October 2015
SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B.
"Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests,
"approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
C.
"Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected,"
"required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D.
"Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in
Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and
"specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E.
"Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules,
conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.
F.
"Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar
operations.
G.
"Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting,
placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H.
"Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I.
"Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on
Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.
1.3
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A.
Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable
construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract
Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B.
Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise
indicated.
C.
Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards
applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract
Documents.
1.
Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly
from publication source.
015300 - MOLD PREVENTION MEASURES
1.1
A.
B.
C.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss,
including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Do not bring finish materials into building until building is in a conditioned state. Protect finish materials stored within
building. Stage materials off the floor and cover with waterproof covering. Examples of these materials include, but
are not limited to, insulation, gypsum products, wall coverings, carpet, ceiling tile, wood products, etc.
Remove from Project site damaged materials or materials that have become wet. Do not install such materials.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Perform daily visual inspections of existing building for existing mold. Report sightings of mold to Owner’s
Representative.
Remove water found within building during construction immediately.
1.
Energize lift stations and sump pumps as early in Project as possible. Use temporary pumps if necessary to
get water out of building and drain lines.
Ventilation:
1.
Verify that existing HVAC system is providing positive pressure in building.
2.
Provide adequate air circulation and ventilation during demolition phase(s).
3.
Seal off return air ducts and diffusers to prevent construction dust and moisture from entering occupied areas
and HVAC system.
4.
Provide temporary outside air ventilation as building becomes enclosed.
Maintain clean project site, free from hazards, garbage, and debris.
Eating, drinking, and smoking are not permitted within building.
Slope perimeter grades, both temporary and final grades, away from building structure.
Verify that condensate pans drain properly beginning with initial installation.
Flash roof penetrations immediately. Do not allow water to penetrate to floor below.
Seal window openings prior to window installation with plastic to prevent moisture entry.
Sprayed-on Fireproofing: Keep air moving throughout building when using sprayed-on fireproofing.
Cover stored and installed ductwork and installed duct openings with plastic to prevent dust, debris, and moisture
from entering ductwork. Repair damaged plastic barrier.
Do not operate air handling equipment below 60 degrees F supply air temperature until building is 100 percent
enclosed.
Page - 9
29 October 2015
M.
N.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.4
A.
Monitor humidity and temperature for conformance to installation requirements defined by material and equipment
manufacturers.
Check moisture content of gypsum board prior to applying finishes. Record findings.
INSTALLATION
Roof Drains: Connect roof drains to risers and storm drainage lines as soon as possible.
Floor Drains: Connect floor drains as soon as possible. Do not cover floor drains with tape or other obstructions
during construction. Clean out floor drain lines to mains prior to Substantial Completion.
Wall Assemblies:
1.
Install exterior wall insulation, vapor retarder, and gypsum board only after building is enclosed.
2.
Keep bottom of installed gypsum board off floor 1/2 inch.
Cavity Conditions: Clean and inspect cavity conditions prior to covering, sealing, or restricting access. Vacuum
clean cavity spaces prior to covering or enclosing.
Plumbing: Pressure test plumbing piping identified as insulated on Project prior to installation of insulation.
Roof Mounted Equipment: Inspect rooftop units and other roof-mounted equipment for signs of rain leaks
immediately after first rain. Water test with hose immediately after installation. Seal leaks immediately.
Windows and Storefront: Water test windows to manufacturer’s and Project Manual’s specifications. Record findings
and forward to Owner’s Representative.
Sealants: Inspect exterior sealants for cracks, damage, or deterioration. Record findings and forward to Owner’s
Representative.
HVAC Equipment (Permanent HVAC Equipment Used for Temporary Conditioning of Building During Construction
Phases): Change filters and clean ductwork interior to remove dirt, dust, debris, and moisture buildup prior to turning
Project over to Owner.
ADJUSTING
Remove damaged materials or materials that have become wet. Replace with new materials.
016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
1.1
NEW PRODUCTS
A.
Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.
B.
Do not use products having any of the following characteristics:
1.
Made outside the United States, its territories, Canada, or Mexico.
2.
Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's.
3.
Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber.
C.
Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacture for components being replaced.
D.
Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials
indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box.
E.
Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for connection to electric
wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specification sections.
1.2
PRODUCT OPTIONS
A.
Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or
description.
B.
Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named
and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
C.
Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request
for substitution for any manufacturer not named.
1.3
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual
specification sections.
B.
Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
1.4
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A.
Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period.
Comply with requirements specified in this section.
B.
Architect will consider requests for substitutions only within 15 days after date of Agreement.
C.
Substitutions will not be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor.
D.
Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract
Documents.
E.
A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:
1.
Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the
specified product.
2.
Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.
3.
Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be
complete with no additional cost to Owner.
4.
Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent.
F.
Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data
submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents.
G.
Substitution Submittal Procedure:
Page - 10
29 October 2015
1.
2.
3.
Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed
substitution.
Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product
equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.
The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request.
1.5
TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A.
Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and
potential damage to stored materials.
B.
Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas.
D.
Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and
products are undamaged.
E.
Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.
F.
Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.
1.6
STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A.
Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation
schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and
misapplication.
B.
Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
C.
Store with seals and labels intact and legible.
D.
Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product.
E.
For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
F.
Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection.
G.
Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent
condensation and degradation of products.
H.
Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter.
I.
Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.
J.
Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.
K.
Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are
undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
017000 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
1.1
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located and acceptable to
Architect. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance
Certificate.
B.
For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project,
licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
1.2
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment.
B.
Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion.
C.
Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust,
fumes, vapors, or gases.
D.
Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive
means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property.
E.
Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and
fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation.
1.
Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time.
2.
Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow.
3.
Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays.
4.
Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly apply corrective
measures.
F.
Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and
atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations.
Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.
1.3
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and
orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements , with provisions for accommodating
items installed later.
B.
Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.
C.
Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building
utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to,
and placing in service, such equipment.
D.
Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated
diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable;
place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations,
for maintenance, and for repairs.
Page - 11
29 October 2015
E.
F.
G.
In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction.
Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.
After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in
accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.
1.4
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work
means acceptance of existing conditions.
B.
Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or
attached.
C.
Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D.
Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to
over-ordering or misfabrication.
E.
Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations.
1.5
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
B.
Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C.
Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new
material or substance in contact or bond.
1.6
LAYING OUT THE WORK
A.
Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.
B.
Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered.
C.
Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points.
D.
Control datum for survey is that established by Owner provided survey.
E.
Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction.
F.
Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of
changes in grades or other reasons.
G.
Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written
notice to Architect.
H.
Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.
I.
Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established control points. Record
locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents.
J.
Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means:
1.
Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations,
slopes, invert elevations, and items requested by Owner .
2.
Grid or axis for structures.
3.
Building foundation, column locations, and ground floor elevations .
K.
Periodically verify layouts by same means.
L.
Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.
M.
On completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare a certified survey illustrating
dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work.
1.7
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.
B.
Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless
otherwise indicated.
D.
Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.
1.8
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.
B.
Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:
1.
Complete the work.
2.
Fit products together to integrate with other work.
3.
Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.
4.
Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.
5.
Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.
6.
Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.
7.
Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
8.
Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.
C.
Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive
patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition.
D.
Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight
exposed surfaces.
E.
Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.
F.
Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
G.
Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
Page - 12
29 October 2015
H.
I.
At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated
material in accordance with Section 078400, to full thickness of the penetrated element.
Patching:
1.
Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to
nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
2.
Match color, texture, and appearance.
3.
Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to
patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish.
1.9
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.
B.
Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces,
prior to enclosing the space.
C.
Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.
D.
Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not
burn or bury.
1.10
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A.
Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.
B.
Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.
C.
Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to
prevent damage.
D.
Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
E.
Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects,
by protecting with durable sheet materials.
F.
Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain
recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.
G.
Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible.
1.11
SYSTEM STARTUP
A.
Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B.
Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt
tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.
C.
Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment
or system manufacturer.
D.
Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
E.
Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in
accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
F.
When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to
be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to
supervise placing equipment or system in operation.
G.
Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.
1.12
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
1.13
FINAL CLEANING
A.
Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment.
1.
Clean areas to be occupied by Owner prior to final completion before Owner occupancy.
B.
Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.
C.
Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign
substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.
D.
Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on
mechanical and electrical equipment.
E.
Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and
material being cleaned.
F.
Clean filters of operating equipment.
G.
Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
H.
Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
I.
Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal
manner; do not burn or bury.
1.14
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A.
Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.
1.
Provide copies to Architect and Owner.
B.
Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or
correction in Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion.
C.
Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion.
D.
Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that
work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review.
Page - 13
29 October 2015
E.
F.
G.
1.15
Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with requirements for
access to Owner-occupied areas.
Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete.
Complete items of work determined by Architect's final inspection.
MAINTENANCE
A.
Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.
B.
Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one year from the
Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longest.
C.
Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as
required.
D.
Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever
required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.
E.
Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written
consent of the Owner.
042000 - UNIT MASONRY
1.1
SUBMITTALS
A.
Samples: Submit four samples of brick units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of color range.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract
documents.
1.3
MOCK-UP
A.
Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 4 feet long by 4 feet high; include mortar and accessories
and structural backup in mock-up.
B.
Locate where directed.
C.
Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by
other materials.
1.5
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A.
Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:
1.
Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths as indicated on
the drawings for specific locations.
2.
Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for corners.
3.
Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C129.
a.
Hollow block , as indicated.
b.
Lightweight.
B.
Decorative Block: ASTMA C129, Medium weight, integrally colored (as selected by Architect) split faced with
matching colored mortar and surface applied sealer.
1.6
BRICK UNITS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Endicott Brick (represented by Bart Snowden, Blackson Brick Company, 214-794-9159).
2.
Alternate: Yankee Hill by Acme Brick.
3.
Substitutions: Not allowed.
B.
Facing Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade SW.
1.
Color and texture to match Architect's sample.
2.
Nominal size: As indicated on drawings.
3.
Special shapes: Molded units as required by conditions indicated, unless standard units can be sawn to
produce equivalent effect.
4.
Compressive strength: As indicated on drawings, measured in accordance with ASTM C67.
1.7
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type N.
1.
Colored mortar: Premixed cement as required to match Architect's color sample.
B.
Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144.
C.
Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.
D.
Water: Clean and potable.
E.
Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather.
1.8
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A.
Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors:
1.
Blok-Lok Limited : www.blok-lok.com.
2.
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand) : www.h-b.com.
Page - 14
29 October 2015
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.
WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com.
4.
Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 40 (280) deformed billet bars; galvanized.
Joint Reinforcement: Use ladder type joint reinforcement where vertical reinforcement is involved and truss type
elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.
Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss or ladder type; stainless steel conforming to ASTM A580/A580M Type
304; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and
not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure.
Masonry Veneer Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry veneer and
structural backup, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
1.
Anchor plates: Not less than 0.075 inch thick, designed for fastening to structural backup through
sheathing by two fasteners ; provide design with legs that penetrate sheathing and insulation to provide
positive anchorage.
2.
Wire ties: Manufacturer's standard shape, 0.1875 inch thick.
3.
Vertical adjustment: Not less than 3-1/2 inches.
4.
Provide devices that meet seismic loading requirements.
1.9
FLASHINGS
A.
Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt
compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not
less than 0.040 inch.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing.
b.
Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing.
c.
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash.
B.
Lap Sealant: Butyl type as specified in Section 079005.
1.10
ACCESSORIES
A.
Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused joints.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Cavity Mortar Control: Semi-rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh panels, sized to thickness of wall cavity, and
designed to prevent mortar droppings from clogging weeps and cavity vents and allow proper cavity drainage.
1.
Mortar Diverter: Panels designed for installation at flashing locations.
a.
Manufacturers:
1)
Mortar Net USA, Ltd ; Mortar Net with Insect Barrier: www.mortarnet.com.
2)
C.
Nailing Strips: Softwood lumber, preservative treated; as specified in Section 061000.
D.
Weeps: Molded PVC grilles, insect resistant.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc : www.h-b.com.
c.
WIRE-BOND : www.wirebond.com.
d.
E.
Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.
1.11
LINTELS
A.
Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density classification; and with reinforcing
bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area compressive strength not less than CMUs.
1.12
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification.
1.
Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type S.
2.
Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N.
3.
Interior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type O.
B.
Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect's sample, without
exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment-to-cement ratio.
C.
Grout: ASTM C476. Consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine grout for spaces
with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less; coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal
dimension greater than 2 inches.
D.
Admixtures: Add to mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate and in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions; mix uniformly.
E.
Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards.
1.13
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.
B.
Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.
C.
Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
Page - 15
29 October 2015
1.14
PREPARATION
A.
Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.
B.
Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides
permanent bracing.
1.15
COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent.
1.16
COURSING
A.
Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B.
Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness.
C.
Concrete Masonry Units:
1.
Bond: Running.
D.
Brick Units: Running or as otherwise indicted on Drawings.
1.17
PLACING AND BONDING
A.
Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work.
B.
Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
C.
Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.
D.
Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
E.
Remove excess mortar with water repellent admixture promptly. Do not use acids, sandblasting or high pressure
cleaning methods.
F.
Interlock intersections and external corners, except for units laid in stack bond.
G.
Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove
mortar and replace.
H.
Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent
broken masonry unit corners or edges.
I.
Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled or resilient base is scheduled.
J.
Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint as indicated.
K.
Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with
compressible joint filler.
1.18
WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS
A.
Install weeps in veneer and cavity walls at 24 inches on center horizontally above through-wall flashing, above
shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls.
1.19
CAVITY MORTAR CONTROL
A.
Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity vents.
B.
Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity and at other flashing locations as recommended by manufacturer to
prevent mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents.
1.20
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL
A.
Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal joint reinforcement
16 inches on center.
B.
Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend
minimum 16 inches each side of opening.
C.
Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.
D.
Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.
E.
Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Unless otherwise indicated
on drawings or closer spacing is indicated under specific wall type, space anchors at maximum of 36 inches
horizontally and 24 inches vertically.
1.21
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY
A.
Install horizontal joint reinforcement 8 inches on center.
B.
C.
D.
1.22
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEER
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Stud Back-Up: Secure veneer anchors to stud framed back-up and embed into masonry veneer at maximum 16
inches on center vertically and 24 inches on center horizontally. Place additional anchors at perimeter of
openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 8 inches on center.
Page - 16
29 October 2015
1.23
MASONRY FLASHINGS
A.
Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where
downward flow of water will be interrupted.
1.
Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 4 inches into adjacent masonry or turn up at
least 4 inches to form watertight pan at non-masonry construction.
2.
Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashings.
3.
Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar.
B.
Extend flashings to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry.
C.
Lap end joints of flashings at least 4 inches and seal watertight with mastic or elastic sealant.
D.
Terminate flashing on vertical surfaces with aluminum or stainless steel termination bar attached through flashing
into substrate.
1.24
LINTELS
A.
Install loose steel lintels over openings.
B.
Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or precast concrete lintels are not scheduled.
1.25
GROUTED COMPONENTS
A.
Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters.
B.
Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned
position.
C.
Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
D.
At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches either side of opening.
1.26
CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.
B.
Form control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the hollow contour end of the
block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit faces for placement of backer rod and
sealant.
C.
Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Size control joint in accordance with Section 079005 for sealant performance.
E.
Form expansion joint as detailed.
1.27
TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch.
B.
Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch.
C.
Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more.
D.
Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more.
E.
Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft.
F.
Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft.
G.
Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch.
1.28
CUTTING AND FITTING
A.
Cut and fit for chases. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.
B.
Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry
work may be impaired.
1.29
CLEANING
A.
Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.
B.
Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C.
Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
D.
Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
1.30
PROTECTION
A.
Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are subject to
damage by construction activities.
044510 - STONE MASONRY VENEER
1.1
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, mortar, and masonry accessories.
B.
Samples: Submit four samples of stone to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of color range.
1.2
MOCK-UP
A.
Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 4 feet long by 4 feet high; include mortar and accessories
and structural backup in mock-up.
B.
C.
Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
Page - 17
29 October 2015
1.3
A.
Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by
other materials.
1.4
STONE MASONRY
A.
Limestone Veneer: Meet ASTM ASTM C 568, Classification: II (Medium-Density).
1.
Face Size: Random rectangular.
2.
Acceptable Product: As supplied by Bart Snowden, Blackson Brick Company, 214-794-9159).
3.
Substitutions: Not allowed.
1.5
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type N.
1.
Colored mortar: Premixed cement as required to match Architect's color sample.
B.
Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144.
C.
Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.
D.
Water: Clean and potable.
E.
Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather.
1.6
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A.
Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Masonry Veneer Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry veneer and
structural backup, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
1.
Anchor plates: Not less than 0.075 inch thick, designed for fastening to structural backup through
sheathing by two fasteners ; provide design with legs that penetrate sheathing and insulation to provide
positive anchorage.
2.
Wire ties: Manufacturer's standard shape, 0.1875 inch thick.
3.
Vertical adjustment: Not less than 3-1/2 inches.
4.
Provide devices that meet seismic loading requirements.
1.7
FLASHINGS
A.
Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt
compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not
less than 0.040 inch.
1.
a.
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing.
b.
Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing.
c.
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash.
1.8
ACCESSORIES
A.
Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused joints.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Cavity Mortar Control: Semi-rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh panels, sized to thickness of wall cavity, and
designed to prevent mortar droppings from clogging weeps and cavity vents and allow proper cavity drainage.
1.
Mortar Diverter: Panels designed for installation at flashing locations.
a.
Manufacturers:
1)
Mortar Net USA, Ltd ; Mortar Net with Insect Barrier: www.mortarnet.com.
2)
C.
Nailing Strips: Softwood lumber, preservative treated; as specified in Section 061000.
D.
Weeps: Molded PVC grilles, insect resistant.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc : www.h-b.com.
c.
WIRE-BOND : www.wirebond.com.
d.
E.
Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.
1.9
MORTAR MIXES
A.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification.
1.
Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type S.
2.
Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N.
3.
Interior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type O.
B.
Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect's sample, without
exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment-to-cement ratio.
Page - 18
29 October 2015
C.
D.
Admixtures: Add to mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate and in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions; mix uniformly.
Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards.
1.10
COURSING
A.
Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B.
Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness.
C.
Provide coursing as selected by Architect.
1.11
PLACING AND BONDING
A.
Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work.
B.
Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
C.
Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.
D.
Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
E.
Remove excess mortar with water repellent admixture promptly. Do not use acids, sandblasting or high pressure
cleaning methods.
F.
Interlock intersections and external corners , except for units laid in stack bond.
G.
Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove
mortar and replace.
H.
Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent
broken masonry unit corners or edges.
I.
Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled or resilient base is scheduled.
1.12
WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS
A.
Install weeps in veneer and cavity walls at 24 inches on center horizontally above through-wall flashing, above
shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls.
1.13
CAVITY MORTAR CONTROL
A.
Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity vents.
B.
Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity and at other flashing locations as recommended by manufacturer to
prevent mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents.
1.14
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL
A.
Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal joint reinforcement
16 inches on center.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Unless otherwise indicated
on drawings or closer spacing is indicated under specific wall type, space anchors at maximum of 36 inches
horizontally and 24 inches vertically.
1.15
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEER
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Stud Back-Up: Secure veneer anchors to stud framed back-up and embed into masonry veneer at maximum 16
inches on center vertically and 24 inches on center horizontally. Place additional anchors at perimeter of
openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 8 inches on center.
1.16
MASONRY FLASHINGS
A.
Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where
downward flow of water will be interrupted.
1.
Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 4 inches into adjacent masonry or turn up at
least 4 inches to form watertight pan at non-masonry construction.
2.
Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashings.
3.
Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar.
B.
Extend flashings to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry.
C.
Lap end joints of flashings at least 4 inches and seal watertight with mastic or elastic sealant.
D.
Terminate flashing on vertical surfaces with aluminum or stainless steel termination bar attached through flashing
into substrate.
1.17
LINTELS
A.
Install loose steel lintels over openings.
Page - 19
29 October 2015
1.18
CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.
B.
Form control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the hollow contour end of the
block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit faces for placement of backer rod and
sealant.
C.
Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with
D.
Size control joint in accordance with Section 079005 for sealant performance.
E.
Form expansion joint as detailed.
1.19
TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch.
B.
Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch.
C.
Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more.
D.
Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more.
E.
Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft.
F.
Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft.
G.
Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch.
1.20
CUTTING AND FITTING
A.
Cut and fit for chases. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.
B.
Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry
work may be impaired.
1.21
CLEANING
A.
Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.
B.
Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C.
Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
D.
Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
SECTION 047200 - CAST STONE MASONRY
1.1
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Test results of cast stone components made previously by the manufacturer.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include elevations, dimensions, layouts, profiles, cross sections, reinforcement, exposed faces,
arrangement of joints, anchoring methods, anchors, and piece numbers.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications:
1.
A firm with a minimum of 5 years experience producing cast stone of types required for project.
2.
Current producer member of the Cast Stone Institute or the Architectural Precast Association.
3.
Adequate plant capacity to furnish quality, sizes, and quantity of cast stone required without delaying
progress of the work.
1.3
A.
Deliver cast stone components secured to shipping pallets and protected from damage and discoloration.
Protect corners from damage.
B.
Number each piece individually to match shop drawings and schedule.
C.
Store cast stone components and installation materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Store cast stone components on pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Ventilate under covers to prevent
condensation. Prevent contact with dirt.
E.
Protect cast stone components during handling and installation to prevent chipping, cracking, or other damage.
F.
Store mortar materials where contamination can be avoided.
G.
Schedule and coordinate production and delivery of cast stone components with unit masonry work to optimize
on-site inventory and to avoid delaying the work.
1.4
ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE
A.
Cast Stone: Architectural concrete product manufactured to simulate appearance of natural granite, complying
with ASTM C1364.
1.
Compressive Strength: As specified in ASTM C1364; calculate strength of pieces to be field cut at 80
percent of uncut piece.
2.
Freeze-Thaw Resistance: Demonstrated by field experience.
3.
Surface Texture: Fine grained texture, with no bugholes, air voids, or other surface blemishes visible
from distance of 20 feet.
4.
Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
5.
Remove cement film from exposed surfaces before packaging for shipment.
Page - 20
29 October 2015
B.
C.
Shapes: Provide shapes indicated on drawings.
1.
Variation from Any Dimension, Including Bow, Camber, and Twist: Maximum of plus/minus 1/8 inch or
length divided by 360, whichever is greater, but not more than 1/4 inch.
2.
Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, provide:
a.
Wash or slope of 1:12 on exterior horizontal surfaces.
b.
Drips on projecting components, wherever possible.
c.
Raised fillets at back of sills and at ends to be built in.
Reinforcement: Provide reinforcement as required to withstand handling and structural stresses; comply with
ACI 318.
1.5
MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C150.
1.
For Mortar: Type I or II, except Type III may be used in cold weather.
B.
Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, except for gradation; granite, quartz, or limestone.
C.
Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33, except for gradation; natural or manufactured sands.
D.
Admixtures: ASTM C494/C494M.
E.
Water: Potable.
F.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M deformed bars, galvanized or epoxy coated.
G.
Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A185/A185M, galvanized or epoxy coated.
H.
Embedded Anchors, Dowels, and Inserts: Type 304 stainless steel, of type and size as required for conditions.
I.
Mortar: Portland cement-lime, ASTM C270, Type N ; do not use masonry cement.
J.
Sealant: As specified in Section 079005.
K.
Cleaner: General-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other
construction stains from new masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; approved for
intended use by cast stone manufacturer and by cleaner manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent
masonry materials.
1.6
INSTALLATION
A.
Install cast stone components in conjunction with masonry, complying with requirements of Section 042000.
B.
Mechanically anchor cast stone units indicated; set remainder in mortar.
C.
Setting:
1.
Drench cast stone components with clear, running water immediately before installation.
2.
Set units in a full bed of mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Fill vertical joints with mortar.
4.
Fill dowel holes and anchor slots completely with mortar or non-shrink grout.
D.
Joints: Make all joints 3/8 inch, except as otherwise detailed.
1.
Rake mortar joints 3/4 inch for pointing.
2.
Remove excess mortar from face of stone before pointing joints.
3.
Point joints with mortar in layers 3/8 inch thick and tool to a slight concave profile.
4.
Leave the following joints open for sealant:
a.
Head joints in top courses, including copings, parapets, cornices, sills, and steps.
b.
Joints in projecting units.
c.
Joints between rigidly anchored units, including soffits, panels, and column covers.
d.
Joints below lugged sills and stair treads.
e.
Joints below ledge and relieving angles.
f.
Joints labeled "expansion joint".
E.
Sealant Joints: Install sealants as specified in Section 079005.
F.
Installation Tolerances:
1.
Variation from Plumb: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet or more.
2.
Variation from Level: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 3/8 inch maximum.
3.
Variation in Joint Width: Not more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or 1/4 of nominal joint width, whichever is
less.
4.
Variation in Plane Between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Not more than 1/16 inch difference between
planes of adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units.
G.
Repairs: Repair chips and other surface damage noticeable when viewed in direct daylight at 20 feet.
1.
Repair with matching touchup material provided by the manufacturer and in accordance with
2.
Repair methods and results subject to Architect 's approval.
1.7
CLEANING
A.
Keep cast stone components clean as work progresses.
Page - 21
29 October 2015
054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
1.1
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, product criteria, and
limitations.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, welds, and type and
location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related work.
1.
Indicate stud and ceiling joist layout.
2.
Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for bolted framing connections.
3.
Provide design engineer's stamp on shop drawings.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Designer Qualifications: Design framing system under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer
experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
1.3
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:
1.
Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com.
2.
Marino: www.marinoware.com.
3.
The Steel Network, Inc: www.SteelNetwork.com.
1.4
FRAMING SYSTEM
A.
Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips, fittings, reinforcement,
and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system.
B.
Design Criteria: Provide completed framing system having the following characteristics:
1.
Design: Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed steel framing members according to AISI
North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
2.
Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and erect to withstand specified design loads for
project conditions within required limits.
3.
Design Loads: In accordance with applicable codes.
4.
Live load deflection meeting the following, unless otherwise indicated:
a.
Exterior Walls: Maximum horizontal deflection under wind load of L/600 of span for masonry,
and L/240 of span for metal wall panels and EIFS.
5.
Able to tolerate movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on
fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges.
6.
Able to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances
of intended openings.
1.5
FRAMING MATERIALS
A.
Studs and Track: ASTM C955; studs formed to channel, "C", or "Sigma" shape with punched web; U-shaped
track in matching nominal width and compatible height.
1.
Gage and depth: As required to meet specified performance levels, but not less than 16 gage at 16
inches on center.
2.
Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653 G90 coating.
3.
Provide components fabricated from ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation SS steel.
B.
Canopy Framing
1.
Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened
flanges, and as follows:
a.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by design.
b.
Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches, minimum.
c.
Section Properties: As required by design.
2.
Built-up Members: Built-up members of manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel section, with stiffened
flanges, nested into a U-shaped steel section joist track, with unstiffened flanges; unpunched; of web
depths indicated; and as follows:
a.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by design.
b.
Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches, minimum.
C.
Framing Connectors: Factory-made formed steel sheet, ASTM A653 SS Grade 50, with G60 hot dipped
galvanized coating and factory punched holes.
1.
Structural Performance: Maintain load and movement capacity required by applicable code, when
evaluated in accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel
Structural Members; minimum 16 gage, 0.06 inch thickness.
2.
Movement Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate movement using
slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, while maintaining structural performance of framing.
Provide movement connections where indicated on drawings.
a.
Where continuous studs bypass elevated floor slab, connect stud to slab in manner allowing
vertical and horizontal movement of slab without affecting studs; allow for minimum movement of
1/2 inch.
b.
Where top of stud wall terminates below structural floor or roof, connect studs to structure in
manner allowing vertical and horizontal movement of slab without affecting studs; allow for
minimum movement of 1/2 inch.
c.
Provide top track preassembled with connection devices spaced to fit stud spacing indicated on
drawings; minimum track length of 12 feet.
Page - 22
29 October 2015
3.
Provide non-movement connections for tie-down to foundation, floor-to-floor tie-down, roof-to-wall tiedown, joist hangers, gusset plates, and stiffeners.
1.6
ACCESSORIES
A.
Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered; finish to match
framing components.
B.
Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.7
FASTENERS
A.
Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM A153/A153M.
B.
Anchorage Devices: Powder actuated.
C.
Anchorage Devices: Power actuated.
D.
Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1.
1.8
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify field measurements and adjust installation as required.
1.9
INSTALLATION OF STUDS
A.
Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ASTM C1007 requirements.
B.
Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall layout. Secure in place with fasteners at maximum 24 inches on
center. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks.
C.
Place studs at 16 inches on center; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at each side of openings.
Connect studs to tracks using clip and tie method.
D.
Construct corners using minimum of three studs. Install double studs at wall openings, door and window jambs.
E.
Install load bearing studs full length in one piece. Splicing of studs is not permitted.
F.
Install load bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength and achieve design requirements.
G.
Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection.
H.
Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing.
I.
Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load bearing framing.
J.
Attach cross studs to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls.
K.
Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation.
L.
Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer.
1.10
TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/4 inch.
B.
Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/4 inch.
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
1.1
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show
anchorage and accessory items.
1.2
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by
field measurements before fabrication.
1.3
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating
manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one
another.
B.
Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing
anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be
embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
1.4
METALS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal
fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled
trade names, or blemishes.
1.5
FERROUS METALS
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
B.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
Page - 23
29 October 2015
1.6
FASTENERS
A.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated
fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select
fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
1.7
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
B.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with
MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
1.8
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately
1/32 inch 1 mm unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing
work.
D.
Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of
base metals.
2.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3.
Remove welding flux immediately.
4.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows
after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
F.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where
possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise
indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G.
Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
H.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
I.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to
secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
1.
Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel
strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8
inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
1.9
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.
B.
Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate
to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.
1.
Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.
C.
Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes [indicated] [recommended by
partition manufacturer] with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as [indicated] [recommended by
partition manufacturer]. Drill or punch bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate
holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings.
1.10
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A.
Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete,
sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.
1.11
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set
metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true,
and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
B.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as
exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade
surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field
connections.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of
base metals.
2.
3.
4.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows
after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
D.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are
required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry
inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.
Page - 24
29 October 2015
E.
F.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar
construction.
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete,
masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:
1.
Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint.
2.
Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.
1.12
INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including
manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
B.
Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.
1.13
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint
uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for
touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
B.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop
paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply
with ASTM A 780.
061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY – NON STRUCTURAL
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.
1.
If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is
specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements.
2.
Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American
Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade
specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated.
1.2
DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS
A.
Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
B.
Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.
C.
Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:
1.
Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.
2.
Boards: Standard or No. 3.
1.3
CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A.
Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards and Wall Protection: PS 1 A-D-EXT plywood, 3/4 inch
thick. Provide FR (fire retardant) treated material where required by code.
1.4
ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners and Anchors:
1.
Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and
preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.
2.
Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry.
1.5
FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A.
Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood
treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications.
1.
Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating compliance
with specified requirements.
2.
Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited
testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards.
B.
Preservative Treatment:
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Arch Wood Protection, Inc : www.wolmanizedwood.com.
b.
Viance, LLC : www.treatedwood.com.
c.
Osmose, Inc : www.osmose.com.
2.
Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B, Commodity
Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention.
a.
Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
b.
Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing.
c.
Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete.
d.
Treat lumber in other locations as indicated.
1.6
PREPARATION
A.
Where wood framing bears on cementitious foundations, install full width sill flashing continuous over top of
foundation, lap ends of flashing minimum of 4 inches and seal.
Page - 25
29 October 2015
B.
Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.
1.7
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Select material sizes to minimize waste.
B.
Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components,
including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
C.
Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation
sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.
1.8
BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS
A.
Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items,
and trim.
B.
In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames,
securely attached to stud framing.
C.
In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be
securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated.
D.
Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other
method of support is explicitly indicated.
1.9
INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A.
Plywood Wall Sheathing
1.
Install with long edge perpendicular to framing.
2.
Allow 1/8 inch open space between panel ends and edges for expansion and contraction.
3.
Place ends over framing members. Install over two or more spans with end joints staggered and face
grain perpendicular to supports.
4.
Secure with galvanized nails to each support spacing fasteners at 12 inch o.c. for intermediate supports
and 6 inch o.c. for ends supports (or at spacing as otherwise indicated on structural drawings), using 8d
ring shank nails. Staples will be allowed as a substitution if allowed by governing codes, Architect, and
Owner.
5.
Use edge clips at all unsupported edges at roof sheathing, spaced at 12" maximum on center.
B.
Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm
bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into studs in field of board.
1.10
TOLERANCES
A.
Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.
B.
Variation from Plane: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum.
SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
1.3
A.
B.
WALL SHEATHING
Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177.
1.
a.
CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc.
b.
G-P Gypsum Corporation; Dens-Glass Gold.
c.
Temple-Inland Inc.; GreenGlass
d.
United States Gypsum Co.; Securock.
2.
Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick.
3.
Size: 48 by 108 inches.
FOAM PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below,
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a.
DiversiFoam Products.
b.
Dow Chemical Company (The). Styrofoam
c.
Owens Corning. Foamular CW
d.
Pactiv Building Products.
2.
Type IV, 25 psi
Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to
substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
Thickness: 1 inch.
GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION
Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.
2.
Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements.
3.
Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to
prevent wicking.
Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing.
Page - 26
29 October 2015
C.
D.
Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those
of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud.
Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards.
SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
1.1
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment
devices, and other components.
1.
Show details in sufficient scale to determine compliance with the intent of the Quality Standard Grade
specified.
2.
Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and
reinforcement specified in other Sections.
3.
Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures installed in architectural woodwork.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection:
1.
Plastic laminates.
1.2
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete,
and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the
remainder of the construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other
construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements
before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
2.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,
establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide
allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond
to established dimensions.
1.3
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work
specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as
indicated.
1.4
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork
and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Wood Products: Comply with the following:
1.
Hardboard: Tempered, AHA A135.4.
2.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea
formaldehyde.
a.
Type A (standard): MDF, MR10 – ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.
b.
Type B (where additional moisture resistance is needed): MDF, MR30 – ANSI A208.2, Grade
155.
c.
Type C (near sinks, splashes, and other high humidity locations): MDF, MR50 – ANSI A208.2,
Grade 150
3.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
C.
Thermoset Decorative Laminate (melamine): Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally
fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.
D.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by
woodwork quality standard.
1.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates by
one of the following:
a.
Abet Laminati, Inc.
b.
Formica Corporation.
c.
Lamin-Art, Inc.
d.
Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div.
e.
Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
2.
Colors/textures: As indicate in Finish Legend.
1.5
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for
items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)."
B.
Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening, self-closing.
C.
Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 5 inches long, 2-1/2 inches deep, and 5/16 inch in diameter.
D.
Magnetic Catches: BHMA A156.9, B03141.
E.
Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.
F.
Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal, equal to Hafele 282.04.711.
G.
Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.
Page - 27
29 October 2015
1.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel
ball-bearing slides.
2.
File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers more than 6 inches 1high or 24 inches wide.
3.
Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 2; for drawers not more than 3 inches high and 24 inches wide.
Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch OD, black, molded-plastic grommets and matching
plastic caps with slot for wire passage.
1.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "EDP series" by Doug Mockett & Company,
Inc.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA
finish number indicated, unless noted otherwise.
1.
Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in
BHMA A156.9.
1.6
A.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15
percent moisture content.
B.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide
nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as
required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
C.
Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.
1.
Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.
1.7
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom -grade interior woodwork complying with
referenced quality standard.
B.
Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the
following:
1.
Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or Less: 1/16 inch.
2.
Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch.
3.
Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch.
C.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible
before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete.
2.
Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels,
screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that
various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements
indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.
D.
Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical
work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce
accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
1.
Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
1.8
PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS
A.
Grade: Custom.
B.
AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.
C.
Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements:
1.
Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS.
2.
Post-formed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
3.
Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.
4.
Edges: Grade HGS.
D.
Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces:
1.
Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermostet Decorative Laminate.
a.
For semi-exposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of
high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade CLS.
2.
Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber.
3.
Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood, ¼ inch thick.
E.
Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade
BKL.
F.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed
laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1.
As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations.
2.
Match Architect's sample.
3.
As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following categories:
a.
Solid colors, matte finish.
b.
Solid colors with core same color as surface, matte finish.
c.
Wood grains, matte finish.
d.
Patterns, matte finish.
Page - 28
29 October 2015
G.
Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless
located directly under tops.
1.9
PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A.
Grade: Custom.
B.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.
C.
Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts.
D.
Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
E.
Core Material: Medium density fiberboard.
F.
Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate.
G.
Paper Backing: Provide paper backing on underside of countertop substrate.
1.10
PREPARATION
A.
Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.
B.
Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as
required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
1.11
INSTALLATION
A.
Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of
type of woodwork involved.
B.
Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2,
to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb
(including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
E.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk,
concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing
screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent
finish is indicated.
F.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust
hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete
installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1.
Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.
2.
Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
3.
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with
No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch 25-mm penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging
strips or No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall
finish.
G.
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into
underside of countertop.
1.
Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's
written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth,
remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
2.
Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.
3.
Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive.
4.
Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
H.
Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler
where exposed.
1.12
A.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not
possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged
or soiled areas.
066400 - PLASTIC PANELING
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
PLASTIC SHEET PANELING
General: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319.
1.
a.
Crane, Kemlite Company Inc.
b.
Marlite.
c.
Nudo Products, Inc.
2.
Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch.
Page - 29
29 October 2015
3.
4.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Surface Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Color: As indicated in Finish Legend.
ACCESSORIES
Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels.
Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges.
1.
Color: Match panels.
Concealed Mounting Splines: Continuous, H-shaped aluminum extrusions designed to fit into grooves routed in
edges of factory-laminated panels and to be fastened to substrate.
Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer.
Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling
manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
PREPARATION
Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even surface for panel
installation.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust.
Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's
written recommendations.
Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of walls not less than half the
width of full panels.
1.
Mark plumb lines on substrate at trim accessory locations for accurate installation.
2.
Locate trim accessories to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written instructions.
INSTALLATION
Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.
Install panels with fasteners. Layout fastener locations and mark on face of panels so that fasteners are accurately
aligned.
1.
Drill oversized fastener holes in panels and center fasteners in holes.
2.
Apply sealant to fastener holes before installing fasteners.
Install factory-laminated panels using concealed mounting splines in panel joints.
Install trim accessories with adhesive.
Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant.
Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.
Maintain uniform space between adjacent panels and between panels and floors, ceilings, and fixtures. Fill space
with sealant.
Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant
manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains.
SECTION 072418 - WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
1.1
A.
B.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Class PB EIFS: A non-load-bearing, exterior wall cladding system that consists of an insulation board attached
adhesively, mechanically, or both to the substrate; an integrally reinforced base coat; and a textured protective finish
coat.
Water-Drainage EIFS: EIFS with a means that allows water entering into an EIFS assembly to drain to the exterior.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
EIFS Performance: Comply with the following:
1.
Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within EIFS components or between system and supporting wall
construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in-service conditions.
2.
Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into water-drainage EIFS and assemblies
behind it or through them into interior of building that results in deterioration of thermal-insulating
effectiveness or other degradation of EIFS and assemblies behind it, including substrates, supporting wall
construction, and interior finish, and including a means that allows water entering into an EIFS assembly to
drain to the exterior.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type and component of EIFS indicated.
Shop Drawings: For EIFS. Include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, details of penetration and
termination, flashing details, joint locations and configurations, fastening and anchorage details including mechanical
fasteners, and connections and attachments to other work.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat color and texture indicated.
Include similar Samples of joint sealants and exposed accessories involving color selection.
Field quality-control reports and special inspection reports.
Page - 30
29 October 2015
1.4
A.
B.
C.
1.5
A.
B.
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
1.8
A.
1.9
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: An installer who is certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified to install
manufacturer's system using trained workers.
Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from sources approved by
EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and set quality standards for materials and execution and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels intact and clearly identifying products.
Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface
contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction traffic, and other causes.
1.
Stack insulation board flat and off the ground.
2.
Protect plastic insulation against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site
before installation time.
3.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Weather Limitations: Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg F for a minimum of 24 hours before, during, and
after adhesives or coatings are applied. Do not apply EIFS adhesives or coatings during rainfall. Proceed with
installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions and ambient outdoor air, humidity, and substrate
temperatures permit EIFS to be applied, dried, and cured according to manufacturers' written instructions and
warranty requirements.
COORDINATION
Coordinate installation of EIFS with related Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wall assemblies, including
sheathing, weather-resistant sheathing paper, flashing, trim, joint sealants, windows, and doors, are protected
against damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, moisture, and other causes. Do not allow water to
penetrate behind flashing and drainage plane that is behind water-drainage EIFS.
MANUFACTURERS
Dryvit Systems, Inc.
Finestone; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc.
Parex, Inc.; a brand of ParexLahabra, Inc.
Senergy; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc.
Sto Corp.
MATERIALS
Compatibility: Provide water-resistive coating, adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and
finish-coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and with substrates and
approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project.
Water-Resistive Coatings: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for use as water/weatherresistive barriers, compatible with substrate, and complying with physical and performance criteria of ICC-ES AC209.
1.
Sheathing Joint Tape: Type recommended by EIFS manufacturer for sealing joints between and
penetrations through sheathing.
2.
Acceptable Product: Stoguard with Goldcoat.
3.
Application: Over sheathing behind all EIFS systems.
Primer/Sealer: EIFS manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner with VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), designed to seal substrates from moisture
penetration and to improve the bond between substrate of type indicated and adhesive used for application of
insulation.
Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Cold-applied, fully self-adhering, self-healing, rubberized-asphalt and polyethylene-film
composite sheet or tape and primer; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS
manufacturer.
Insulation Adhesive: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated use; compatible with
substrate; and complying with one of the following:
Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, and polymer-based adhesive
specified for base coat.
Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type I; EIFS manufacturer's
requirements; and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board" for most
stringent requirements for material performance and qualities of insulation, including dimensions and permissible
variations, and the following:
1.
Aging: Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for not less than six weeks or
by another method approved by EIMA that produces equivalent results.
2.
Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed Indexes: 25 and 450 or less, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
3.
Dimensions: Provide insulation boards not more than 24 by 48 inches and in thickness indicated but not
more than 4 inches thick or less than thickness allowed by ASTM C 1397.
Page - 31
29 October 2015
4.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
1.10
A.
B.
1.11
A.
B.
C.
1.12
A.
B.
C.
Channeled Board Insulation: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-fabricated profile with linear, vertical
drainage channels, slots, or waves on the back side of board.
5.
Board Insulation Closure Blocks: EIFS manufacturer's standard density, size, and configuration.
6.
Foam Shapes: Provide with profiles and dimensions indicated on Drawings.
Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for compatibility with other EIFS
materials, made from continuous multi-end strands with retained mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbf/in. per
ASTM E 2098; complying with ASTM D 578 and the following:
1.
Standard-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd..
2.
Intermediate-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 10 oz./sq. yd.
3.
High-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 15 oz./sq. yd..
4.
Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz./sq. yd.
5.
Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd.
6.
Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq. yd.
Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture complying with one of the following requirements:
1.
Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, white or natural color; and
manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive designed for use with portland cement.
Waterproof Adhesive/Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard waterproof formulation with VOC content
of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with one of the
following:
1.
Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, white or natural color; and
manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive designed for use with portland cement.
2.
Job-combined formulation of manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive and manufacturer's
standard dry mix containing portland cement.
Finish-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard acrylic-based coating with enhanced mildew resistance
complying with the following:
1.
Factory-mixed formulation of polymer-emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound stone particles,
and fillers.
2.
Sealer: Manufacturer's waterproof, clear acrylic-based sealer for protecting finish coat.
3.
Colors: Match Architect's samples.
Water: Potable.
Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply with EIFS
manufacturer's written instructions; manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC; and complying with ASTM D 1784,
manufacturer's standard Cell Class for use intended, and ASTM C 1063.
1.
Drip Screed/Track: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation with face leg extended to
form a drip, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding
to coating and back leg.
2.
Weep Screed/Track: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation with perforated face
leg extended to form a drip and weep holes in track bottom, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and
insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg; designed to drain incidental moisture
that gets into wall construction to the exterior at terminations of EIFS with drainage
3.
Expansion Joint: Prefabricated, one-piece V profile; designed to relieve stress of movement.
4.
Window Sill Flashing: Prefabricated type for both flashing and sloping sill over framing beneath windows;
with end and back dams; designed to direct water to exterior.
ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
Elastomeric Sealant Products: Provide EIFS manufacturer's listed and recommended chemically curing, elastomeric
sealant that is compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates, and other related materials, and complies with
requirements for products and testing indicated in ASTM C 1481 and with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint
Sealants" for products corresponding to description indicated below:
1.
Multicomponent, non-sag urethane sealant.
2.
Single-component, non-sag, neutral-curing silicone sealant.
3.
Provide sealants, for use inside the weatherproofing system, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealant Color: Match Architect's samples.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of EIFS.
Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other construction for suitable
conditions where EIFS will be installed.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry.
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of EIFS. Provide temporary
covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish coats on other work.
Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during installation. Prevent
penetration of moisture behind drainage plane of EIFS and deterioration of substrates.
Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to obtain optimum bond
between substrate and adhesive for insulation.
Page - 32
29 October 2015
1.13
A.
EIFS INSTALLATION, GENERAL
Comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate
indicated.
1.14
A.
SUBSTRATE PROTECTION APPLICATION
Primer/Sealer: Apply over gypsum sheathing substrates to protect substrates from degradation and where required
by EIFS manufacturer for improving adhesion of insulation to substrate.
Water-Resistive Coatings: Apply over substrates to protect substrates from degradation and to provide water/weather-resistive barrier.
Tape and seal joints, exposed edges, terminations, and inside and outside corners of sheathing unless otherwise
indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.
Waterproof Adhesive/Base Coat: Apply over sloped surfaces and window sills.
Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over weather-resistive barrier, applied and lapped to shed water; seal at
openings, penetrations, terminations, and where indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to protect wall
assembly from degradation. Prime substrates, if required, and install flashing to comply with EIFS manufacturer's
written instructions and details.
B.
C.
D.
1.15
A.
TRIM INSTALLATION
Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints, at window sills, and elsewhere as indicated,
according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate with installation of insulation.
1.
Weep Screed/Track: Use at bottom termination edges, at window and door heads of water-drainage EIFS
unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Window Sill Flashing: Use at windows unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Expansion Joint: Use where indicated on Drawings.
1.16
A.
INSULATION INSTALLATION
Board Insulation: Adhesively attach insulation to substrate in compliance with ASTM C 1397, EIFS manufacturer's
written instructions.
Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, and as follows:
1.
At expansion joints in substrates behind EIFS.
2.
Where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction, including other EIFS.
3.
At floor lines in multilevel wood-framed construction.
4.
Where wall height or building shape changes.
5.
Where EIFS manufacturer requires joints in long continuous elevations.
B.
1.17
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.18
A.
B.
BASE-COAT INSTALLATION
Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation and foam shapes in minimum thickness recommended in writing
by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16-inch dry-coat thickness.
Reinforcing Mesh: Embed type indicated below in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free installation with mesh
continuous at corners and overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches or otherwise treated at joints to comply with
ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Do not lap reinforcing mesh within 8 inches of corners.
Completely embed mesh, applying additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern
are not visible.
1.
Standard-impact reinforcing mesh unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Intermediate-impact reinforcing mesh at window sills and parapet caps.
3.
High-impact reinforcing mesh below 8 feet above grade or adjacent walking surfaces..
Double-Layer Reinforcing Mesh Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat and second layer of standard
intermediate-impact reinforcing mesh, overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches or otherwise treated at joints to comply
with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions in same manner as first application. Do not apply
until first base coat has cured.
Additional Reinforcing Mesh: Apply strip reinforcing mesh around openings extending 4 inches beyond perimeter.
Apply additional 9-by-12-inch strip reinforcing mesh diagonally at corners of openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8inch- wide strip reinforcing mesh at both inside and outside corners unless base layer of mesh is lapped not less than
4 inches on each side of corners.
At aesthetic reveals, apply strip reinforcing mesh not less than 8 inches wide.
Embed strip reinforcing mesh in base coat before applying first layer of reinforcing mesh.
Foam Shapes: Fully embed reinforcing mesh in base coat.
Double Base-Coat Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat in same manner and thickness as first
application except without reinforcing mesh. Do not apply until first base coat has cured.
FINISH-COAT INSTALLATION
Finish Coat: Apply over dry base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness
required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of
cold joints, shadow lines, and texture variations.
Texture: Match Architect's samples.
Embed aggregate in finish coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform appliedaggregate finish of color and texture matching approved sample.
Sealer Coat: Apply over dry finish coat, in number of coats and thickness required by EIFS manufacturer.
Page - 33
29 October 2015
1.19
A.
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with applicable requirements in
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and in ASTM C 1481.
1.
Apply joint sealants after base coat has cured but before applying finish coat.
2.
Clean surfaces to receive sealants to comply with indicated requirements and EIFS manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.
Apply primer recommended in writing by sealant manufacturer for surfaces to be sealed.
4.
Install sealant backing to control depth and configuration of sealant joint and to prevent sealant from adhering
to back of joint.
5.
Apply masking tape to protect areas adjacent to sealant joints. Remove tape immediately after tooling joints,
without disturbing joint seal.
6.
Recess sealant sufficiently from surface of EIFS so an additional sealant application, including cylindrical
sealant backing, can be installed without protruding beyond EIFS surface.
1.20
A.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials from window and door
frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS coatings.
SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS – SHEET (ALTERNATE TO FUILD APPLIED BEHIND MASONRY VENEER)
1.1
A.
B.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation.
FIELD CONDITIONS
Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before, during and after
installation.
WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer’s standard 10 year water-tightness warranty covering material and installation.
WATER RESISTIVE BARRIER
Air Barrier Sheet, Mechanically Fastened:
1.
Air Penetration: 0.001 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. Type I per ASTM
E1677. ≤0.04 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2357.
2.
Water Vapor Transmission: 28 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96, Method B.
3.
Water Penetration Resistance: Minimum 280 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 127.
4.
Basis Weight: Minimum 2.7 oz/yd2, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-410.
5.
Air Resistance: Air infiltration at >1500 seconds, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460.
6.
Tensile Strength: Minimum 38/35 lbs/in., when tested in accordance with ASTM D882, Method A.
7.
Tear Resistance: 12/10 lbs., when tested in accordance with ASTM D1117.
8.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Flame Spread: 10,
Smoke Developed: 10.
9.
Manufacturers:
a.
DuPont Tyvek; www.dupont.com.
b.
Pactiv Corporation; greenguard.pactiv.com.
c.
VaproShield, LLC; www.vaproshield.com.
10.
Acceptable Products:
a.
Behind masonry veneer:
1)
Tyvek Commerical Wrap, by E.I. Dupont.
b.
Self-Adhering Flexible flashing tape, DuPont™ FlexWrap™. and Self Adhering Straight flashing tape,
DuPont™ StraightFlash ™.
A.
SEALANTS
Silicone Sealant: Type S-GP as specified in Section 079005.
A.
B.
C.
ACCESSORIES
Self-Adhesive Sheet Flashing: ASTM D 1970.
Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by material manufacturer.
Attachment Devices: Galvanized steel nails with weather resistant plastic caps.
A.
EXAMINATION
Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.
A.
PREPARATION
Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with proper installation.
A.
INSTALLATION
Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Page - 34
29 October 2015
B.
C.
D.
1.10
A.
B.
C.
1.11
A.
Water-Resistive/Air Barriers: Install continuous barrier over surfaces indicated, with sheets lapped to shed water but
with seams not sealed.
Mechanically Fastened Sheets - On Exterior:
1.
Install sheets shingle-fashion to shed water, with seams generally horizontal.
2.
Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer but at least 6 inches.
3.
Overlap at outside and inside corners as recommended by manufacturer but at least 12 inches.
4.
Attach to framed construction with fasteners extending through sheathing into framing. Space fasteners at 12
to 18 inches on center along each framing member supporting sheathing.
5.
For applications specified to be air-tight, seal seams, laps, penetrations, tears, and cuts with self-adhesive
tape; use only large-headed, gasketed fasteners recommended by the manufacturer.
6.
Install air barrier UNDER jamb flashings.
7.
Install head flashings under weather barrier.
8.
At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, wrap excess sheet into opening; at head, seal
sheet over flange and flashing.
Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers:
1.
Install self-adhesive flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inches onto
weather barrier and at least 6 inches up jambs; mechanically fasten stretched edges.
2.
At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flanges using a continuous
bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with self-adhesive flashing at least 4 inches wide;
do not seal sill flange.
3.
At openings to be filled with non-flanged frames, seal weather barrier to all sides of opening framing, using
self-adhesive flashing at least 9 inches wide, covering entire depth of framing.
4.
At head of openings, install self-adhesive flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inches beyond
face of jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing.
5.
At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing, using joint sealant over
backer rod.
6.
Service and Other Penetrations: Form self-adhesive flashing around penetrating item and seal to weather
barrier surface.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Do not cover installed weather barriers until required inspections have been completed.
Obtain approval of installation procedures by the weather barrier manufacturer based on a mock-up installed in place,
prior to proceeding with remainder of installation.
Provide inspections as required by weather barrier manufacturer as required to secure warranty indicated.
PROTECTION
Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer.
072600 - UNDER SLAB VAPOR BARRIER
1.1
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Close areas to traffic during application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer.
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate placement of sheet vapor barrier with Division 03 sections.
1.2
1.3
A.
B.
C.
1.4
A.
MATERIALS
Sheet Vapor Barrier:
1.
Type: 15 mil polyolefin film meeting requirements of ASTM E 1745, Class A.
2.
Water Vapor Transmittance (After mandatory condition per ASTM E154 sections 8,11,12,13): Maximum
perm rating of 0.01 as tested in accordance with ASTM E 1745 Section 7.
3.
Strength: ASTM E 1745: Class A.
Acceptable Products:
1.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier by Stego Industries, LLC, 15 mils.
Zero-Perm Vapor Barrier by Alumiseal.
Perminator by W.R. Meadows.
Xtreme by Tex-Trude
Accessories:
1.
Bonding Agent: Manufacturer’s approved or recommended vapor barrier bonding agent.
2.
Sealing and Seaming Tape: High density polyethylene tape a minimum of 4 inches in width, compatible with
vapor barrier membrane, and manufactured by or recommended by vapor barrier membrane manufacturer.
Tape for joints shall have at least the same permeability rating as the vapor barrier specified.
3.
Vapor Proofing Mastic: Manufacturer’s approved or recommended vapor proofing mastic with the same
permeability rating as the vapor barrier specified.
4.
Pipe Boot: Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material and pressure sensitive tape in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
INSTALLATION
Vapor Barrier:
Page - 35
29 October 2015
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Place, protect, and repair vapor barrier sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer’s written
instructions.
Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the concrete pour.
Install vapor barrier without tears, voids, and holes. Lap ends and edges as recommended by manufacturer,
but not less than 6 inches over adjacent sheets. Seal laps with tape.
Turn up sheets at perimeter, at footings and vertical walls, and against penetrations, and seal joints with
tape.
Seal joints, tears, holes, perimeter, and penetrations through vapor with tape in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Point exposed edges with pointing mastic to prevent water from traveling under membrane.
Adhere membrane to vertical surfaces with adhesive.
SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
1.1
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and
extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful
performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's
products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to
Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements:
1.
Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration
Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:
a.
Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting
agency.
b.
Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by the
following:
c.
UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
d.
Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."
C.
Products shall be provided by one manufacturer only.
1.3
MANUFACTURERS
A.
1.
Grace Construction Products.
2.
Hilti, Inc.
3.
Nelson Firestop Products.
4.
RectorSeal Corporation.
5.
Specified Technologies Inc.
6.
3M Fire Protection Products.
1.4
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
A.
Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements
indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction
penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming
openings, and with penetrating items if any.
B.
Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per
ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.
1.
Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls smoke-barrier walls and fire partitions.
2.
F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
C.
Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814
or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.
1.
Horizontal assemblies include floors floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling
assemblies.
2.
F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
3.
T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except
for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
D.
Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479.
1.
L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg at both ambient and
elevated temperatures.
E.
Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less
than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
F.
VOC Content: Provide penetration firestopping that complies with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1.
Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
2.
Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3.
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
G.
Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill
materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping
manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.
Page - 36
29 October 2015
1.5
MIXING
A.
For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's
written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection
of mixer speeds,
1.6
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening
configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
1.7
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:
1.
Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could
interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.
2.
Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing
optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
B.
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's
recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto
exposed surfaces.
1.8
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and
published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B.
Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application
and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings
indicated.
1.
After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and
other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.
1.9
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE
A.
Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory"
under product Category XHEZ.
B.
Where Intertek ETL SEMKO-listed systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers in Intertek ETL SEMKO's
"Directory of Listed Building Products" under "Firestop Systems."
C.
Where FM Global-approved systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers listed in FM Global's "Building
Materials Approval Guide" under "Wall and Floor Penetration Fire Stops."
D.
Firestop Systems with No Penetrating Items (FS-1): Comply with the following:
1.
Pipes, plastic or metal, conduit in vertical runs, installed through cast-in-place firestop devices.
a.
Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with FA 1000 Series Systems equivalent to, but not limited to,
the following:
b.
FA1016, FA1017, FA2053, FA2054 by Hilti.
c.
CP 680 Cast-in Firestop Device by Hilti.
d.
CP653 Speed Sleeve by Hilti.
E.
Firestop Systems with No Penetrating Items (FS-2): Comply with the following:
1.
Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ 0000 Series Systems equivalent to, but not limited to, the
following: CAJ0055, CAJ0070 by Hilti or CAJ0012, CAJ0102 by Grace.
2.
Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:
a.
Latex sealant.
b.
Silicone sealant.
c.
Acrylic sealant.
d.
Intumescent putty.
e.
Mortar.
f.
Preformed intumescent blocks.
g.
Pillows/Bags
F.
Firestop Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing (FS-3): Comply with the following:
1.
Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ, WL, or FC 1000 Series Systems, equivalent to, but not
limited to, the following: CAJ1184, CAJ1291, CAJ1277, CAJ1382, CAJ1388, WL1054, WL1249, FC1009
by Hilti or CAJ1403, CAJ1235, CAJ1406, WL1152, WL1207, FC1020 by Grace.
2.
a.
Latex sealant.
b.
Silicone sealant.
c.
Acrylic sealant.
d.
Intumescent putty.
e.
Mortar.
f.
Polyurethane firestop foam.
Page - 37
29 October 2015
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
Firestop Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing (FS-4): Comply with the following:
1.
Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ, FA, or WL 2000 Series Systems, equivalent to, but not
limited to, the following: CAJ2109, FA2053, WL2078, WL2128 by Hilti or CAJ2212, CAJ2171, CAJ2210,
WL2167, WL2185, WL2170, WL2259 by Grace.
2.
a.
Intumescent sealant.
b.
Intumescent putty.
c.
Intumescent wrap strips.
d.
Firestop device.
e.
Firestop sleeve device.
f.
Latex sealant.
Firestop Systems for Electrical Cables (FS-5): Comply with the following:
1.
Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ, FC, or WL 3000 Series Systems, equivalent to, but not
limited to, the following: CAJ3095, FC3012, WL3065, WL3112 by Hilti or CAJ3185, CAJ3199, CAJ3234,
FC3018, FC3060, WL3179 by Grace.
2.
a.
b.
Latex Sealant
c.
Pillows/bags
d.
Intumescent putty.
e.
Silicone foam.
Firestop Systems for Cable Trays (FS-6): Comply with the following:
1.
Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ or WL 4000 Series Systems equivalent to, but not limited to,
the following: CAJ4035, CAJ4054, WL4011, WL4034 by Hilti or CAJ4035, CBJ4023, WL4025, WL4030
by Grace.
2.
a.
b.
Intumescent putty.
c.
Silicone foam.
d.
Pillows/bags.
e.
Foam blocks.
f.
Firestop mortar.
g.
Polyurethane firestop foam.
Firestop Systems for Insulated Pipes (FS-7): Comply with the following:
1.
Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ or WL 5000 Series Systems, equivalent to, but not limited
to, the following: CAJ5091, WL5029 by Hilti or CAJ5222, WL5171 by Grace.
2.
a.
b.
Silicone foam.
c.
d.
Pre-formed intumescent blocks.
e.
Latex sealant.
Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants (FS-8): Comply with the following:
1.
following: CAJ6006, CAJ 6017 by Hilti or CAJ6012, CAJ6013, CAJ6027 by Grace.
2.
a.
b.
Latex sealant
c.
Intumescent putty.
d.
Mortar.
Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrations (FS-9): Comply with the following:
1.
following: CAJ7046, CAJ7051, CAJ7040, CAJ7021 by Hilti or CAJ7067, CAJ7075, CAJ7082 by Grace.
2.
Type of Fill Materials: One or both of the following:
a.
b.
Latex sealant.
c.
Mortar.
d.
Acrylic sealant.
e.
Silicone sealant.
Firestop Systems for Groupings of Penetrations (FS-10): Comply with the following:
1.
Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ or WL 8000 Series Systems, equivalent to, but not limited
to, the following: CAJ8056, CAJ8096, WJ8007, WL8014, WL8019 by Hilti or CAJ8042, CAJ8101,
CAJ8133, WL8007 by Grace.
2.
a.
Latex sealant.
b.
Mortar.
c.
d.
Firestop device.
e.
Intumescent composite sheet.
f.
Pre-formed intumescent blocks.
Page - 38
29 October 2015
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
1.1
WARRANTY
A.
Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to
furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements
specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion for silicone sealants.
1.2
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another
and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B.
Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquidapplied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and
uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
1.
Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be
continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to
ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
1.3
SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant(S-S:) ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25, for Use NT.
1.
a.
BASF Building Systems; Omniplus.
b.
Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.
c.
GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700.
d.
Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary.
1.4
URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Multicomponent, Self-Levelling, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant (U-TB): ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade SL,
Class 50, for Use T.
1.
a.
Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-270.
b.
Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240 FC.
c.
Pecora; Dynatread.
1.5
LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Latex Joint Sealant (AL): Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.
1.
a.
BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.
b.
Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600.
c.
May National Associates, Inc.
d.
Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
e.
Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
1.6
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS (AC)
A.
Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with
ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in
building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1.
a.
Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR .
b.
USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
1.7
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint
substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant
backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and
adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint
substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to
joints.
Page - 39
29 October 2015
1.8
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with jointsealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1.
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant,
including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant
adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, and surface dirt.
2.
Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint
substrates include the following:
a.
Metal.
b.
Glass.
c.
Porcelain enamel.
d.
Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by
preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant
manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or
migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces
that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to
remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
1.9
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A.
General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications
indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as
applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C.
Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to
produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
1.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3.
Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them
with dry materials.
D.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are
installed:
1.
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2.
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant
movement capability.
E.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool
sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of
configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1.
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2.
Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants
or adjacent surfaces.
3.
Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.
F.
Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at
perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant.
Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with
ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.
Page - 40
29 October 2015
1.10
JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A.
Sealant Schedule:
1.
Interior Joints:
a.
Wall and ceiling joints subject to movement: Designation U-MC.
b.
Wall and ceiling joints not subject to movement: Designation AL.
c.
Interior side of exterior openings: U-MC.
d.
Floor joints: Designation U-TB.
e.
Wall and ceiling joints between frames and their rough opening: Designation AL.
f.
Wall and ceiling joints between frames and adjoining surfaces: Designation AL.
g.
Interior Sanitary Joints; Joints Between Plumbing Fixtures and Adjoining Floor, Wall, and Ceiling
Surfaces; Joints Between Shower Door Enclosure Components and Adjacent Finish Surfaces;
Joints in Dietary and Food Preparation Areas, Kitchens, Food Storage Areas, and Areas Subject
to Frequent Wet Cleaning, including joints between walls and floors, Joints Between Back
Splashes and Wall Substrates: Designation S-S.
2.
Exterior locations:
a.
Wall joints:
1)
Bordered on both sides by porous building material (concrete, stone, masonry, cement
plaster): Designation S-GP.
2)
Bordered on both sides by non-porous building material (coated and uncoated metals,
anodized aluminum, porcelain tile, and glass): Designation S-GP.
3)
Bordered on one side by porous building material (concrete, stone, masonry) and other side
by non-porous building material (coated and uncoated metals, anodized aluminum, porcelain
tile, and glass): Designation S-GP.
b.
Perimeter of penetrations through walls: Designation S-GP
c.
Expansion joints in ceilings, soffits, and overhead surfaces: Designation S-GP
d.
Control joints and perimeter of penetrations in ceilings, soffits, and overhead surfaces: Designation
S-GP
e.
Wall and ceiling joints between frames and their rough opening: Designation S-GP.
f.
Wall and ceiling joints between frames and adjoining surfaces: Designation S-GP.
g.
Joints and perimeter of penetrations in horizontal pedestrian and vehicle traffic surfaces: Designation
U-TB.
081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
1.1
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and
locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard.
B.
Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of
different finishes, if any.
1.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Steel Doors and Frames:
1.
Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming: www.assaabloydss.com.
2.
Republic Doors: www.republicdoor.com.
3.
Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com.
1.3
DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
Requirements for All Doors and Frames:
1.
Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1.
2.
Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges.
3.
Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges.
4.
Door Texture: Smooth faces.
5.
Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on
drawings.
6.
Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in place, in
addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.
7.
Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
B.
Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of
requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also
indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for soundrated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent.
Page - 41
29 October 2015
1.4
STEEL DOORS
A.
Exterior Doors:
1.
Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless.
2.
Core: Polystyrene foam.
3.
Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM
A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
4.
Insulating Value: U-value of 0.50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363.
5.
Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 087100.
B.
Interior Doors , Non-Fire-Rated:
1.
Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 1, physical performance Level C, Model 1, full flush.
2.
Core: Cardboard honeycomb.
3.
Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
C.
Interior Doors, Fire-Rated:
1.
Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 1, full flush.
2.
Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C ("positive
pressure").
a.
Provide units listed and labeled by UL.
b.
Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit.
3.
Core: Mineral fiberboard.
D.
Interior Smoke and Draft Control Doors: Same construction as fire-rated doors with indicated fire rating, plus:
1.
Gasketing: No added gasketing or seals allowed.
2.
Label: UL "S" label.
1.5
STEEL FRAMES
A.
General:
1.
Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door, except:
a.
ANSI A250.8 Level 1 Doors: 16 gage frames.
b.
Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 1,
18 gage
2.
Finish: Same as for door.
3.
Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted.
4.
Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top.
5.
Frames Installed Back-to-Back: Reinforce with steel channels anchored to floor and overhead structure.
B.
Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled.
1.
Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 087100.
C.
Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Face welded, seamless with joints filled.
D.
Interior Door Frames, Fire-Rated:Face welded, seamless with joints filled .
1.
Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.
1.6
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Glazing: As specified in Section 088000 , factory installed.
B.
Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and
2 on head of pairs without center mullions.
C.
Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames.
1.7
FINISH MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10 , door manufacturer's standard.
1.8
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840.
B.
In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.
C.
Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
D.
Coordinate installation of hardware.
E.
Coordinate installation of glazing.
F.
Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.
1.9
TOLERANCES
A.
Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8.
B.
Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
1.10
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
081216 - ALUMINUM FRAMES
1.1
A.
B.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of
individual components and profiles, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.
Schedule: For interior aluminum frames. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Coordinate with door
hardware schedule and glazing.
Page - 42
29 October 2015
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Source Limitations: Obtain interior aluminum frames from single source from single manufacturer.
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing
agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers:
1.
Frameworks Manufacturing.
2.
Versatrac.
3.
Wilson Partitions.
4.
Aluma Pro L.P.
5.
Modulex.
6.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.6
A.
B.
1.7
A.
1.8
A.
B.
C.
Raco (Basis of Design: Solutions).
COMPONENTS
Aluminum Framing: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 or alloy and temper required to suit structural and finish
requirements, not less than 0.062 inch thick. Billets shall be composed of at least 33% recycled aluminum.
Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, reinforced for hinges, strikes, and closers. Refer to Drawings for frame types.
1.
90-Minute Fire-Protection Rating (where indicated in schedule): Fabricate aluminum frame assemblies with
a cold-formed, primed, interior steel liner.
Glazing Frames: Extruded aluminum, for glazing thickness indicated.
Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch thick, with removable snap-in glazing stops and door stops
without exposed fasteners.
1.
Trim Style: As selected by Architect.
ACCESSORIES
Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic, stainless-steel or other non-corrosive metal fasteners compatible with frames,
stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened.
Door Silencers: Manufacturer's standard continuous mohair, wool pile, or vinyl seals[; Insert color].
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded plastic, to accommodate glazing thickness indicated;
black color.
Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
Hardware: Comply with requirements in Division 08 door hardware Sections.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for
applying and designating finishes.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of
adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or
installed to minimize contrast.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
Dark Bronze Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A21, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
INSTALLATION
General: Install interior aluminum frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
Set frames accurately in position and plumbed, aligned, and securely anchored to substrates.
1.
At fire-protection-rated openings, install interior aluminum frames according to NFPA 80.
Install frame components in the longest possible lengths; components up to 96 inches long must be one piece.
1.
Fasten to suspended ceiling grid on maximum 48-inch centers, using sheet metal screws or other fasteners
approved by frame manufacturer.
2.
Use concealed installation clips to produce tightly fitted and aligned splices and connections.
3.
Secure clips to extruded main-frame components and not to snap-in or trim members.
4.
Do not leave screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation is complete.
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
1.1
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
1.
For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, and trim for
openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction
details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality
Standards Illustrated” for veneers faces and WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors” for performance of
the door. along with "WI's "Manual of Millwork."
Page - 43
29 October 2015
B.
Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing
agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL
10C.
1.
Temperature-Rise Limit: [At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways], provide doors that have a
maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes
of standard fire-test exposure.
2.
Indicate rating and listing agent with permanently attached label on edge of door, if continuous hinge is
used adhere label on top of door.
1.3
A.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheathing.
C.
Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in
spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity
conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1.5
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section.
b.
Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span.
c.
Telegraphing of core construction and delamination of face in decorative laminated faced doors.
2.
Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of
defective doors.
3.
Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
1.6
MANUFACTURERS
A.
1.
Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
2.
Eggers Industries.
3.
Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company.
4.
Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
5.
VT Industries Inc.
1.7
DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A.
Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain
urea formaldehyde.
B.
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.
C.
Particleboard-Core Doors:
1.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1.
2.
Agrifiber board: Straw-based particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2 or M-2, except for
density.
3.
Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting
hardware.
a.
8-inch top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers.
b.
5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick, mop, or armor
plates.
c.
5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.
4.
Provide doors with structural-composite-lumber (SCL) cores instead of particleboard cores for the
following door types:
a.
Indicated to receive exit devices.
b.
Doors with more then 40 percent of core removed.
c.
Lock and Light cutout stiles less then 5 1/2 inches between cutouts.
d.
Shipping and receiving doors.
D.
Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating
indicated.
1.
Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply
with specified requirements for exposed edges.
2.
Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formedsteel edges and astragals. [ Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals.] Comply with specified
requirements for exposed edges.
E.
Mineral-Core Doors:
1.
Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and
testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.
2.
Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors
of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.
a.
8-inch top-rail blocking.
b.
5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates.
Page - 44
29 October 2015
3.
c.
5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have armor plates.
d.
4-1/2-by-10-inch lock blocks, in doors indicated to have exit devices.
Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding
capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges exceeding WDMA
1.8
VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A.
Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1.
Grade: Custom (Grade A faces).
2.
Species and Cut: Refer to Finish Legend.
3.
Exposed Vertical Edges: Applied wood-veneer edges of same species as faces and covering edges of
faces
4.
Core: Particleboard and comply with section 2.2.
5.
Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before
veneering.
6.
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.
1.9
LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES
A.
Metal Louvers:
1.
a.
Air Louvers Inc.
b.
Anemostat; a Mestek company.
c.
Hiawatha Incorporated.
d.
McGill Architectural Products.
e.
Pemko Manufacturing Company, Inc.
2.
Blade Type: Vision-proof, inverted V or inverted Y.
3.
Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish with baked-enamelor powder-coated finish.
B.
Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors over 20-minute rating: Manufacturer's standard frame
formed of 0.048-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; with factory baked-enamel or powder-coated finish; and
approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated.
1.10
FABRICATION
A.
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality
standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
B.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3.
Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware
templates.
1.
Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory
machining.
2.
Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated
doors.
3.
Pre-drill hinge screw holes at factory for templated hinges.
4.
Factory drill raceways for power cords to electrified hardware as scheduled in Door Hardware Sets.
5.
Where armor plates are specified in Door Hardware Sets, ensure blocking and labeling is sufficient in
door and fire label approves the attachment of the listed armor plate.
C.
Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.
1.
Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2.
Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable
requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
3.
Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
1.11
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting
doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.
1.
Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on [top
and] bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B.
Finish doors at factory.
C.
Transparent Finish:
1.
Grade: Premium.
2.
Finish: Meets or exceeds TR6 finish performance requirements as per WDMA I.S. 1A
3.
Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of custom colors.
4.
Effect: Semi-filled finish, produced by applying an additional finish coat to partially fill the wood pores.
5.
Sheen: Satin
1.12
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1.
Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics
and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2.
Reject doors with defects.
B.
Page - 45
29 October 2015
1.13
INSTALLATION
A.
Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
B.
Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced
quality standard, and as indicated.
1.
Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C.
Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
D.
Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.
1.14
ADJUSTING
A.
Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B.
Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be
repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
1.1
COORDINATION
A.
Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed
plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in "Submittals" Article.
Size and final location of access doors to be coordinated with Architect.
1.2
STEEL MATERIALS
A.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS) with A60 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed)
coating or G60 mill-phosphatized zinc coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness; with minimum thickness
indicated representing specified thickness according to ASTM A 924.
B.
Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1.
Surface Preparation for Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces with non-petroleum solvent so
surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the
organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and
apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.
a.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
2.
Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard twocoat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint
manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2
mils.
C.
Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive joint compound
and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board.
1.3
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
1.
Accudor Products, Inc.
2.
Babcock-Davis; A Cierra Products Co.
3.
Jensen Industries.
4.
J. L. Industries, Inc.
5.
Karp Associates, Inc.
6.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
7.
Milcor Inc.
8.
Nystrom, Inc.
1.4
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B.
Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent
finish surfaces.
C.
Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
1.5
A.
Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
083611 - SECTIONAL DOORS
1.1
A.
B.
General Performance: Sectional doors shall meet performance requirements specified without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary
installation of reinforcing components.
Structural Performance: Exterior sectional doors shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the following loads
and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
Page - 46
29 October 2015
1.
2.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.4
A.
B.
B.
D.
E.
1.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.6
A.
B.
1.7
A.
B.
Design Wind Loads: As indicated on structural drawings or as otherwise determined using design wind loads
applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5,
"Method 2-Analytical Procedure."
Deflection Limits: Design sectional doors to withstand design wind loads without evidencing permanent
deformation or disengagement of door components. Deflection of door in horizontal position (open) shall not
exceed 1/120 of the door width.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory. Include the following:
Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profile door sections, and finishes.
Rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories.
DOOR SECTIONS
Exterior Section Faces and Frames: Fabricate from zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS)
sheet, complying with ASTM A 653, with indicated zinc coating and thickness. At glazed panels, provide frames of
6063-T5 alloy aluminum.
Section Ends and Intermediate Stiles: Enclose open ends of sections with channel end stiles formed from
galvanized-steel sheet not less than 0.064-inch- nominal coated thickness and welded to door section. Provide
intermediate stiles formed from not less than 0.064-inch- thick galvanized-steel sheet, cut to door section profile, and
welded in place. Space stiles not more than 48 inches apart.
Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle conforming to bottom-section profile[ and allowing
installation of astragal].
Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen door and for wind
loading. Provide galvanized-steel bars, struts, trusses, or strip steel, formed to depth and bolted or welded in place.
Ensure that reinforcement does not obstruct vision lites.
Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment.
TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES
Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system of configuration indicated, sized for door size and
weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances shown on Drawings, and complying with ASTM A 653 for
minimum G60 zinc coating. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement for rigid
support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and size. Slot vertical sections of track spaced 2 inches
apart for door-drop safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or design tracks to ensure tight closure
at jambs when door unit is closed.
Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel track reinforcement and support members, complying with
ASTM A 36 and ASTM A 123. Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as required for door size and weight to provide
strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors.
Horizontal Track Assembly: Track with continuous reinforcing angle attached to track and supported at points from
curve in track to end of track by laterally braced attachments to overhead structural members.
Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber,
or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door unless otherwise indicated.
Windows: Manufacturer's standard insulated units of type and size indicated and in arrangement shown. Set glazing
in vinyl, rubber, or neoprene glazing channel for metal-framed doors and elastic glazing compound for wood doors,
as required. Provide removable stops of same material as door-section frames.
HARDWARE
General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or other
corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type.
Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges of not less than 0.079-inch- nominal coated thickness at each end stile
and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to
door sections through stiles and rails with bolts and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping
fasteners where access to nuts is not possible. Provide double-end hinges where required, for doors over 16 feet
wide unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer.
Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to
suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double hinges are required. Provide 3-inchdiameter roller tires for 3-inch- wide track and 2-inchdiameter roller tires for 2-inch- wide track.
Push/Pull Handles: For push-up or emergency-operated doors, provide galvanized-steel lifting handles on each side
of door.
LOCKING DEVICES
Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on
single-jamb side, operable from inside only.
Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when
door is locked.
COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM
Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs fabricated from steelspring wire complying with ASTM A 229, mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs
designed for number of operation cycles indicated.
Cable Drums and Shaft for Doors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted on torsion shaft and
grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's
Page - 47
29 October 2015
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.8
A.
B.
C.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft. Provide one additional midpoint bracket for shafts up to
16 feet long and two additional brackets at one-third points to support shafts more than 16 feet long unless closer
spacing is recommended by door manufacturer.
Cables: Galvanized-steel lifting cables with cable safety factor of at least 5 to 1.
Cable Safety Device: Include a spring-loaded steel or spring-loaded bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller
assembly on each side and designed to automatically stop door if either lifting cable breaks.
Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to level the
shaft and prevent sag.
Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation.
DOOR ASSEMBLY
Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections.
1.
a.
Clopay Building Products; a Griffon company.
b.
Overhead Door Corporation.
c.
Republic Doors.
d.
Haas Doors (Basis of Design: Model 2032 series with full vision lights in 3 center sections, insulated,
with insulated glass achieving a U value of not less than 0.39 and a SHGC of not less than 0.47).
Operation Cycles: Not less than 20,000.
Track Configuration: Standard lift.
Weatherseals: Fitted to bottom and top and around entire perimeter of door.
Windows: Sizes as indicated approximately and spaced apart the approximate distance as indicated on Drawings; in
one row at height indicated on Drawings; installed with glazing of the following type:
1.
Glass: 3 mm thick PPG Solargray and complying with ASTM C 1036 and C1048 fully tempered, Type I,
Class 1, Quality Q3.
Roller-Tire Material: Manufacturer's standard.
Locking Device Assembly: Single-jamb side locking bars, operable from inside with thumbturn.
Counterbalance Type: Torsion spring.
Door Finish: As selected by Architect.
Provide doors with exhaust port holes where required for exhausting vehicles.
1.10
A.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
Door Frame Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full available range.
1.11
A.
INSTALLATION
Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and
equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.
Tracks:
Fasten vertical track assembly to opening jambs and framing, spaced not more than 24 inches apart.
Hang horizontal track assembly from structural overhead framing with angles or channel hangers attached to framing
by welding or bolting, or both. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for
rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment.
Repair galvanized coating on tracks according to ASTM A 780.
Accessibility: Install sectional doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory
requirements for accessibility.
B.
C.
1.12
A.
B.
C.
D.
ADJUSTING
Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.
Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.
Adjust doors and seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter.
Align and adjust motors, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
084313 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
1.1
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners,
glass and infill, door hardware, internal drainage details.
B.
Shop Drawings: Provide Engineered, sealed shop drawings indicating system dimensions, framed opening
requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and
field welding required.
1.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
YKK AP America Inc : www.ykkap.com.
2.
Kawneer North America : www.kawneer.com.
3.
United States Aluminum Corp : www.usalum.com.
4.
Oldcastle Building Envelope Products : www.oldcastlebe.com.
Page - 48
29 October 2015
1.3
STOREFRONT
A.
Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and
related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
1.
Glazing Rabbet: For 1 inch insulating glazing.
2.
Glazing Position: Center-set.
3.
Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep.
4.
Water Leakage Test Pressure Differential: 2.86 lbf/sq ft.
5.
Air Infiltration Test Pressure Differential: 1.57 psf.
6.
Condensation Resistance Factor: 40 minimum
B.
Performance Requirements:
1.
Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements without damage or permanent
set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10
second duration of maximum load.
a.
Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full
recovery of glazing materials.
2.
Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel,
without damage to components or deterioration of seals.
3.
System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water
entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within
system.
4.
Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by
cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to
system components, anchorages, and other building elements.
1.4
COMPONENTS
A.
Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections , thermally broken with interior section insulated from
exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system.
1.
Glazing stops: Flush.
2.
Structurally Reinforced Members: Extruded aluminum with internal reinforcement of structural steel
member.
3.
Subsills: Provide manufacturer's standard subsills for all storefront framing.
B.
Doors: Glazed aluminum, heavy duty (1/8 inch wall thickness; with fully welded internal joints).
1.
Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
2.
Top Rail: 4 inches wide.
3.
Vertical Stiles: 4-1/2 inches wide.
4.
Bottom Rail: 10 inches wide.
5.
Glazing Stops: Square.
6.
Finish: Same as storefront.
1.5
MATERIALS
A.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).
B.
Fasteners: Stainless steel.
C.
Concealed Flashings: 0.018 inch thick galvanized steel.
D.
Perimeter Sealant: Type S-GP specified in Section 07 9005.
E.
Glass: As specified in Section 088000.
F.
Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements.
G.
Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 088000.
1.6
FINISHES
A.
Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
1.
Color: Dark bronze.
1.7
HARDWARE
A.
Door Hardware: Refer Drawings.
B.
Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors.
C.
Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, retracting, of neoprene; provide on all doors.
1.8
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling
installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
B.
Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline , and weatherproof.
C.
Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
D.
Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with
bituminous paint.
E.
Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.
F.
Reinforce components internally for door hardware .
G.
Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.
H.
Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.
1.
Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies,
including joint edges.
Page - 49
29 October 2015
1.9
INSTALLATION
A.
Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other
irregularities.
C.
Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.
D.
Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with
adjacent work.
E.
Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
F.
Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form watertight dam.
G.
Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads to sill flashing.
H.
Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
I.
Fill shim spaces with low rise urethane foam sealant at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal
barrier.
J.
Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure.
K.
Install hardware using templates provided.
L.
Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 088000, using glazing method required to achieve
performance criteria.
M.
Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1.10
TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft, whichever is
less.
B.
Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.
1.11
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation.
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE
1.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Door Hardware Installer Qualifications: An experienced and factory trained Installer who has completed both
standard and electrified builders hardware and integrated access control installations similar in material, design,
and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of
successful in-service performance.
B.
Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity
which is not more then a half day of travel from the jobsite and who employs a qualified Architectural Hardware
Consultant or equivalent experience available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect,
and Owner about door hardware and keying. Supplier recognized by manufacturers to be a direct factoryauthorized distributor of the specified hardware products. Supplier is required to be available for onsite meetings
with two days notice regarding issues that arise with opening functions, installation, keying, on-site warehousing,
trouble shooting of products, and final punch out related issues.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following:
1.
Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with “Americans with Disabilities Act”
(ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI A117.1, and “Texas
Accessibility Standards” (TAS).
2.
NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress door.
3.
Applicable building code, as indicated on drawings.
D.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Furnish door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated,
based on testing according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40" above sill) or UL-10C.
1.
Test Pressure: Positive pressure labeling.
1.2
A.
Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include
basic installation instructions with each item or package.
B.
Deliver permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, electronic key software with loaded bitting
and key records per cylinder, and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package
service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference". Hardware
Supplier must be a regional supplier to address owner questions and concerns relating to keying issues that arise
as project close-out.
1.3
COORDINATION
A.
Templates: Door Hardware Supplier to furnish and distribute to the parties involved for templating for doors,
frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard, electrified and access control door
hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and
installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
1.4
SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A.
General: Furnish door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and the Door
Hardware Schedule on the Drawings.
Page - 50
29 October 2015
1.
B.
Door Hardware Sets: Furnish quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated for named products listed in
Hardware Sets.
2.
Sequence of Operation: Furnish electrified and access control hardware function, sequence of
operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type
of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule on drawings
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING
1.1
A.
General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind loads without failure,
including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation;
failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects
in construction.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified
insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass manufacturer.
B.
Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification
label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall
indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
1.4
A.
Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing
materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
B.
Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid
hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.
1.5
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coatedglass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period.
Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass
breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects
include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.
1.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which laminated-glass
manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period.
Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass
breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects
include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding
those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.
1.
1.6
GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to
comply with requirements indicated.
1.
Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.
B.
Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or
Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heatstrengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as
needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide
Kind FT heat-treated float glass.
1.7
GLASS PRODUCTS
A.
Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind
and condition indicated.
1.
Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom
edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
2.
For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
3.
For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).
Page - 51
29 October 2015
1.8
GLAZING GASKETS
A.
Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain
watertight seal, made from one of the following:
1.
Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864.
2.
EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.
3.
Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.
4.
Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.
1.9
GLAZING SEALANTS
A.
General:
1.
Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials
they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates,
under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing
and field experience.
2.
Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing
sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.
3.
VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
B.
Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 50, Use NT.
1.
a.
Dow Corning Corporation; 795 .
b.
GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilGlaze II SCS2800.
c.
Pecora Corporation; 864 .
d.
Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2.
1.10
GLAZING TAPES
A.
Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; non-staining
and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by
tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for
products indicated below:
1.
AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.
2.
AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.
3.
AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.
1.11
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard,
requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven
record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.
D.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain
glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).
F.
Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control
glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.
G.
Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and
labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating indicated.
1.12
FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A.
Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge
and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced
glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.
B.
Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers
at junctions of edges and faces.
C.
Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
1.13
GLASS SCHEDULE
A.
Interior Glazing: ¼ inch clear fully tempered glass.
B.
Exterior Glass Low-e-coated, tinted insulating glass.
1.
Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch.
2.
Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm.
3.
Outdoor Lite: Float glass; fully tempered where required by code.
a.
Interspace Content: Air.
b.
Indoor Lite: Float glass; fully tempered where required by code.
c.
Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface.
d.
Maximum SHGC: 0.25.
4.
Acceptable Product: PPG Solarban 60 (2) Solargray on Clear.
C.
Provide safety glazing labeling
Page - 52
29 October 2015
1.14
GLAZING, GENERAL
A.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing
materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.
B.
Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite
on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
C.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and
legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when
installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.
D.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.
E.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless
otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G.
Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
1.
Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size
and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have
demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance
requirements.
2.
Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With
glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
H.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel,
as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing
publications.
I.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
J.
Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
K.
Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite
side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.
L.
Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket
manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended
by gasket manufacturer.
1.15
TAPE GLAZING
A.
Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude
slightly above sightline of stops.
B.
Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit
opening.
C.
Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal
framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D.
Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes
with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E.
Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
F.
Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
G.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression
gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at
corners and work toward centers of openings.
H.
Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
1.16
GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A.
Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with
allowance for stretch during installation.
B.
Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter
cut and bonded together at corners.
C.
Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly
against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place
against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket
joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D.
Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly
against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying
pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without
developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E.
Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
1.1
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.2
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel
framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
Page - 53
29 October 2015
1.3
FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1.
Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Studs and Runners: Comply with ASTM C 645.
1.
Steel Studs and Runners: Minimum base-metal thickness:
a.
25 gage unless indicated otherwise on Drawings or below.
b.
Interior Metal Stud/Gypsum Board Assemblies, Typical Locations: Withstand lateral loading (air
pressure) of 5 psf with deflection limit not more than L/240 of partition height.
c.
Where wall mounted equipment, woodwork, and casework items are indicated or elsewhere as
shown on Drawings, provide minimum 22 gage studs
d.
At partitions scheduled to receive tile backing panels or ceramic tile finish, provide minimum 22
gage studs
e.
Refer to Division 5 for stud framing for studs carrying heavy vertical loads (manufactured stone
masonry, stone tile thicker than ¾ inch, etc)
f.
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
C.
Head Joints: Provide one of the following at all partitions that extend to underside of structure:
1.
Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior
partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs
and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
a.
b.
Manufacturer’s standard deep leg track for non fire rated partitions.
c.
Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track (for non-rated partitions)
d.
Fas Track, CEMCO (for fire rated partitions only).
D.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
1.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.012 inch .
E.
Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide
flanges.
1.
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
2.
Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches , 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.
F.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch.
2.
Depth: 7/8 inch
G.
Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.
1.
Depth: 3/4 inch
2.
Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel
thickness of 0.0312 inch
3.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inchdiameter wire, or double
strand of 0.048-inchdiameter wire.
1.4
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties
required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B.
Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following:
1.
Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without
foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
1.5
A.
Installation Standard: ASTM-C754.
1.
Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM-C840 that apply to framing
installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet
accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C.
Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both
sides of joints independently.
1.6
INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A.
Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by
referenced installation standards for assembly types.
B.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install
isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C.
Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or
substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings.
Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.
1.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints
at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.
2.
Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on opening frames; install runner track
section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a.
Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
b.
Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from
jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.
Page - 54
29 October 2015
3.
D.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated
and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.
4.
Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.
5.
Curved Partitions:
a.
Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
b.
Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On
straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c.
Direct Furring:
1.
Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powderdriven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
1.1
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.2
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written
recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
1.3
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119, UL, or by an independent testing
agency as indicated on Drawings.
1.4
GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A.
Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond
with support system indicated.
1.5
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
1.
American Gypsum.
2.
CertainTeed Corp.
3.
Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
4.
National Gypsum Company.
5.
Temple-Inland.
6.
USG Corporation.
B.
Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2.
Long Edges: Tapered.
C.
Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M
1.
Core: 1/2
2.
Long edges tapered
1.6
TILE BACKING PANELS
A.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges.
1.
a.
CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer.
b.
Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer.
c.
USG Fiberrock Aqua-Tough Tile Backer Board.
2.
Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
3.
Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10.
1.7
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1.
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
2.
Shapes:
a.
Cornerbead.
b.
Bullnose bead.
c.
LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d.
L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e.
U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f.
Expansion (control) joint.
1.8
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475.
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
2.
Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other
compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
Page - 55
29 October 2015
1.
D.
Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type
taping compound.
2.
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use
drying-type, all-purpose compound.
a.
Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
3.
Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
4.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
5.
Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.
1.9
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch
thick.
2.
For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel
manufacturer.
B.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining
thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
1.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
C.
Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with
ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in
building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1.
a.
Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant.
b.
Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR AIS-919.
c.
Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.
d.
2.
Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1.10
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216-2007
B.
Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints
in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C.
Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than
1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum
board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends.
Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of
framed openings.
E.
Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F.
Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc., except in
chases braced internally.
1.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
2.
Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks,
cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install
sealant.
G.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors.
Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are
exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H.
Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after
panels have been installed on one side.
1.11
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Install interior gypsum board in the following locations (unless noted otherwise):
1.
Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: At damp locations where tile backer board is not used.
B.
Single-Layer Application:
1.
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and
at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
2.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or
required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a.
Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.
3.
On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate
edge joints over furring members.
4.
Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
C.
Multilayer Application:
1.
On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on
walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing
members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer
joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
Page - 56
29 October 2015
2.
3.
4.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to
framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least
one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fireresistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.
On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically
(parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring
member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.
Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.
1.12
APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install
with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
B.
Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11.
1.13
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, and according to ASTM C 840 and in
specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect, and as follows:
B.
Wall: Control joints shall be installed where a wall or partition runs in an uninterrupted straight plane exceeding
30 linear feet, or 900 ft2
C.
Ceiling with Perimeter relief: Control joints in interior ceilings with perimeter relief shall be installed so that linear
dimensions between control joints do not exceed 50 ft or 2500 sq. ft
D.
Ceiling, without perimeter relief: Control joints in interior ceilings without perimeter relief shall be installed so that
linear dimensions between control joints do not exceed 30 ft
E.
At acoustical or fir rated walls: Where a control joint occurs in an acoustical or fire rated system, blocking shall be
provided behind the control joint by using a backing material such as 5/8 in. type X gypsum panel products,
mineral fiber, or other tested equivalent
F.
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1.
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2.
LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3.
L-Bead: Use where indicated.
1.14
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
B.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to
receive tape.
C.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:
1.
Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2.
Level 2: Warehouse storage areas.
3.
Level 3: Beneath wall covering.
4.
Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
1.1
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations:
1.
Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.
2.
Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system through one
source from a single manufacturer.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following
requirements:
1.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface-burning
characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical
products per ASTM E 84:
a.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
1.3
A.
Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened
packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage
from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B.
Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.
C.
Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof,
wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
Page - 57
29 October 2015
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system,
and partition assemblies.
1.6
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 3.0 percent of quantity installed.
1.7
ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with
ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless
1.
Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is
15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795.
B.
Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.
1.
Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations
in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by
Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern,
color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.
1.8
ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING
A.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
1.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2.
Cetainteed.
3.
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
4.
USG Interiors, Inc.
C.
Basis-of-Design Product: Refer to Finish Legend.
1.9
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of
types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
B.
Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factoryapplied finish for type of system indicated.
C.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
1.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,
fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers
of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by
ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and
inspecting agency.
D.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1.
Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
2.
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct
Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inchdiameter wire.
E.
Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, and at exterior locations, and with 10 feet of an exterior door, provide
manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inches o.c. on all cross tees.
1.10
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING
A.
1.
2.
Certainteed.
3.
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
4.
USG Interiors, Inc.
B.
Unless noted otherwise in schedule, provide Wide-Face, Double-Web,Steel Suspension System: Main and cross
runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized
according to ASTM A 653, not less than G30 coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide metal caps
on flanges.
1.
Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system.
2.
End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
3.
Face Design: Flat, flush.
1.11
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A.
B.
Page - 58
29 October 2015
1.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a.
Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
b.
1.12
PREPARATION
A.
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges
of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected
ceiling plans.
1.13
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements
indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are
not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
2.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing,
countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing,
countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
4.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that
interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members,
install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
5.
Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight
turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are
secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion,
or elevated temperatures.
6.
Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both structure to
which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause
them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
7.
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-inplace hanger inserts, post-installed mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that
extend through forms into concrete.
8.
When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying
channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
9.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
10.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
11.
Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless
otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.
12.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits
established by referenced standards and publications.
C.
Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns.
Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent
metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or post-installed
anchors.
D.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to
conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1.
Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before
they are installed.
2.
Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches
from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners
accurately and connect securely.
3.
Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E.
Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and
replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge
moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.
1.
Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a.
As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
2.
For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension
system runners and moldings.
3.
For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm
contact with top surface of runner flanges.
4.
For reveal-edged panels on suspension system members with box-shaped flanges, install panels with
reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face
of runners.
5.
Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces
using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.
6.
Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fireresistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions, unless
7.
Install clean-room gasket system in areas indicated, sealing each panel and fixture as recommended by
panel manufacturer's written instructions.
Page - 59
29 October 2015
8.
Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated
assembly.
096116 - CONCRETE FLOOR SEALING
1.1
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical literature, including chemical properties and percentage of solids,
for each product.
1.2
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Do not apply materials when ambient or substrate surface temperatures are below 40 degrees F or higher than
100 degrees F.
B.
Do not apply during inclement weather or when forecasted conditions will not permit compliance with
manufacturer's printed instructions.
C.
Provide mechanical ventilation during and after application to dissipate fumes if natural ventilation is insufficient.
1.3
MATERIALS
A.
Liquid Membrane-Forming Sealer (for use on concrete floor slabs intended to be left exposed):
1.
Acceptable products:
a.
Dayton Superior Corporation; Ultra Seal EF.
1.4
PREPARATION
A.
Remove loose particles, foreign matter, and oil by method which will not affect sealer application.
B.
Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
C.
Provide protection as necessary to protect adjacent materials and surfaces from dirt, dust, spillage, overspray
and other surface or physical damage.
1.5
APPLICATION
A.
General:
1.
Provide finishes to match approved samples at locations indicated.
2.
Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
B.
Liquid Membrane-Forming Sealer:
1.
Apply sealer using low pressure airless sprayer in single coat at 250 ft/gal (6.0-7.0 WFT) coverage
unless greater amount is recommended by manufacturer to obtain penetration and full coverage.
2.
Do not allow flooding or puddling of material on surface.
3.
Do not dilute or alter material as packaged.
4.
Locations: As indicated on plans and on all exposed concrete flooring inside of building.
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
1.1
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.2
A.
Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient
temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than
90 deg F.
1.3
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more
than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:
1.
48 hours before installation.
2.
During installation.
3.
48 hours after installation.
B.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but
not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C.
Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
1.4
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage
and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Furnish not less than 2% of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
1.5
RESILIENT BASE
A.
Resilient Base:
1.
a.
Allstate Rubber Corp.; Stoler Industries.
b.
c.
Johnsonite.
Page - 60
29 October 2015
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
d.
Mannington Commercial.
e.
Roppe Corporation, USA.
f.
VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.
Basis of Design: Refer to Finish Legend.
Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.
1.
Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset).
2.
Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous).
3.
Style: Cove (base with toe).
Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.
Height: Refer to Finish Legend.
Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
Outside Corners: Job formed.
Inside Corners: Job formed.
Finish: Satin.
Colors and Patterns: Refer to Finish Legend
1.6
RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY
A.
Resilient Molding Accessory:
1.
a.
Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
b.
Flexco, Inc.
c.
Johnsonite.
d.
R.C.A. Rubber Company (The).
e.
Roppe Corporation, USA.
f.
VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.
B.
Description: Cap for cove resilient floor covering, Carpet edge for glue-down applications, Reducer strip for
resilient floor covering, Joiner for tile and carpet, Transition strips.
C.
Material: Rubber.
D.
Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.
E.
Colors and Patterns: Refer to Finish Legend
1.7
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydrauliccement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate
conditions indicated.
1.8
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove
bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C.
Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.
1.
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48
hours in advance of installation.
D.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.
1.9
RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B.
Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent
fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C.
Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces
aligned.
D.
Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with
horizontal and vertical substrates.
E.
Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F.
On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with
manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G.
Job-Formed Corners:
1.
Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing
discoloration (whitening) at bends.
2.
Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.
1.10
RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B.
Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of
each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.
1.11
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.
B.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
Page - 61
29 October 2015
C.
D.
2.
Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3.
Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and
placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying
liquid floor polish.
1.
Apply two coat(s).
SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
1.1
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.2
A.
Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures
maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.
Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.
1.3
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more
than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:
1.
48 hours before installation.
2.
During installation.
3.
48 hours after installation.
B.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but
not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C.
Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D.
Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E.
Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
1.4
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage
and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Floor Tile: Furnish 2% of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.
1.5
VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
2.
Congoleum Corporation.
3.
Mannington Mills, Inc.
4.
Tarkett, Inc.
B.
Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile.
C.
Wearing Surface: Smooth.
D.
Thickness: 0.125 inch.
E.
Size: 12 by 12 inches.
F.
Colors and Patterns: Refer to Finish Legend.
1.6
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydrauliccement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions
indicated.
C.
Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.
1.7
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and
that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with
adhesion of floor tile.
C.
1.8
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain
soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use
solvents.
3.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation
only after substrates pass testing.
Page - 62
29 October 2015
4.
C.
D.
E.
Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with
installation only after substrates pass testing.
a.
Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after
substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
b.
Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only
after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove
bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
1.
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48
hours in advance of installation.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.
1.9
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B.
Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at
opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than
one-half tile at perimeter.
1.
Lay tiles in pattern indicated on Drawings..
C.
Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and
packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.
1.
Lay tiles in direction per manufacturer’s recommendation.
D.
Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in
furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E.
Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door
openings.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on
floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, non-staining marking device.
G.
Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a
completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive
spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
1.10
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.
B.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:
1.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2.
Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3.
Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C.
Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and
placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D.
Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid
floor polish.
1.
Apply per manufacturer’s recommendation.
096816- SHEET CARPETING
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
B.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For the following, including installation recommendations for each type of substrate:
1.
Carpet: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability,
and fade resistance.
Comply with CRI 104.
FIELD CONDITIONS
Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet and carpet cushion until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are
maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and have
pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.
ATTIC STOCK
Provide not less than 2% of materials provided for project. Store in location determined by Owner.
CARPET
1.
Shaw Industries.
Basis of Design: Refer to Finish Legend.
Page - 63
29 October 2015
1.6
A.
B.
C.
1.7
A.
B.
C.
1.8
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.9
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or
recommended by carpet cushion manufacturer.
Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, non-staining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated,
that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet and
carpet cushion manufacturers.
Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown, of height required to
protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.
1.
Acceptable Product: Schluter, Deco AE, size to match height of carpet to create flush exposed edge
material.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance.
Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.
Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1.
Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may
interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and
moisture tests recommended by carpet cushion manufacturer.
2.
Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for
slabs receiving carpet.
3.
Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
PREPARATION
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's
written installation instructions for preparing substrates.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks,
holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch 3 mm wide or
wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by
carpet cushion manufacturer.
Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet.
INSTALLATION
Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the following:
1.
Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down Installation."
Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of
carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed
position.
Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.
Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes,
outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and
similar openings.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish
flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, non-staining marking device.
Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Patterned Carpet Installations" and
with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations.
SECTION 099100 - PAINTING
1.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with 3 years
experience.
B.
Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with 2 years experience.
C.
Product Labels: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, stock number, color and label analysis on label of
containers.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide product data describing physical performance criteria and composition on all finishing products.
B.
Submit 2 samples, 12 by 12 inches in size illustrating range of colors and textures selected for each surface
finishing product scheduled.
1.3
FIELD SAMPLES
A.
Provide field sample panel, 96 inches long by 96 inches wide, illustrating each coating color, texture, and finish
intended for use.
B.
C.
Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work.
Page - 64
29 October 2015
1.4
A.
Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance.
B.
Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface
preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.
C.
Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in well
ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
1.5
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the ranges required by paint
manufacturer.
B.
Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45
degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by
C.
Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 75 percent, unless required
otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless
required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid- height at substrate surface.
1.6
EXTRA STOCK
A.
Provide a 1 gallon container of each color to Owner.
B.
Label each container with color, color number, texture, and room locations, in addition to the manufacturer's
label.
1.7
SCAFFOLDS AND PROTECTION
A.
Provide adequate safe ladders, scaffolds, and stages necessary to complete work.
B.
Protect completed finish and paint work, and protect adjacent finish surfaces from paint splatter, spills and stains.
Use adequate drop cloths and masking procedures during progress of work.
1.8
PRECAUTIONS
A.
Do not store paints, oils, thinners and other flammable items inside the building and shall be stored in approved
containers when not in actual use during the painting job. The fire hazard shall be kept at a minimum.
B.
Precaution shall be taken to protect the public and construction workers during the progress of the work.
C.
Furnish a temporary fire extinguisher of suitable chemicals and capacity, located near flammable materials.
1.9
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, provide products of one of the
following:
1.
Sherwin-Williams.
2.
P.P.G. Industries.
3.
Benjamin Moore.
4.
Kelley Moore.
5.
Glidden Professional.
B.
Materials selected for coating systems for each type surface shall be product of a single manufacturer unless
otherwise specified. Secondary products such as linseed oil, turpentine and shellacs shall be first quality
products of a reputable manufacturer.
C.
Products specified in Schedule are those of Glidden Professional as a standard of quality unless otherwise
noted.
1.10
MATERIALS
A.
Coatings: Ready mixed. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly
dispersed to a homogeneous coating with good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of
streaks or sags.
B.
Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated
but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality.
C.
Patching Materials: Latex filler.
1.11
FINISHES
A.
Color and Sheen: Refer to Finish Legend.
1.12
INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A.
Drywall (Gypsum):
1.
Acrylic Latex: Glidden: 1 coat Glidden Professional PVA Wall 1030 primer, 2 coats Glidden Professional
Ultra-Hide 250
B.
Galvanized Metal:
1.
Acrylic Latex: Glidden: 1 coat Devoe Coatings DEVFLEX Direct-to-Metal 4020 primer; Semi-Gloss: 2
coats Glidden Professional Ultra-Hide 250 1406 topcoat.
C.
Shop Primed Ferrous Metal:
1.
Acrylic Latex: Glidden: 1 coat Devoe Coatings DEVFLEX Direct-to-Metal 4020 primer, 2 coats Glidden
Professional Ultra-Hide 250.
Page - 65
29 October 2015
1.13
EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A.
Shop Primed Metal Doors, Trim, Panels and Miscellaneous Surfaces:
1.
High Performance Coating, Water-Based Acrylic:
a.
Glidden: Semi-Gloss: 2 topcoats Devoe Coatings DEVFLEX High Performance WB Acrylic 4216
over prepared substrate.
1.14
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces and substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by the product
manufacturer.
B.
Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report to Architect any condition
that may potentially affect proper application.
C.
Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture
content of surfaces are below the following maximums
1.
Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
D.
Test shop applied primers for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
E.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces and substrate.
1.15
PREPARATION
A.
Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
B.
Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. Remove existing coatings which
exhibit loose surface defects.
C.
Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse
with clean water and allow surface to dry.
D.
Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair.
E.
Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching
primer.
F.
Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are
evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of
phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after
repairs.
G.
Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make
touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces.
H.
Shop Finished Items: Finish in accordance with AWI standards and guide lines.
I.
Wood and Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.
1.16
SURFACE PREPARATION OF PREVIOUSLY COATED SURFACES
A.
General:
1.
Remove cracked and deteriorated sealants and calking.
2.
Remove chalk deposits and loose, blistered, peeling, scaling, or crazed finish to bare base material or
sound substrate by scraping and sanding.
3.
Wash surfaces with solution of TSP to remove wax, oil, grease, and other foreign material; rinse, and
allow to dry. Exercise caution that TSP solution does not soften existing coating.
4.
Abrade glossy surfaces by sanding or wiping with liquid de-glosser.
5.
Remove mildew as specified above.
6.
Test compatibility of existing coatings by applying new coating to small, inconspicuous area. If new
coatings lift or blister existing coatings, request recommendation from Architect.
7.
Apply specified primer to surfaces scheduled to receive coatings.
B.
Gypsum Wallboard:
1.
Fill cracks and voids with spackling compound.
2.
Apply primer over bare surfaces and newly applied texture coatings.
C.
Metal:
1.
Remove rust from surfaces to bare metal in accordance with SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning".
2.
Exercise care not to remove galvanizing.
3.
Complete preparation as specified for new work.
1.17
PROTECTION
A.
Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
B.
Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section.
C.
Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other
surfaces.
D.
Remove empty paint containers from site.
1.18
APPLICATION
A.
The intent of these Specifications is to produce the highest quality appearance of paint and finish surfaces.
Employ skilled mechanics only. The proper preparation of all surfaces will be strictly enforced and wherever
finished surfaces show any defects due to improper preparation, workmanship, etc., the defects shall be removed
and the work refinished at the expense of the Contractor.
B.
Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Final finish coats shall have visual evidence of
solid hiding and uniform appearance, and shall be free and smooth of brush marks, streaks, sags, runs, laps, or
skipped areas.
C.
Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
D.
Apply each coat to uniform finish and thickness.
Page - 66
29 October 2015
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.19
Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved.
Sand lightly between coats on wood and metal items to achieve required finish.
Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.
Edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean with no overlapping.
CLEANING/TOUCH-UP
A.
As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered.
B.
During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus
materials, and debris.
C.
Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers
and remove daily from site.
D.
Spot painting will be allowed to correct soiled or damaged paint surfaces only when touch-up spot will blend into
surrounding finish and is invisible to normal viewing (as determined by the Architect). Otherwise, re-coat entire
section to corners or visible stopping point.
E.
Products listed in following schedule and/or substitutes proposed for use by Contractor must be formulated to
meet all applicable ordinances and regulations regarding maximum V.O.C. content. Utilize products which have
been specially formulated to need such requirements.
102800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES
1.1
F.
G.
MATERIALS
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-inch minimum nominal thickness.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.
Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant
where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).
Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.
A.
PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
Refer to Schedule on Drawings.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.2
1.3
A.
B.
C.
1.4
A.
B.
UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or
comparable product by one of the following:
1.
Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.
2.
Truebro by IPS Corporation.
Underlavatory Guard:
1.
Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct contact with
and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings.
2.
Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.
INSTALLATION
Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate
indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at
heights indicated.
Grab Bars and Baby Changing Stations: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested
according to ASTM F 446.
104400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
1.1
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features and anchorage details.
1.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Fire Extinguishers:
1.
Ansul, Inc : www.ansul.com.
2.
JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com.
3.
Pyro-Chem : www.pyrochem.com.
B.
Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories:
1.
JL Industries, Inc : www.jlindustries.com.
2.
Larsen's Manufacturing Co : www.larsensmfg.com.
3.
Potter-Roemer : www.potterroemer.com.
1.3
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A.
Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is
more stringent.
1.
Provide extinguishers labeled by UL for the purpose specified and indicated.
Page - 67
29 October 2015
2.
Provide #10 ABC.
1.4
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A.
Metal: Formed prefinished sheet steel, 0.036 inch thick.
B.
Cabinet Configuration: Semi-recessed type.
1.
Sized to accommodate accessories.
2.
Trim: Returned to wall surface, with 2-1/2 inch projection.
C.
Door: 0.036 inch thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with two
butt hinge. Provide nylon catch.
D.
Door Glazing: Glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick float. Set in resilient channel gasket glazing.
E.
Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors.
F.
Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.
G.
Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Baked enamel, color as selected.
H.
Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel.
1.5
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, from finished floor to height as needed to meet accessiblity
requirements.
C.
Secure rigidly in place.
D.
Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets.
SECTION 109900 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
1.1
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Including all pertinent performance characteristics and criteria.
1.2
PRODUCTS
A.
Fire Control Key Box: Provide recessed fire department key control box, equal to model 3200 by Knox Box.
1.
Provide Knox Locks as required by local fire department.
122114 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
1.1
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics.
1.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Horizontal Louver Blinds:
1.
Hunter Douglas: www.hunterdouglas.com.
2.
Levolor Contract: www.levolorcontract.com.
3.
Graber, division of Springs Window Fashions: www.graberblinds.com.
4.
Bali Blinds.
1.3
BLINDS AND BLIND COMPONENTS
A.
Blinds: Horizontal slat louvers hung from full-width headrail with full-width bottom rail; manual control of raising
and lowering by cord with full range locking; blade angle adjustable by control wand; complying with WCMA
A100.1.
B.
Aluminum Slats: 0.0073 inch thick pre-finished aluminum.
1.
Width: 1 inch.
2.
Color: Refer to Finish Legend.
3.
Texture: Smooth.
C.
Slat Support: Woven polypropylene cord, ladder configuration.
D.
Head Rail: Pre-finished, formed aluminum box, with end caps; internally fitted with hardware, pulleys, and
bearings for operation; same depth as width of slats
E.
Bottom Rail: Pre-finished aluminum with top side shaped to match slat curvature; with end caps. Color: Same
as headrail.
F.
Lift Cord: Braided nylon; continuous loop.
G.
Control Wand: Extruded hollow plastic; hexagonal shape.
H.
Headrail Attachment: Wall brackets.
I.
Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer.
1.4
FABRICATION
A.
Determine sizes by field measurement.
B.
Fabricate blinds to fit within openings with uniform edge clearance of 1/8 inch.
1.5
INSTALLATION
A.
Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Secure in place with flush countersunk fasteners.
Page - 68
29 October 2015
123600 - COUNTERTOPS
1.1
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
B.
Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of cabinets and
casework specified in other sections.
1.2
A.
B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Fabricator Qualifications: Same fabricator as for cabinets on which tops are to be installed.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator.
1.3
A.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with
requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by
manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's
absolute limits.
1.5
COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES
A.
Plastic Laminate Countertops: High pressure decorative laminate sheet bonded to substrate.
1.
Laminate Sheet, Unless Otherwise Indicated: NEMA LD 3 Grade HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness.
a.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450, maximum; when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
b.
NSF approved for food contact.
c.
Wear Resistance: In addition to specified grade, comply with NEMA LD 3 High Wear Grade
requirements for wear resistance.
d.
Laminate Core Color: Same as decorative surface.
e.
Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating of 5 to 20.
f.
Surface Color and Pattern: Refer to Finish Legend.
g.
Manufacturers:
1)
Formica Corporation: www.formica.com.
2)
Lamin-Art, Inc: www.laminart.com.
3)
Panolam Industries International, Inc\Nevamar: www.nevamar.com.
4)
Panolam Industries International, Inc\Pionite: www.pionitelaminates.com.
5)
Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com.
6)
2.
Exposed Edge Treatment: Square, substrate built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch thick; covered with matching
laminate.
3.
Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction.
4.
Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated Premium Grade.
B.
Natural Stone Countertops: Stone slabs bonded to substrate; use as large pieces as possible with inconspicuous
adhesive joints.
1.
Stone: Granite without cracks, voids, or pin holes; filling with matching epoxy resin is acceptable.
2.
Stone Thickness: 3 cm.
3.
Surface Finish: Polished.
4.
Exposed Edge Treatment: Refer to Finish Legend.
Back and End Splashes: Same material, same thickness; for field attachment
1.6
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Plywood for Supporting Substrate (stone): PS 1 Exterior Grade, A-C veneer grade, minimum 5-ply; minimum 3/4 inch
thick; join lengths using metal splines.
B.
Particleboard for Supporting Substrate (plastic laminate): ANSI A208.1 Grade 2-M-2, 45 pcf minimum density;
minimum 3/4 inch thick; join lengths using metal splines.
C.
Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials being joined.
D.
Cove Molding for Top of Splashes: Rubber with semi-gloss finish and T-spline to fit between splash and wall; 1/2
inch by 1/2 inch.
E.
Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, white.
1.7
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.
1.
Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.
2.
Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against cabinet or wall.
3.
Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary cutouts or
fixture holes.
B.
Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue.
2.
Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
Page - 69
29 October 2015
1.8
EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before
proceeding.
C.
Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are installed in proper
locations.
1.9
PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate
under the project conditions.
1.10
INSTALLATION
A.
Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shim where required.
B.
Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board of 5/8 inch.
C.
Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.
1.
Where indicated use rubber cove molding.
2.
Where applied cove molding is not indicated use specified sealant.
133419 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
1.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of metal building system component. Include construction details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following:
1.
Structural-steel-framing system.
2.
Metal roof panels.
3.
Flashing and trim.
Shop Drawings: For the following metal building system components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1.
Anchor-Bolt Plans: Submit anchor-bolt plans and templates before foundation work begins. Include location,
diameter, and projection of anchor bolts required to attach metal building to foundation. Indicate column
reactions at each location.
2.
Structural-Framing Drawings: Show complete fabrication of primary and secondary framing; include
provisions for openings. Indicate welds and bolted connections, distinguishing between shop and field
applications. Include transverse cross-sections.
a.
Show provisions for attaching roof curbs and pipe racks.
3.
Metal Roof Panel Layout Drawings: Show layouts of metal panels including methods of support. Include
details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special
details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work; show locations of exposed fasteners.
a.
Show roof-mounted items including equipment supports, pipe supports and penetrations, lighting
fixtures, and items mounted on roof curbs.
b.
Show wall-mounted items including doors, windows, louvers, and lighting fixtures.
4.
Accessory Drawings: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12
inches:
a.
Flashing and trim.
Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of sizes indicated below:
1.
Metal Panels: Nominal 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and other exposed
panel accessories.
2.
Flashing and Trim: Nominal 12 inches long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal building systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and
design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
Metal Building System Certificates: For each type of metal building system, from manufacturer.
1.
Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following:
a.
Name and location of Project.
b.
Order number.
c.
Name of manufacturer.
d.
Name of Contractor.
e.
Building dimensions including width, length, height, and roof slope.
f.
Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot-rolled steel and AISI standards for cold-rolled steel,
including edition dates of each standard.
g.
Governing building code and year of edition.
h.
Design Loads: Include dead load, roof live load, collateral loads, roof snow load, deflection, wind
loads/speeds and exposure, seismic design category or effective peak velocity-related
acceleration/peak acceleration, and auxiliary loads (cranes).
i.
Load Combinations: Indicate that loads were applied acting simultaneously with concentrated loads,
according to governing building code.
j.
Building-Use Category: Indicate category of building use and its effect on load importance factors.
k.
AISC Certification for Category MB: Include statement that metal building system and components
were designed and produced in an AISC-Certified Facility by an AISC-Certified Manufacturer.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
Page - 70
29 October 2015
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
B.
1.5
A.
B.
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
B.
C.
D.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer and member of MBMA.
1.
AISC Certification for Category MB: An AISC-Certified Manufacturer that designs and produces metal
building systems and components in an AISC-Certified Facility.
2.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer.
Erector Qualifications: An experienced erector who specializes in erecting and installing work similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer.
Source Limitations: Obtain metal building system components, including primary and secondary framing and metal
panel assemblies, from single source from single manufacturer.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
Structural Steel: Comply with AISC 360, "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," for design requirements and
allowable stresses.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Field Measurements:
1.
Established Dimensions for Foundations: Comply with established dimensions on approved anchor-bolt
plans, establishing foundation dimensions and proceeding with fabricating structural framing without field
measurements. Coordinate anchor-bolt installation to ensure that actual anchorage dimensions correspond
to established dimensions.
2.
Established Dimensions for Metal Panels: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, either establish framing and opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal panels without
field measurements, or allow for field trimming metal panels. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual
building dimensions, locations of structural members, and openings correspond to established dimensions.
COORDINATION
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete foundations and casting of anchor-bolt inserts into foundation walls and
footings. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
Coordinate metal panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of supports and other
adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty on Metal Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty
period.
1.
Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2.
Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Weathertightness Warranty for Metal Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel assemblies that leak or otherwise fail to remain
weathertight within specified warranty period.
1.
MANUFACTURERS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a metal buildiung system by Butler
Manufacturing Company; a BlueScope Steel company, or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
American Buildings Company; Division of Magnatrax Corp.
2.
Ceco Building Systems; Division of NCI Building Systems, L.P.
3.
Inland Buildings; Subsidiary of Behlen Mfg. Co.
4.
Metallic Building Company; Division of NCI Building Systems, L.P.
5.
Nucor Building Systems.
6.
VP Buildings; a United Dominion company.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
Description: Provide a complete, integrated set of metal building system manufacturer's standard mutually
dependent components and assemblies that form a metal building system capable of withstanding structural and
other loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water into building
interior.
1.
Provide metal building system of size and with bay spacings, roof slopes, and spans indicated.
Primary-Frame Type:
1.
Rigid Modular: Solid-member, structural-framing system with interior columns as indicated.
Bay Spacing: As indicated.
Roof Slope: As indicated.
Page - 71
29 October 2015
1.8
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.9
A.
B.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
Structural Performance: Metal building systems shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads
and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to procedures in MBMA's "Metal Building
Systems Manual."
1.
Design Loads: Design structural building frame members to withstand dead loads, collateral loads, snow
loads, lateral pressure and suction “up-lift” loads due to wind loads, seismic loads and design loads as
indicated on Drawings in accordance with applicable code.
2.
Deflection Limits: Design metal building system assemblies to withstand design loads with deflections no
greater than the following:
a.
Purlins and Rafters: Vertical deflection of L/360 of the span.
b.
Girts: Horizontal deflection of L/360 of the span.
c.
Metal Roof, Wall, and Soffit Panels: Vertical deflection of L/360 of the span.
d.
Building Frame: Deflection due to crane loads of L/360.
e.
Design secondary-framing systems to accommodate deflection of primary framing and construction
tolerances to maintain clearances at openings, and accommodate deflection requirements for
architectural cladding and finish materials indicated on the Drawings.
3.
Drift Limits: Engineer building structure to withstand design loads with drift limits no greater than the
following:
a.
Lateral Drift: Maximum of L/360 of the building height.
4.
Metal panel assemblies shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and loads and stresses within limits and
under conditions indicated according to ASTM E 1592.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient
and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint
sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculations on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
Air Infiltration for Metal Roof and Wall Panels: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of roof
area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at negative test-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..
Water Penetration for Metal Roof and Wall Panels: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at
test-pressure difference of 2.86 lbf/sq. ft.
Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for Class 90.
Thermal Performance: Provide insulated metal panel assemblies with the following maximum U-factors and
minimum R-values for opaque elements when tested according to ASTM C 1363 or ASTM C 518:
1.
Metal Roof Panel Assemblies:
a.
R-Value: 38.
2.
Metal Wall Panel Assemblies:
a.
R-Value: 19.
STRUCTURAL-STEEL FRAMING
Primary Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary-framing system, designed to withstand required loads and
specified requirements. Primary framing includes transverse and lean-to frames; rafter, rake and canopy beams;
sidewall, intermediate, end-wall, and corner columns; and wind bracing.
1.
General: Provide frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Factory drill for fieldbolted assembly. Provide frame span and spacing indicated.
a.
Slight variations in span and spacing may be acceptable if necessary to comply with manufacturer's
standard, as approved by Architect.
2.
Rigid Modular Frames: I-shaped frame sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or
structural-steel shapes. Provide interior columns fabricated from round steel pipes or tubes, or shop-welded,
built-up steel plates.
3.
Long-Bay Frames: I-shaped frame sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structuralsteel shapes. Provide interior columns fabricated from round steel pipes or tubes, or shop-welded, built-up
steel plates.
4.
Frame Configuration: Single gable and lean to, with high side connected to and supported by another
structure.
5.
Exterior Column Type: Tapered.
6.
Rafter Type: Tapered.
Secondary Framing: Manufacturer's standard secondary framing, including purlins, girts, eave struts, flange bracing,
base members, gable angles, clips, headers, jambs, and other miscellaneous structural members. Unless otherwise
indicated, fabricate framing from either cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or roll-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet,
prepainted with coil coating, to comply with the following:
1.
Purlins: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from built-up steel plates, steel sheet, or structural-steel shapes;
minimum 2-1/2-inch- wide flanges.
a.
Depth: As required to comply with system performance requirements.
2.
Girts: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from built-up steel plates, steel sheet, or structural-steel shapes.
Form ends of Z-sections with stiffening lips angled 40 to 50 degrees from flange, with minimum 2-1/2-inchwide flanges.
a.
Depth: As required to comply with system performance requirements.
3.
Eave Struts: Unequal-flange, C-shaped sections; fabricated from built-up steel plates, steel sheet, or
structural-steel shapes; to provide adequate backup for metal panels.
4.
Flange Bracing: Minimum 2-by-2-by-1/8-inch structural-steel angles or 1-inch diameter, cold-formed
structural tubing to stiffen primary-frame flanges.
5.
Sag Bracing: Minimum 1-by-1-by-1/8-inch structural-steel angles.
6.
Base or Sill Angles: Minimum 3-by-2-inch zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.
Page - 72
29 October 2015
7.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.10
A.
Purlin and Girt Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips fabricated from steel sheet. Provide galvanized clips
where clips are connected to galvanized framing members.
8.
Secondary End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from structural-steel sheet.
9.
Framing for Openings: Channel shapes; fabricated from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or structural-steel
shapes. Frame head and jamb of door openings and head, jamb, and sill of other openings.
10.
Miscellaneous Structural Members:
Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from cold-formed,
structural-steel sheet; built-up steel plates; or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet; designed to withstand
required loads.
Bracing: Provide adjustable wind bracing as follows:
1.
Rods: ASTM A 36; ASTM A 572, Grade 50; or ASTM A 529, Grade 50; minimum 1/2-inchdiameter steel;
threaded full length or threaded a minimum of 6 inches at each end.
2.
Angles: Fabricated from structural-steel shapes to match primary framing, of size required to withstand
design loads.
3.
Rigid Portal Frames: Fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes to match
primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads.
4.
Fixed-Base Columns: Fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes to match
primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads.
5.
Diaphragm Action of Metal Panels: Design metal building to resist wind forces through diaphragm action of
metal panels.
6.
Bracing: Provide wind bracing using any method specified above, at manufacturer's option.
Bolts: Provide plain-finish bolts for structural-framing components that are primed or finish painted. Provide zincplated or hot-dip galvanized bolts for structural-framing components that are galvanized.
Materials:
1.
W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M; ASTM A 572, Grade 50 or 55; or ASTM A 529, Grade 50 or 55.
2.
Channels, Angles, M-Shapes, and S-Shapes: ASTM A 36; ASTM A 572, Grade 50 or 55; or ASTM A 529,
Grade 50 or 55.
3.
Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36; ASTM A 572, Grade 50 or 55; or ASTM A 529, Grade 50 or 55.
4.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B.
5.
Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B or C, structural tubing.
6.
Structural-Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled, ASTM A 1011, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 30 through 55, or HighStrength Low-Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70; or cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008, Structural Steel
(SS), Grades 25 through 80, or High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70.
7.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 33 through 80 or High-Strength
Low-Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 50 through 80; with G60 coating designation; mill phosphatized.
8.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip
process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755.
a.
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 33
through 80 or High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 50 through 80; with G90 coating
designation.
9.
Non-High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon-steel, hex-head bolts;
ASTM A 563 carbon-steel hex nuts; and ASTM F 844 plain (flat) steel washers.
a.
Finish: Plain or mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50.
10.
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers:
ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts;
ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers.
a.
11.
Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy-hex-head steel
structural bolts with spline ends.
a.
12.
Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM A 572, Grade 50.
a.
Configuration: Straight.
b.
Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.
c.
Plate Washers: ASTM A 36 carbon steel.
d.
Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel.
e.
13.
Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
a.
Configuration: Straight.
b.
c.
Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
d.
Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel.
e.
14.
Threaded Rods: ASTM A 572, Grade 50.
a.
b.
Washers: ASTM A 36 carbon steel.
c.
Finish: Factory primed. Apply specified primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
1.
Apply primer to primary and secondary framing to a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil.
a.
Prime secondary framing formed from uncoated steel sheet to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.5
mil on each side.
2.
Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide.
METAL ROOF, WALL, LINER, AND SOFFIT PANELS
Trapezoidal-Rib, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with raised trapezoidal ribs at panel edges and
intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically
Page - 73
29 October 2015
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.11
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.12
A.
B.
attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of
adjacent panels.
1.
Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.028-inch nominal thickness.
a.
Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer.
b.
Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
2.
Clips: Manufacturer's standard, floating type to accommodate thermal movement; fabricated from zinccoated (galvanized) steel sheet.
3.
Joint Type: Panels snapped together.
4.
Joint Type: Mechanically seamed, folded according to manufacturer's standard.
5.
Panel Coverage: 24 inches.
6.
Panel Height: 3 inches.
7.
Uplift Rating: UL 90.
8.
Basis of Design: Equal to Butler model MR-24.
Tapered-Rib-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with raised, trapezoidal major ribs and
intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between major ribs; designed to be installed by lapping side edges
of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps.
1.
a.
b.
Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
2.
Major-Rib Spacing: 12 inches o.c.
3.
4.
Panel Height: 1.50 inches.
5.
Basis of Design: Equal to Butlerib II by Butler.
Flush-Profile, Metal Liner Panels: Solid panels formed with vertical panel edges and flat pan between panel edges;
with flush joint between panels; designed for interior side of metal wall panel assemblies and installed by lapping and
interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed
fasteners in side laps.
1.
a.
Exterior Finish: Siliconized polyester.
b.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.
3.
Panel Height: 1.5 inches.
4.
Basis of Design: Manufacturer’s standard
Concealed-Fastener Metal Soffit Panels: Formed with vertical panel edges and flush surface; with flush joint
between panels; with 1-inch- wide flange for attaching interior finish; designed to be installed by lapping and
interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed
fasteners in side laps.
1.
a.
b.
2.
3.
Panel Height: 1 inch.
4.
Basis of Design: Manufacturer’s standard.
Materials:
1.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted-flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and
prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755.
a.
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation; structural quality.
b.
Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
Finishes:
1.
Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a.
Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent
PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to
exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
2.
Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester
backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
THERMAL INSULATION
Faced Metal Building Insulation: ASTM C 991, Type II, glass-fiber-blanket insulation; 0.5-lb/cu. ft. density; 2-inchwide, continuous, vapor-tight edge tabs; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less.
Acceptable Product: Thermaliner Insulation System by Butler.
R Values: R-19 at walls; R-38 at roofs.
Provide horizontal wires or strapping at 24 inches on center to hold insulation in place at walls.
ACCESSORIES
General: Provide accessories as standard with metal building system manufacturer and as specified. Fabricate and
finish accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes.
Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
1.
Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks and
that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including copings,
fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material
and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same material as metal roof panels.
Page - 74
29 October 2015
2.
3.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.13
A.
B.
Clips: Manufacturer's standard, formed from steel sheet, designed to withstand negative-load requirements.
Cleats: Manufacturer's standard, mechanically seamed cleats formed from stainless-steel sheet or nyloncoated aluminum sheet.
4.
Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended
by manufacturer.
5.
Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell
laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof
panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
6.
Thermal Spacer Blocks: Where metal panels attach directly to purlins, provide thermal spacer blocks of
thickness required to provide 1-inch standoff; fabricated from extruded polystyrene.
Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.022-inch nominal-thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloycoated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match adjacent metal panels.
1.
Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations
include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers.
2.
Opening Trim: Formed from 0.022-inch nominal-thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc
alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Trim head and jamb of door openings, and head, jamb,
and sill of other openings.
Gutters: Formed from 0.022-inch nominal-thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel
sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match roof fascia and rake trim. Match profile of gable trim, complete
with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections,
sized according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."
1.
Gutter Supports: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters.
2.
Strainers: Bronze, copper, or aluminum wire ball type at outlets.
Downspouts: Formed from 0.022-inch nominal-thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc
alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match metal wall panels. Fabricate in minimum 10foot- long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets.
1.
Mounting Straps: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters.
Pipe Flashing: Premolded, EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base.
Roof Ventilators: Gravity type, complete with hardware, flashing, closures, and fittings.
1.
Continuous Ridge Type: Factory-engineered and -fabricated, continuous unit; fabricated from 0.022-inch
nominal-thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil
coating; finished to match metal roof panels. Fabricated in minimum 10-foot- long sections. Provide throat
size and total length indicated, complete with side baffles, ventilator assembly, end caps, splice plates, and
reinforcing diaphragms.
a.
Bird Screening: Galvanized steel, 1/2-inch- square mesh.
b.
Throat Size: 9 or 12 inches, as standard with manufacturer, and as required to comply with
ventilation requirements.
Materials:
1.
Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other
suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide fasteners with heads matching color of
materials being fastened by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating.
a.
Fasteners for Metal Roof Panels: Self-drilling, Type 410 stainless-steel or self-tapping, Type 304
stainless-steel or zinc-alloy-steel hex washer head, with EPDM washer under heads of fasteners
bearing on weather side of metal panels.
b.
Fasteners for Metal Wall Panels: Self-drilling, Type 410 stainless-steel or self-tapping, Type 304
stainless-steel or zinc-alloy-steel hex washer head, with EPDM sealing washers bearing on weather
side of metal panels.
c.
Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex washer head.
1)
Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
2.
Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per
coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other
deleterious impurities.
3.
Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout,
noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working
time.
4.
Metal Panel Sealants:
a.
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene-compound sealant tape
with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape of
manufacturer's standard size.
b.
Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; one-part elastomeric polyurethane or polysulfide; of type, grade, class,
and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as
recommended by metal building system manufacturer.
Suspended Canopies: Provide suspended metal canopies in locations indicated.
FABRICATION
General: Design components and field connections required for erection to permit easy assembly.
1.
Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared erection drawings,
diagrams, and instruction manuals.
2.
Fabricate structural framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and bends. Punch holes of proper size, shape,
and location. Members shall be free of cracks, tears, and ruptures.
Tolerances: Comply with MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual" for fabrication and erection tolerances.
Page - 75
29 October 2015
C.
D.
E.
1.14
A.
B.
C.
1.15
A.
B.
1.16
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Primary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section, with baseplates, bearing plates,
stiffeners, and other items required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld framing for bolted
field assembly.
1.
Make shop connections by welding or by using high-strength bolts.
2.
Join flanges to webs of built-up members by a continuous, submerged arc-welding process.
3.
Brace compression flange of primary framing with steel angles or cold-formed structural tubing between
frame web and purlin web or girt web, so flange compressive strength is within allowable limits for any
combination of loadings.
4.
Weld clips to frames for attaching secondary framing.
5.
Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime primary framing with
specified primer after fabrication.
Secondary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section by roll-forming or breakforming, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other plates required for erection welded into place. Cut,
form, punch, drill, and weld secondary framing for bolted field connections to primary framing.
1.
Make shop connections by welding or by using non-high-strength bolts.
2.
Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime uncoated
secondary framing with specified primer after fabrication.
Metal Panels: Fabricate and finish metal panels at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard
procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated
profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
1.
Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of metal panel.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with erector present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
Before erection proceeds, survey elevations and locations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations
of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments to receive structural framing, with erector present, for
compliance with requirements and metal building system manufacturer's tolerances.
1.
Engage land surveyor to perform surveying.
Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular
substrate condition.
Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural framing secure, plumb,
and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove
temporary supports when permanent structural framing, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise
indicated.
ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING
Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written erection instructions and erection drawings.
Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building system manufacturer's
professional engineer.
Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated, according to AISC specifications referenced
in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection.
Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen
surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.
1.
Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2.
Tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges
or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.
3.
Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed
surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for
shrinkage-resistant grouts.
Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other
surfaces that will be in permanent contact with framing. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1.
Level and plumb individual members of structure.
2.
Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when
structure will be completed and in service.
Primary Framing: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Level baseplates to a true even plane
with full bearing to supporting structures, set with double-nutted anchor bolts. Use grout to obtain uniform bearing
and to maintain a level base-line elevation. Moist-cure grout for not less than seven days after placement.
1.
Make field connections using high-strength bolts installed according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for bolt type and joint type specified.
a.
Joint Type: Snug tightened or pretensioned.
Secondary Framing: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Field bolt secondary framing to clips
attached to primary framing.
1.
Provide rake or gable purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fasciae.
2.
Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows.
3.
Locate canopy framing as indicated.
4.
Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors, windows, louvers and other
penetrations of roof and walls.
Page - 76
29 October 2015
H.
I.
J.
1.17
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.18
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.19
A.
Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidewalls where indicated on erection drawings.
1.
Tighten rod and cable bracing to avoid sag.
2.
Locate interior end-bay bracing only where indicated.
Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and
vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to
structural framing.
Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within AISC 303.
METAL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
Examination: Examine primary and secondary framing to verify that structural-panel support members and
anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by manufacturer.
1.
Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels, to verify actual locations of
penetrations relative to seams before metal panel installation.
General: Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and
structural movement.
1.
Field cut metal panels as required for doors, windows, and other openings. Cut openings as small as
possible, neatly to size required, and without damage to adjacent metal panel finishes.
a.
Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted unless approved in writing by manufacturer.
2.
Install metal panels perpendicular to structural supports unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures at perimeter of openings and similar elements. Fasten
with self-tapping screws.
4.
Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
5.
Locate metal panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports with end laps in alignment.
6.
Lap metal flashing over metal panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material.
Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Install screw fasteners using power tools with controlled torque adjusted to compress
EPDM washers tightly without damage to washers, screw threads, or metal panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.
1.
Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted
sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply metal panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure.
Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action
by painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each
contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof
performance of metal panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated; or, if not indicated,
provide types recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
1.
Seal metal panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant the full width of panel. Seal side joints where
recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
2.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated or restricted by
shipping limitations.
1.
Install ridge caps as metal roof panel work proceeds.
2.
Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves and rakes. Fasten with self-tapping screws.
Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standingseam joint, at location and spacing and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.
1.
Install clips to supports with self-drilling or self-tapping fasteners.
2.
Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
3.
Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool so that clip, metal
roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged.
4.
Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to thermal expansion
and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners.
5.
Provide metal closures at peaks, rake edges, rake walls and each side of ridge caps.
Metal Fascia Panels: Align bottom of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-drilling or self-tapping
screws. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits, along lower panel edges, and
at perimeter of all openings.
Metal Roof Panel Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panels within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20
feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching
profiles.
METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels
perpendicular to girts, extending full height of building, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and
other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1.
Unless otherwise indicated, begin metal panel installation at corners with center of rib lined up with line of
framing.
2.
Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels.
3.
When two rows of metal panels are required, lap panels 4 inches minimum.
4.
When building height requires two rows of metal panels at gable ends, align lap of gable panels over metal
wall panels at eave height.
5.
Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement due to thermal expansion
and contraction. Predrill panels.
Page - 77
29 October 2015
6.
B.
C.
Flash and seal metal wall panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all openings.
Fasten with self-tapping screws.
7.
Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
8.
Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds.
9.
Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete, and elsewhere
as indicated; or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing.
10.
Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-drilling or self-tapping screws.
11.
Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
Metal Wall Panels: Install metal wall panels on exterior side of girts. Attach metal wall panels to supports with
fasteners as recommended by manufacturer.
Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal wall panels within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nonaccumulative, on level, plumb, and on location lines as indicated, and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of
alignment of matching profiles.
1.20
A.
B.
METAL SOFFIT PANEL INSTALLATION
Provide metal soffit panels the full width of soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support framing.
Flash and seal metal soffit panels with weather closures where panels meet walls and at perimeter of all openings.
1.21
A.
THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION
General: Install insulation concurrently with metal panel installation, in thickness indicated to cover entire surface,
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder toward warm side of construction unless otherwise
indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces except for firestopping.
2.
Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to the surrounding
construction to ensure airtight installation.
3.
Install factory-laminated, vapor-retarder-faced blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths, with both sets
of facing tabs sealed, to provide a complete vapor retarder.
4.
Install blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths. Install vapor retarder over insulation, with both sets of
facing tabs sealed, to provide a complete vapor retarder.
Blanket Roof Insulation: Comply with the following installation method:
1.
Between-Purlin Installation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder between purlins. Carry vapor-retarderfacing tabs up and over purlin, overlapping adjoining facing of next insulation course and maintaining
continuity of retarder. Hold in place with bands and crossbands below insulation.
Blanket Wall Insulation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular to top flange of secondary
framing. Hold in place by metal wall panels fastened to secondary framing.
1.
Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and taut, nesting with
secondary framing to hold insulation in place.
2.
Sound-Absorption Insulation: Where sound-absorption requirement is indicated for metal liner panels, cover
insulation with polyethylene film and provide inserts of wire mesh to form acoustical spacer grid.
B.
C.
1.22
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.23
A.
ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal
expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1.
Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly, including trim, copings, ridge
closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
2.
Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly, including trim, copings, corners, seam covers,
flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
3.
Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to
each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to
line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather
resistant.
1.
Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is
true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing
and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.
2.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints
at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or
bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and
waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with
mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
Gutters: Join sections with riveted-and-soldered or lapped-and-sealed joints. Attach gutters to eaves with gutter
hangers spaced as required for gutter size, but not more than 36 inches o.c. using manufacturer's standard
fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion.
Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts
securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between.
1.
Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.
2.
Tie downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.
ADJUSTING
Doors: After completing installation, test and adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.
Page - 78
29 October 2015
B.
C.
1.24
A.
B.
C.
Door Hardware: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation
and function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended.
Windows: Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points
and at weather stripping to ensure smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and
Touchup Painting: After erection, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and
abraded surfaces of prime-painted structural framing, bearing plates, and accessories.
1.
Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning," or by SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool
Cleaning."
2.
Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.
Metal Panels: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed. On
completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
1.
Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish
touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Clearing and protection of vegetation.
B.
Removal of existing debris.
1.2
SITE CLEARING
B.
Minimize production of dust due to clearing operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding,
sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution.
1.3
EXISTING UTILITIES AND BUILT ELEMENTS
A.
Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain
required permits.
B.
Protect existing utilities to remain from damage.
C.
Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction.
D.
Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.
1.4
VEGETATION
A.
Do not remove or damage vegetation beyond the following limits:
1.
40 feet outside the building perimeter.
2.
10 feet each side of surface walkways, patios, surface parking, and utility lines less than 12 inches in
diameter.
3.
15 feet each side of roadway curbs and main utility trenches.
4.
25 feet outside perimeter of pervious paving areas that must not be compacted by construction traffic.
B.
Install substantial, highly visible fences at least 3 feet high to prevent inadvertent damage to vegetation to remain:
1.
At vegetation removal limits.
C.
In areas where vegetation must be removed but no construction will occur other than pervious paving, remove
vegetation with minimum disturbance of the subsoil.
D.
Vegetation Removed: Do not burn, bury, landfill, or leave on site, except as indicated.
1.
Chip, grind, crush, or shred vegetation for mulching, composting, or other purposes; preference should be
given to on-site uses.
2.
Trees: Sell if marketable; if not, treat as specified for other vegetation removed; remove stumps and roots to
depth of 18 inches.
3.
Sod: Re-use on site if possible; otherwise sell if marketable, and if not, treat as specified for other vegetation
removed.
E.
Restoration: If vegetation outside removal limits or within specified protective fences is damaged or destroyed due to
subsequent construction operations, replace at no cost to Owner.
1.5
DEBRIS
A.
Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.
B.
Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.
C.
Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.
SECTION 312000 - EARTHWORK
1.1
A.
SECTION INCLUDES
Provide complete earthwork including:
1.
General excavation, excavation for structures and footings.
2.
Rough grading
3.
Fill and backfill
Page - 79
29 October 2015
4.
5.
B.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
B.
C.
1.8
A.
1.9
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Finish grading.
Shoring and bracing excavations with temporary shoring, sheeting or retention system as required by code
law or ordinance to protect excavation area, workers, nearby streets and structures.
Note: Refer to the soils investigation report and to recommendations of the soils engineer. If anything contained
herein is contradictory to such report or recommendations, the report and recommendations of the soils engineer
shall govern.
SUBMITTALS
Samples: Submit data on each type of fill material to be used as requested by Civil Engineer and Owner.
BASIS FOR BIDS
Bids shall be based on excavating and filling with materials encountered at site except where special fill or backfill
materials are specified herein or indicated on Drawings. No allowance or extra payments will be made by reason of
variation in types of soil encountered or variations in their moisture contents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Shoring, sheeting, bracing and retention plans, details and other provisions necessary in order to safely excavate
trenches for this project shall be prepared by a Professional Engineer registered in the State where the project is
constructed and employed by Contractor. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for retention plans, details,
accessories and execution.
STOCKPILING
Material cut or excavated from building areas which is suitable for backfilling may be stored on site to be distributed
later. Fill material required to be hauled in may be stockpiled at site until used, provided it is properly handled to
prevent contamination with undesirable materials. Stockpile topsoil separate from excavated sub-soil.
SURPLUS MATERIALS
Excavated materials not to be used in fills and backfills on this project shall be removed from site immediately.
Materials containing rubbish, debris or rocks shall be removed.
MATERIALS
General Fill and Backfill: Suitable existing excavated on-site soil free from vegetation, debris, and other deleterious
matter, unless otherwise noted.
Fill Beneath Structures: Inert and non-expansive, having a plasticity index, liquid limit, and other characteristics in
accordance with the soil investigation report.
Top Soil
1.
Clean natural topsoil free of vegetation, debris and other deleterious matter.
2.
Provide topsoil free from weeds, nutgrass, lumps, stones larger than 1 inch, roots, or similar substances.
SHORING AND BRACING
Contractor shall design and provide as necessary to prevent cave-ins and slides, or as a protection for workmen in
trenches and other excavation. Shoring and bracing shall remain in place as long as required for safety and shall be
removed only as backfill is placed. Comply with all Municipal, State, and Federal requirements.
PREPARATION
Before starting excavation, establish location and extent of underground utilities occurring in work area.
Notify utility companies to remove and relocate lines which are in way of excavation.
Maintain, reroute or extend as required, existing utility lines to remain which pass through work area.
Protect utility services uncovered by excavation.
Remove abandoned utility service lines from areas of excavation; cap, plug or seal such lines and identify at grade.
Accurately locate and record abandoned and active utility lines rerouted or extended on Project Record Documents.
Upon discovery of unknown utility or concealed condition, discontinue affected work and notify Architect and Owner.
1.10
A.
B.
C.
D.
ROUGH GRADING
Excavation and rough grade to lines and grades shown.
Overcut new planting and lawn areas to allow a layer of topsoil not less than 4" thick.
Maintain excavations to drain and be free of excess water.
Remove objectionable and excess materials from site when excavated.
1.11
A.
B.
STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION
Locate and mark all existing underground utilities and services before beginning structural excavation.
Provide excavation for structures and footings, as required for construction, bracing and removal of forms, applying
waterproofing, and to permit inspection.
Machine slope banks to angle of repose or less until shored. Excavation shall not interfere with normal 45 degree
angle bearing splay of any foundation.
Bottom of excavating shall be reasonably level.
Maintain excavations in as near their natural moisture conditions as possible.
Fill over-excavated areas under structure bearing surfaces in accordance with Soil Engineer's direction.
Do not allow construction equipment to create "pumping" of soils.
Stockpile excavated clean fill for reuse where directed. Remove excess or unsuitable excavated fill from site.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Page - 80
29 October 2015
I.
K.
Remove boulders or cobbles. Use of explosives will not be permitted.
Coordinate with drilled pier work for special requirements and arrangements regarding excavation to rough out
elevations.
If presence of perched water is encountered, provide interior drainage.
A.
EXCAVATION BENEATH FLOOR SLABS
Beneath Floor Slab on Grade: Refer to recommendations of the soils engineer.
J.
1.12
1.13
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.14
A.
B.
1.15
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.16
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.17
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.18
A.
FILLS AND BACKFILLS - GENERAL
Verify areas to be backfilled are free of debris, snow, ice or water, and ground surfaces are not frozen.
Proofroll exposed subgrade in building and paving areas to detect unsuitable soil conditions. Commence proofrolling
operations after a suitable period of dry weather to avoid degrading acceptable subgrade surfaces. Make four
passes over each section with proofrolling equipment, with the last two perpendicular to the first two.
Cut out soft areas of subgrade not readily capable of in- situ compaction. Backfill and compact to density equal to
requirements for subsequent backfill material.
Site backfill systematically, as early as possible, to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over
porous, wet or spongy subgrade surfaces.
Use a placement method that will not disturb or damage utilities in trenches.
Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density.
Make gradual changes in grade. Blend slopes into level areas.
Refer to soils investigation report for additional requirements.
FILLS (WITHIN STRUCTURE)
Select Fill Beneath Slabs on Grade: (refer to soils report for specific fill placement criteria)
1.
Scarify exposed sub-grade and recompact to an appropriate density determined using Standard Proctor
Compaction Test, at moisture content as indicated in soil report.
2.
Place appropriate fill in loose lifts and compact each lift to an appropriate density determined using Standard
Proctor Compaction Test, at moisture content as indicated in soil report.
3.
Place select fill to a minimum depth indicated on drawings.
4.
Prevent excessive loss of moisture during construction.
Refer to soils investigation report for additional requirements.
FILLS (OUTSIDE STRUCTURE)
Roughen and loosen filled areas before placing of fill materials.
Spread suitable fill materials in uniform layers over area not to exceed 8" thick compaction.
Wet and work materials as required for proper compaction and thoroughly mix. Compaction shall be by tamping
rollers or by utilizing excavation equipment to spread and compact fill to a uniform density equal to natural density of
material before excavating.
Areas adjacent to building, or where compacting equipment cannot work, shall be compacted with hand tampers.
Scarify upper 6 inches of exposed sub-grade and compact filled areas to density as indicated in the soils report, to
lines and grades shown, with allowances for a final layer of topsoil at least 4 inches thick in lawn and planter areas.
Plant Beds: Refer to landscape drawings Beds shall be prepared to a minimum of 4 inches of depth.
BACKFILL (OUTSIDE STRUCTURE)
Ensure areas to be backfilled are free from debris, snow, ice and water and that ground surfaces are note in frozen
condition.
Do not backfill over existing subgrade surfaces which are porous, wet or spongy.
Backfill areas to grades, contours, levels and elevations indicated.
Backfill systematically and as early as possible to allow maximum time for natural settlement and compaction.
After permanent construction is in place, forms and trash removed, sub-soil drainage and water-proofing complete
and inspections complete, backfill with approved materials and compact to approximate density of natural ground.
Place backfill in layers not exceeding 8" loose depth, and hand or machine tamp to compaction required.
Water may be added to backfill material as an aid to compaction; however, material shall not be wet to form a mud or
paste.
FINISH GRADING
After rough grading has been completed and site cleared of construction debris, cover areas disturbed by
construction or graded to provide new finish grades with a layer of topsoil not less than 4" thick.
Reuse stockpiled topsoil, cleaned of foreign matter, or provide additional approved topsoil as required.
Final grades shall be as shown or as directed by Landscape Architect and shall slope away from building and shall
provide drainage for area.
Degree of finish shall be that ordinarily obtainable with blade grader or scraper operations.
Finish surfaces shall be not be more than 0.10 feet above or below established grade elevation.
Provide uniform roundings at top and bottom of slopes and other breaks in grade. Correct irregularities and areas
where water will stand.
Uniformly distribute topsoil to required grades; feather back to where grades remain unchanged.
Finish lawn and unpaved areas to 1" below top of walk and curbs.
PROTECTION, CLEAN-UP AND EXCESS MATERIALS
Protect grades from construction and weather damage, washing, erosion and rutting, and repair such damage that
occurs.
Page - 81
29 October 2015
B.
C.
D.
1.19
A.
B.
Correct any settlement below established grades to prevent ponding of water.
At locations where lime, concrete or other foreign matter has penetrated or been mixed with earth, remove damaged
earth and replace with clean material.
Remove excess stockpiled material, debris, waste, and other material from site and leave work in clean finished
condition for final acceptance. Contractor is responsible for disposal of debris and excess materials.
QUALITY CONTROL
Paving Subgrade Stabilization: Perform one subgrade in-place density test per 7,500 S.F. of subgrade, after
subgrade preparation is complete at locations determined by the soils engineer, in accordance with ASTM D2922
and ASTM D3017. Perform tests within 48 hours of placement of pavement construction.
Building Subgrade Stabilization: Make necessary soil tests (Atterberg Limit Series and ASTM D698 Standard
Proctor for each type of fill specified) to determine the moisture content and density of existing subgrade and inspect
and test the placement of additional fill lifts to verify that all fill materials used are in accordance with the
specifications for that use. Perform one field density test (ASTM D2922) for each 5,000 S.F. of area within the
building footprint on each lift prior to placement of additional fill material.
313116 - TERMITE CONTROL
1.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing this type of work and:
1.
Having minimum of 2 years documented experience.
2.
Approved by manufacturer of treatment materials.
3.
Licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
1.2
WARRANTY
A.
Provide five year installer's warranty against damage to building caused by termites.
1.
Include coverage for repairs to building and to contents damaged due to building damage. Repair
damage and, if required, re-treat.
2.
Inspect annually and report in writing to Owner. Provide inspection service for [1 (one)] years from Date
of Substantial Completion.
1.3
MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Bayer Environmental Science Corp : www.backedbybayer.com/pest-management.
2.
FMC Professional Solutions : www.fmcprosolutions.com.
3.
Syngenta Professional Products : www.syngentaprofessionalproducts.com.
4.
B.
Toxicant Chemical: EPA approved; synthetically color dyed to permit visual identification of treated soil.
C.
Diluent: Recommended by toxicant manufacturer.
1.4
MIXES
A.
Mix toxicant to manufacturer's instructions.
1.5
APPLICATION
A.
Comply with requirements of U.S. EPA and applicable state and local codes.
B.
Spray apply toxicant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Apply toxicant at following locations:
1.
Under Slabs-on-Grade.
2.
At Both Sides of Foundation Surface.
D.
Under slabs, apply toxicant immediately prior to installation of vapor barrier.
E.
At foundation walls, apply toxicant immediately prior to finish grading work outside foundations.
F.
Apply extra treatment to structure penetration surfaces such as pipe or ducts, and soil penetrations such as
grounding rods or posts.
G.
Re-treat disturbed treated soil with same toxicant as original treatment.
H.
If inspection or testing identifies the presence of termites, re-treat soil and re-test.
1.6
PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit soil grading over treated work.
SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on joint filler, admixtures, and curing compound.
B. Design Data: Indicate pavement thickness, designed concrete strength, reinforcement, and typical details.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
Page - 82
29 October 2015
1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen.
1.4 FORM MATERIALS
A. Form Materials: Conform to ACI 301.
B. Joint Filler: Preformed; non-extruding bituminous type (ASTM D 1751) or sponge rubber or cork (ASTM D 1752)
1.5
A.
B.
C.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60Grade 420; deformed.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars,
welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard
Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified, and as
follows:
1.6 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project:
1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, gray portland cement Type I.
a.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F.
D.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with
documented service-record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar paving applications and service
conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.
1.
Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches38 mm nominal.
2.
Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
E.
Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
F.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
G.
Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain
not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.
1.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
1.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class A.
B. Joint Sealer: Type U-TB as specified in Section 079005.
C. Pigmented Mineral Dry-Shake Hardener (for HC ramps and decorative concrete): Factory-packaged, dry combination
of portland cement, graded quartz aggregate, color pigments, and plasticizing admixture. Use color pigments that are
finely ground, non-fading mineral oxides inter-ground with cement.
1.
a.
Dayton Superior Corporation; Quartz Tuff.
b.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; QUARTZPLATE FF.
c.
Scofield, L. M. Company; LITHOCHROME Color Hardener.
1.
D.
Stamp Mats (for decorative concrete): Semirigid polyurethane mats with projecting textured and ridged underside
capable of imprinting texture and joint patterns on plastic concrete.
a.
Bomanite Corporation.
b.
Brickform.
c.
Butterfield Color.
d.
Scofield, L. M. Company.
E.
Stamp Tools (for decorative concrete): Open-grid, aluminum or rigid-plastic stamp tool capable of imprinting joint
patterns on plastic concrete.
e.
Matcrete Precision Stamped Concrete Tools.
f.
Scofield, L. M. Company.
g.
SuperStone, Inc.
1.7 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field experience or
trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.
1.
For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and
reporting proposed mix designs.
C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer.
D. Concrete Properties:
1.
Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 3,000 lbs for
sidewalks; Refer to civil engineering drawings for vehicular pavement strengths.
2.
Fly Ash Content: Maximum 25 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
3.
Calcined Pozzolan Content: Maximum 10 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
4.
Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight.
5.
Total Air Content: 4 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M.
6.
Maximum Slump: 4 inches.
Page - 83
29 October 2015
1.8 MIXING
A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
1.9 EXAMINATION
A. Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads.
B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.
1.10 PREPARATION
A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.
B. Coat surfaces of manhole frames with oil to prevent bond with concrete pavement.
C. Notify Architect minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.
1.11 FORMING
A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient.
B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.
C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement.
1.12 REINFORCEMENT
A. Place reinforcement at top of slabs-on-grade.
B. Interrupt reinforcement at contraction joints.
C. Place dowels to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed.
1.13 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement.
C. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction joints. Do not
break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.
1.14 JOINTS
A.
Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints.
B.
Place 3/4 inch wide expansion joints at 60 foot intervals and to separate paving from vertical surfaces and other
components and in pattern indicated.
1.
Form joints with joint filler extending from bottom of pavement to within 1/2 inch of finished surface.
2.
Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
C.
Provide scored joints:
1.
At 5 feet intervals in walks.
2.
Between sidewalks and curbs.
3.
Between curbs and asphaltic pavement.
D.
Provide keyed joints as indicated.
E.
Saw cut contraction joints 3/16 inch wide at an optimum time after finishing. Locate at maximum 15 feet on center. Cut
1/3 into depth of slab.
1.15 FINISHING
A. Area Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to pavement direction.
B. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to direction of travel with troweled and radiused edge 1/4 inch
radius.
C. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom, texture parallel to pavement direction.
D. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply in accordance with
E. Texture and color accessible ramps to meet requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.16
PIGMENTED MINERAL DRY-SHAKE HARDENER
A.
Pigmented Mineral Dry-Shake Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply dry-shake materials to paving surfaces
according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1.
Uniformly apply dry-shake hardener at a rate of 100 lb/100 sq. ft. unless greater amount is recommended
by manufacturer to match paving color required.
2.
Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of dry-shake hardener over the concrete surface with
mechanical spreader; allow hardener to absorb moisture and embed it by power floating. Follow power
floating with a second application of pigmented mineral dry-shake hardener, uniformly distributing
remainder of material at right angles to first application to ensure uniform color, and embed hardener by
final power floating.
3.
After final power floating, apply the following finish:
a.
Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished concrete
surface, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.
b.
Pigmented Powder Release Agent: Uniformly distribute onto dry-shake-hardened and stillplastic concrete at a rate of 3 to 4 lb/100 sq. ft.
1.17
STAMPING
A.
Mat Stamping: After floating and while concrete is plastic, apply mat-stamped finish.
B.
Pigmented Powder Release Agent: Uniformly distribute onto concrete at a rate of 3 to 4 lb/100 sq. ft.
Page - 84
29 October 2015
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Liquid Release Agent: Apply liquid release agent to the concrete surface and the stamp mat. Uniformly mist
surface of concrete at a rate of 5 gal/1000 sq. ft..
After application of release agent, accurately align and place stamp mats in sequence.
Uniformly load mats and press into concrete to produce required imprint pattern and depth of imprint on concrete
surface. Gently remove stamp mats. Hand stamp edges and surfaces unable to be imprinted by stamp mats.
Remove residual release agent according to manufacturer's written instructions, but no fewer than three days
after stamping concrete. High-pressure-wash surface and joint patterns, taking care not to damage stamped
concrete. Control, collect, and legally dispose of runoff.
Tool Stamping: After floating and while concrete is plastic, apply tool-stamped finish.
1.
Cover surface with polyethylene film, stretch taut to remove wrinkles, lap sides and ends 3 inches, and
secure to edge forms. Lightly broom surface to remove air bubbles.
2.
Accurately align and place stamp tools in sequence and tamp into concrete to produce ired imprint
pattern and depth of imprint on concrete surface. Gently remove stamp tools. Hand stamp edges and
surfaces unable to be imprinted by stamp tools.
3.
Carefully remove polyethylene film immediately after tool stamping.
1.18 JOINT SEALING
A. See Section 079005 for joint sealer requirements.
1.19 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 ft.
B. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch.
1.20 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 014000.
1.
Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.
2.
Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to
commencement of concrete operations
3.
Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with
specified requirements.
B. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain
test samples for every 100 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed.
1.
Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as
concrete it represents.
2.
Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken.
C. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples
taken.
1.21
A.
PROTECTION
Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and
mechanical injury.
SECTION 321713 - PRECAST CONCRETE SITE ACCESSORIES
1.1
A.
B.
C.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
Precast concrete parking bumpers.
Precast concrete splash blocks.
Precast concrete mechanical unit support pads.
PRECAST CONCRETE WHEEL STOPS
Qualities: Precast concrete wheel stops, reinforced, and having 2 pre-drilled pin holes and having 2 cast-in anchor
pins.
1.
Concrete: Normal weight concrete, minimum 4000 psi 28-day compressive strength.
2.
Reinforcing: 2 continuous No. 3 deformed reinforcement bars.
3.
Size: 8-1/2 inch wide by 6 inch high by 72 inch length.
4.
Anchor Pins: 5/8 inch deformed bar, 2 for each wheel stop, extending a minimum of 3 inches below bottom
of wheel stop.
Standards
1.
Concrete: ASTM C 94.
2.
Reinforcing: ASTM A 615, Grade 40.
A.
B.
C.
PRECAST CONCRETE SPLASH BLOCKS AND MECHANICAL UNIT PADS
Precast concrete, reinforced with manufacturer's standard mesh or deformed bars.
Concrete: Normal weight, minimum 4000 psi 28 day compressive strength.
Size: As indicated on Drawings.
A.
B.
PREPARATION - WHEEL STOPS
Verify layout of wheel stop locations with pavement marking layout.
Thoroughly clean surfaces to receive wheel stops free of dirt, sand, oil, grease or other foreign matter.
A.
INSTALLATION - WHEEL STOPS
Install a precast wheel stop at each parking space indicated on drawings.
1.4
1.5
Page - 85
29 October 2015
B.
C.
Install wheel stops with anchors [adhesive] in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Leave wheel stops securely anchored and in proper alignment.
A.
INSTALLATION - SPLASH BLOCKS AND MECHANICAL UNIT PADS
Place blocks and pads on smooth, even topsoil. Place level and solidly supported.
1.6
SECTION 321723 - PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS
1.1
MATERIALS
A.
Line and Zone Marking Paint: MPI No. 97 Latex Traffic Marking Paint; color(s) as indicated.
1.
Roadway Markings: As required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Parking Lots: White.
3.
Handicapped Symbols: Blue.
B.
Temporary Marking Tape: Preformed, reflective, pressure sensitive adhesive tape in color(s) required;
Contractor is responsible for selection of material of sufficient durability as to perform satisfactorily during period
for which its use is required.
1.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation
before proceeding.
1.3
PREPARATION
A.
Allow new pavement surfaces to cure for a period of not less than 14 days before application of marking
materials.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the
substrate under the project conditions.
C.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
1.
Remove dust, dirt, and other granular surface deposits by sweeping, blowing with compressed air,
rinsing with water, or a combination of these methods.
D.
Where oil or grease are present, scrub affected areas with several applications of trisodium phosphate solution or
other approved detergent or degreaser, and rinse thoroughly after each application; after cleaning, seal oilsoaked areas with cut shellac to prevent bleeding through the new paint.
E.
Establish survey control points to determine locations and dimensions of markings; provide templates to control
paint application by type and color at necessary intervals.
1.4
INSTALLATION
A.
Begin pavement marking as soon as practicable after surface has been cleaned and dried.
B.
Do not apply paint if temperature of surface to be painted or the atmosphere is less than 50 degrees F or more
than 95 degrees F.
C.
Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using an experienced technician that is thoroughly familiar
with equipment, materials, and marking layouts.
D.
Comply with FHWA MUTCD manual (http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov) for details not shown.
E.
Apply markings in locations determined by measurement from survey control points; preserve control points until
after markings have been accepted.
F.
Apply uniformly painted markings of color(s), lengths, and widths as indicated on the drawings true, sharp edges
and ends.
1.
Apply paint in one coat only.
2.
Wet Film Thickness: 0.015 inch, minimum.
3.
Width Tolerance: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.
G.
Parking Lots: Apply parking space lines, entrance and exit arrows, painted curbs, and other markings indicated
on drawings.
1.
Mark the International Handicapped Symbol at indicated parking spaces.
2.
Hand application by pneumatic spray is acceptable.
H.
Symbols: Use a suitable template that will provide a pavement marking with true, sharp edges and ends, of the
design and size indicated.
1.5
DRYING, PROTECTION, AND REPLACEMENT
A.
Protect newly painted markings so that paint is not picked up by tires, smeared, or tracked.
B.
Provide barricades, warning signs, and flags as necessary to prevent traffic crossing newly painted markings.
C.
Allow paint to dry at least the minimum time specified by the applicable paint standard and not less than that
recommended by the manufacturer.
D.
Remove and replace markings that are applied at less than minimum material rates; deviate from true alignment;
exceed length and width tolerances; or show light spots, smears, or other deficiencies or irregularities.
E.
Remove markings in manner to avoid damage to the surface to which the marking was applied, using carefully
controlled sand blasting, approved grinding equipment, or other approved method.
F.
Replace removed markings at no additional cost to Owner.
Page - 86
29 October 2015
323113 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
1.1
B.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC
General: Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer edge of selvage knuckle or
twist. Comply with CLFMI Product Manual and with requirements indicated below:
1.
Steel Wire Fabric: Wire with a diameter of 0.148 inch.
a.
Mesh Size: 2 inches.
b.
Zinc-Coated Fabric: ASTM A 392, Type II, Class 1, 1.2 oz./sq. ft. with zinc coating applied before
weaving.
c.
Coat selvage ends of fabric that is metallic coated before the weaving process with manufacturer's
standard clear protective coating.
2.
Selvage: Knuckled at both selvages.
FENCE FRAMING
Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, including rails, braces, and line; terminal; and corner posts.
Provide members with minimum dimensions and wall thickness according to ASTM F 1043 or ASTM F 1083 based
on the following:
1.
Fabric Height: 6 feet or as otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2.
Light Industrial Strength: Material Group IC-L, round steel pipe, electric-resistance-welded pipe.
a.
Line Post: 2.375 inches in diameter.
b.
End, Corner and Pull Post: 2.875 inches.
3.
Horizontal Framework Members: Intermediate top and bottom rails complying with ASTM F 1043.
a.
Top Rail: 1.66 inches in diameter.
4.
Brace Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043.
5.
Metallic Coating for Steel Framing:
a.
Type A, consisting of not less than minimum 2.0-oz./sq. ft. average zinc coating per ASTM A 123 or
4.0-oz./sq. ft. zinc coating per ASTM A 653.
TENSION WIRE
Metallic-Coated Steel Wire: 0.177-inch diameter, marcelled tension wire complying with ASTM A 817 and ASTM A
824, with the following metallic coating:
1.
Type II, zinc coated (galvanized) by hot-dip process, with the following minimum coating weight:
a.
Class 4: Not less than 1.2 oz./sq. ft. of uncoated wire surface.
b.
Matching chain-link fabric coating weight.
FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
General: Comply with ASTM F 626.
Post Caps: Provide for each post.
1.
Provide line post caps with loop to receive tension wire or top rail.
Rail and Brace Ends: For each gate, corner, pull, and end post.
Rail Fittings: Provide the following:
1.
Top Rail Sleeves: Pressed-steel or round-steel tubing not less than 6 inches long.
2.
Rail Clamps: Line and corner boulevard clamps for connecting rails in the fence line-to-line posts.
Tension and Brace Bands: Pressed steel.
Tension Bars: Steel, length not less than 2 inches shorter than full height of chain-link fabric. Provide one bar for
each gate and end post, and two for each corner and pull post, unless fabric is integrally woven into post.
Truss Rod Assemblies: Steel, hot-dip galvanized after threading rod and turnbuckle or other means of adjustment.
Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: According to ASTM F 626.
1.
Standard Round Wire Ties: For attaching chain-link fabric to posts, rails, and frames, complying with the
following:
a.
Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: Galvanized coating thickness matching coating thickness of chain-link
fence fabric.
Finish:
1.
Metallic Coating for Pressed Steel or Cast Iron: Not less than 1.2 oz. /sq. ft. zinc.
J.
Privacy Slats: Vinyl or aluminum, in color as selected by Architect.
A.
Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements indicated.
1.
Install fencing in locations indicated.
1.5
SECTION 323129 - WOOD FENCES AND GATES
1.1
A.
B.
MATERIALS
Posts: ASTM A 120; Schedule 40 steel pipe, standard weight, one piece without joints; galvanized finish.
Wood Rails and Pickets: Western Red Cedar, No. 1 clear grade, smooth surface.
Page - 87
29 October 2015
1.2
A.
1.3
CONCRETE MIX
Concrete: ASTM C 94; normal Portland Cement; 2,500 psi at 28 days; 3 inch slump; 3/4 inch maximum sized
aggregate.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
COMPONENTS
Line Posts: 2.38 inch diameter steel pipe.
Corner and Terminal Posts: 3.5 inch steel pipe.
Gate Posts: 3.5 inch diameter steel pipe.
Gate Frame: 1.66 inch diameter steel pipe for welded fabrication. Provide with standard mounting and hinging
hardware.
Caps: Cast steel or malleable iron, galvanized; sized to post dimension, set screw retained.
Fittings: Sleeves, bands, clips, rail attachment devices, fasteners and fittings; galvanized steel.
Gate Hardware: Latch with gravity drop; two 180 degree gate hinges per leaf and hardware for padlock.
Rails: 2 by 4 nominal size.
Pickets: 1 by 4 nominal size, flat top.
A.
B.
FINISHES
Galvanized: ANSI/ASTM A123; 1.8 ounces per square foot coating.
Accessories: Same finish as framing.
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.4
1.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
INSTALLATION
Provide fence 6 feet nominal height.
Space line posts at intervals not exceeding 8 feet.
Set terminal, gate and line posts plumb, in concrete footings with top of footing 2 inches above and 6 inches below
finish grade. Slope top of concrete for water runoff.
Footing depth below finish grade: 36 inches. Excavate deeper as required for adequate support in soft and loose
soils, and for posts with heavy lateral loads.
Provide 3 rails (4 rails on fences over 6' in height), with top and bottom spaced 12" center line from end of pickets.
Attach rails to posts with pre-manufactured, radiused, steel devices. Use minimum 2 lag bolts per device.
Attach pickets to each rail with two galvanized nails. If power actuated nailers are used, adjust to make sure
fasteners are not driven past face of picket.
END OF SPECIFICATIONS
Page - 88
29 October 2015
Caliber Collision
Austin, Texas
Permit Issue
MEP Specification Index
JJA, Inc.
Texas Registered Engineering Firm F-1290
Division 22 – Plumbing
210518
Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping
211313
Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems
220517
Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping
220518
Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping
220519
Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping
220529
Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
220719
Plumbing Piping Insulation
221116
Domestic Water Piping
221119
Domestic Water Piping Specialties
221316
Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
221319
Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties
221513
General Service Compressed Air Piping
223300
Electric, Domestic Water Heaters
224213.13 Commercial Water Closets
224216.13 Commercial Lavatories
224216.16 Commercial Sinks
224716
Pressure Water Coolers
Division 23 – Mechanical
230513
Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment
230548
Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Equipment
230593
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
230713
Duct Insulation
233300
Air Duct Accessories
233416
Centrifugal HVAC Fans
233713
Diffusers, Registers and Grilles
235400
Furnaces
237433
Packaged Roof Top Units
238126
Split-System Air-Conditioning Unit
Division 26 – Electrical
260500
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
260519
Conductors and Cables
260526
Grounding and Bonding
260533
Raceways and Boxes
260923
Lighting Control Devices
262416
Panelboards
262726
Wiring Devices
262816
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
265100
Interior Lighting
265600
Exterior Lighting
269520
Electrical Cleaning and Testing
Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security
283112
Fire Alarm System
Caliber Collision, Austin, TX
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 210518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Escutcheons.
Floor plates.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and rough-brass finish and setscrew
fastener.
B.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and
spring-clip fasteners.
C.
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
D.
Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and rough-brass finish and with
concealed hinge and setscrew.
E.
Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, hinge, and spring-clip fasteners.
2.2
FLOOR PLATES
A.
One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.
B.
Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
B.
Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with
OD that completely covers opening.
1.
Escutcheons for New Piping:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type with
polished, chrome-plated finish.
Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, castbrass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type
with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel
type.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass finish.
Escutcheons for Existing Piping:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, castbrass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type
with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel
type.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass finish.
C.
Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.
D.
Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD
that completely covers opening.
1.
2.
New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.
Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.2
A.
Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.
END OF SECTION 210518
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.3
Pipes, fittings, and specialties.
Fire-protection valves.
Fire-department connections.
Sprinklers.
Alarm devices.
Manual control stations.
Control panels.
Pressure gages. Retain Sections in subparagraphs below that contain requirements
Contractor might expect to find in this Section but are specified in other Sections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
High-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at
working pressure higher than standard 175 psig, but not higher than 250 psig.
B.
Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at
working pressure of 175 psig maximum.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A.
Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and
that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from
sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys
frangible device. Hose connections are included if indicated.
B.
Deluge Sprinkler System: Open sprinklers are attached to piping connected to water supply
through deluge valve. Fire-detection system, in same area as sprinklers, opens valve. Water
flows into piping system and discharges from attached sprinklers when valve opens.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.5
A.
Standard-Pressure Piping System Component:
working pressure.
B.
Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), including comprehensive engineering analysis
by a qualified professional engineer. Retain data in subparagraph below if known and if Owner
wants to furnish test data to Contractor.
C.
Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses
through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.
Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:
a.
Repair Garages: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.
3.
Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:
a.
Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.
b.
Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over 1500-sq. ft area.
c.
Extra-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.30 gpm over 2500-sq. ft. area.
d.
Extra-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.40 gpm over 2500-sq. ft. area.
e.
Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having jurisdiction.
4.
Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13 unless
otherwise indicated:
a.
b.
c.
D.
1.6
Listed for 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum
Light-Hazard Occupancies: 100 gpm
Ordinary-Hazard Occupancies: 250 gpm
Extra-Hazard Occupancies: 500 gpm
Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to NFPA 13.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
D.
Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
2.
3.
4.
Domestic water piping.
Compressed air piping.
HVAC hydronic piping.
Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following:
a.
b.
Lighting fixtures.
Air outlets and inlets.
E.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.
F.
Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that
have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if
applicable.
G.
Welding certificates.
H.
Fire-hydrant flow test report.
I.
Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and
Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."
J.
Field quality-control reports.
K.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications:
1.
Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems
and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering
responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
a.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field
test reports by a qualified professional engineer.
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D.
NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing
shall comply with the following:
1.
2.
NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
1.9
Notify Architect, Construction Manager Owner no fewer than two days in advance of
proposed interruption of sprinkler service.
Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Construction Manager's
written permission.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings,
including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.2
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and
fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Standard Weight, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B.
B.
Schedule 30, Black-Steel Pipe:
ASTM A 135; ASTM A 795/A 795M, Type E; or
ASME B36.10M, wrought steel; with wall thickness not less than Schedule 30 and not more
than Schedule 40. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.
C.
Thinwall Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, threadable, with wall
thickness less than Schedule 30 and equal to or greater than Schedule 10. Pipe ends may be
factory or field formed to match joining method.
D.
Schedule 10, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, Schedule 10 in NPS 5
and smaller; and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10, plain end.
E.
Nonstandard OD, Thinwall Black-Steel Pipe:
ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M,
thinwall, with plain ends and wall thickness less than Schedule 10.
F.
Hybrid Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, lightwall, with wall
thickness less than Schedule 10 and greater than Schedule 5.
G.
Schedule 5 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, lightwall, with plain ends.
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
H.
Galvanized and Black Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M,
standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.
I.
Galvanized and Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.
J.
Galvanized and Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard
pattern.
K.
Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.
L.
Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.
M.
Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.
N.
Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.
O.
Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Victaulic Company.
2.
3.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig
Galvanized and Uncoated, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M,
malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching
steel pipe.
Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern,
unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections,
EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.
4.
P.
Steel Pressure-Seal Fittings: UL 213, FM-approved, 175-psig (1200-kPa) pressure rating with
steel housing, rubber O-rings, and pipe stop; for use with fitting manufacturers' pressure-seal
tools.
1.
following:
a.
2.3
Victaulic Company
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.
B.
Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.
C.
Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, pressure fittings.
D.
Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
E.
Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket,
metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
F.
Copper Pressure-Seal Fittings:
1.
following:
a.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Standard: UL 213.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Cast-bronze fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring
seal in each end.
Grooved-Joint, Copper-Tube Appurtenances:
1.
following:
a.
Victaulic Company.
2.
Grooved-End, Copper Fittings:
ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M), copper tube or
ASTM B 584, bronze castings.
Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: To fit copper-tube dimensions, with design similar to
AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket suitable for hot
and cold water, and bolts and nuts.
3.
H.
Copper-Tube, Extruded-Tee Connections:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements from available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
2.
2.4
Viega; Plumbing & Heating Systems.
T-DRILL Industries Inc.
Description: Tee formed in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014.
PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick.
1.
2.
Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face
gaskets.
Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type
gaskets.
B.
Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for generalduty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
Page - 6
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
D.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate
for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
E.
Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Piping and Tubing: ASTM F 493, solvent cement
recommended by pipe and fitting manufacturer, and made for joining CPVC sprinkler pipe and
fittings. Include cleaner or primer recommended by pipe and fitting manufacturer.
1.
2.
F.
2.5
Use solvent cement that has a VOC content of 490 g/L or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 650 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, and Bolts and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
COVER SYSTEM FOR SPRINKLER PIPING
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the
following manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but
are not limited to, the following]:
1.
DecoShield Systems, Inc.
B.
Description: System of support brackets and covers made to protect sprinkler piping.
C.
Brackets: Glass-reinforced nylon.
D.
Covers: Extruded PVC sections of length, shape, and size required for size and routing of
CPVC piping.
2.6
LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
A.
General Requirements:
1.
2.
B.
Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved.
Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
Ball Valves:
1.
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
Anvil International, Inc.
Victaulic Company.
Standard: UL 1091 except with ball instead of disc.
Valves NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
Page - 7
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
4.
5.
C.
Valves NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2: Bronze body with threaded ends or ductile-iron body with
grooved ends.
Valves NPS 3 : Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
Bronze Butterfly Valves:
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Standard: UL 1091.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig.
Body Material: Bronze.
End Connections: Threaded.
Iron Butterfly Valves:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Fivalco Inc.
Global Safety Products, Inc.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
Fivalco Inc.
Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
NIBCO INC.
Pratt, Henry Company.
Shurjoint Piping Products.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
Victaulic Company.
Standard: UL 1091.
Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
Style: Lug or wafer.
End Connections: Grooved.
Check Valves:
1.
a.
b.
c.
AFAC Inc.
American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary.
Page - 8
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
z.
aa.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Standard: UL 312.
Type: Swing check.
Body Material: Cast iron.
End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
Bronze OS&Y Gate Valves:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
Fire-End & Croker Corporation.
Fire Protection Products, Inc.
Fivalco Inc.
Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
Groeniger & Company.
Matco-Norca.
Metraflex, Inc.
Mueller Co.; Water Products Division.
NIBCO INC.
Potter Roemer.
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
United Brass Works, Inc.
Venus Fire Protection Ltd.
Victaulic Company.
Viking Corporation.
Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
NIBCO INC.
Standard: UL 262.
Iron OS&Y Gate Valves:
Page - 9
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
American Valve, Inc.
Hammond Valve.
NIBCO INC.
Standard: UL 262.
Pressure Rating: [250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum] [300 psig (2070 kPa)].
Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
3.
4.
Standard: UL 1091.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
Valves NPS 2 and Smaller:
a.
b.
c.
5.
Fivalco Inc.
NIBCO INC.
Victaulic Company.
Valve Type: Ball or butterfly.
Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:
Page - 10
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
a.
b.
c.
6.
I.
Valve Operation: Integral electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, single-circuit, supervisory
switch electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, two-circuit, supervisory switch visual indicating
device.
NRS Gate Valves:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
J.
Valve Type: Butterfly.
End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or wafer.
NIBCO INC.
Standard: UL 262.
Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum
Body Material: Cast iron with indicator post flange.
Stem: Non-rising.
Indicator Posts:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NIBCO INC.
Standard: UL 789.
Type: Horizontal for wall mounting.
Body Material: Cast iron with extension rod and locking device.
Operation: Hand wheel
Page - 11
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.7
TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES
A.
1.
2.
B.
Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"
published by FM Global, listing.
Angle Valves:
1.
a.
b.
C.
Ball Valves:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
D.
Affiliated Distributors.
Barnett.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.
Flowserve.
FNW.
Jomar International, Ltd.
Kitz Corporation.
Legend Valve.
Metso Automation USA Inc.
NIBCO INC.
Potter Roemer.
Red-White Valve Corporation.
Southern Manufacturing Group.
Stewart, M. A. and Sons Ltd.
Victaulic Company.
Globe Valves:
1.
Page - 12
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
a.
b.
E.
Plug Valves:
1.
a.
2.8
Southern Manufacturing Group.
SPECIALTY VALVES
A.
1.
2.
Pressure Rating:
a.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Size: Same as connected piping.
Alarm Valves:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig minimum.
AFAC Inc.
Victaulic Company.
Viking Corporation.
Standard: UL 193.
Design: For horizontal or vertical installation.
Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, and
fill-line attachment with strainer.
Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain piping.
Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.
Deluge Valves:
Page - 13
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Standard: UL 260.
Design: Hydraulically operated, differential-pressure type.
Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, drip
cup assembly piped without valves and separate from main drain line, fill-line attachment
with strainer, and push-rod chamber supply connection.
Wet, Pilot-Line Trim Set: Include gage to read push-rod chamber pressure, globe valve
for manual operation of deluge valve, and connection for actuation device.
Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.9
AFAC Inc.
BERMAD Control Valves.
CLA-VAL Automatic Control Valves.
OCV Control Valves.
Victaulic Company.
Viking Corporation.
AFAC Inc.
Standard: UL 1726.
Type: Automatic draining, ball check.
Size: NPS 3/4
FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
A.
Exposed-Type, Fire-Department Connection:
1.
a.
b.
c.
AFAC Inc.
Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc.
Page - 14
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
2.10
A.
Standard: UL 405.
Type: Exposed, projecting, for wall mounting.
Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal.
Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department
sizes and threads. Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and
check devices or clappers.
Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain.
Escutcheon Plate: Round, brass, wall type.
Outlet: Back, with pipe threads.
Number of Inlets: Two.
Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE"
Finish: Polished chrome plated.
Outlet Size: NPS 4
SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
Branch Outlet Fittings:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
GMR International Equipment Corporation.
Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
Wilson & Cousins Inc.
National Fittings, Inc.
Victaulic Company.
Standard: UL 213.
Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.
Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings.
Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets.
Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to
match connected branch piping.
Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.
Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:
1.
Page - 15
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test
valve.
Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
Branch Line Testers:
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc.
Potter Roemer.
Standard: UL 199.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig .
Body Material: Brass.
Inlet: Threaded.
Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.
Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.
Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
AGF Manufacturing Inc.
Victaulic Company.
AGF Manufacturing Inc.
Triple R Specialty.
Victaulic Company.
Viking Corporation.
Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.
Adjustable Drop Nipples:
Page - 16
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.11
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the
following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following]:
2.
Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig) minimum.
Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:
1.
2.
3.
D.
AFAC Inc.
Victaulic Company.
Viking Corporation.
1.
C.
Standard: UL 1474.
Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM-rubber O-ring seals.
Length: Adjustable.
SPRINKLERS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
CECA, LLC.
Corcoran Piping System Co.
Merit Manufacturing; a division of Anvil International, Inc.
Early-Suppression, Fast-Response Applications: UL 1767
Nonresidential Applications: UL 199
Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for
"Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by
application.
Open Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element Removed: UL 199.
1.
Characteristics:
a.
b.
Nominal 1/2-inch Orifice: With Discharge Coefficient K between 5.3 and 5.8.
Nominal 17/32-inch Orifice: With Discharge Coefficient K between 7.4 and 8.2.
Page - 17
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
E.
Sprinkler Finishes:
1.
2.
F.
Special Coatings:
1.
2.
G.
Wax.
Corrosion-resistant paint.
Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting
applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with
sprinklers.
1.
2.
H.
Chrome plated.
Painted.
Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat, Chrome-plated steel, two piece,
with 1-inch vertical adjustment.
Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.
Sprinkler Guards:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
2.12
Victaulic Company.
Viking Corporation.
Standard: UL 199.
Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
ALARM DEVICES
A.
Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
B.
Water-Motor-Operated Alarm:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
Victaulic Company.
Viking Corporation.
Standard: UL 753.
Type: Mechanically operated, with Pelton wheel.
Alarm Gong: Cast aluminum with red-enamel factory finish.
Page - 18
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
Size: 10-inch diameter.
Components: Shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction.
Inlet: NPS 3/4
Outlet: NPS 1 drain connection.
Electrically Operated Alarm Bell:
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Standard: UL 464.
Type: Vibrating, metal alarm bell.
Size: 6-inch minimum diameter.
Finish: Red-enamel factory finish, suitable for outdoor use.
Water-Flow Indicators:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell company.
Notifier; a Honeywell company.
Potter Electric Signal Company.
ADT Security Services, Inc.
McDonnell & Miller; ITT Industries.
System Sensor; a Honeywell company.
Viking Corporation.
Watts Industries (Canada) Inc.
Standard: UL 346.
Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.
Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and
auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, fieldadjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal
if removed.
Type: Paddle operated.
Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa).
Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.
Pressure Switches:
1.
a.
b.
AFAC Inc.
Barksdale, Inc.
Page - 19
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Standard: UL 346.
Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.
Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.
Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.
Valve Supervisory Switches:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Standard: UL 346.
Type: Electrically supervised.
Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
A.
Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell company.
Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches:
1.
2.13
Detroit Switch, Inc.
United Electric Controls Co.
Viking Corporation.
Standard: UL 346.
Type: Electrically supervised.
Design: Signals that controlled indicator-post valve is in other than fully open position.
MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS
Description: UL listed or FM approved, hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 pipe nipple,
and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION"
with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental
opening.
Page - 20
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.14
A.
CONTROL PANELS
Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned control panel as indicated,
including NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and solenoid-valve circuitry for
operation of deluge valves. Panels contain power supply; battery charger; standby batteries;
field-wiring terminal strip; electrically supervised solenoid valves and polarized fire-alarm bell;
lamp test facility; single-pole, double-throw auxiliary alarm contacts; and rectifier.
1.
2.
3.
2.15
A.
Panels: UL listed and FM approved when used with thermal detectors and Class A
detector circuit wiring. Electrical characteristics are 120-V ac, 60 Hz, with 24-V dc
rechargeable batteries.
Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled "MANUAL
CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable
strut to prevent accidental opening.
Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 pipe nipple, and
bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION"
with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental
opening.
PRESSURE GAGES
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
AMETEK; U.S. Gauge Division.
Ashcroft, Inc.
Brecco Corporation.
WIKA Instrument Corporation.
B.
Standard: UL 393.
C.
Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch diameter.
D.
Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig
E.
Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.
F.
Air System Piping Gage: Include "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system
design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
Page - 21
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
3.2
Report test results promptly and in writing.
SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING
A.
3.3
Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated
at connection to water-service piping. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and
drain at connection to water service.
WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTIONS
A.
Connect sprinkler piping to building's interior water-distribution piping.
requirements for interior piping in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."
B.
Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated
at connection to water-distribution piping. Comply with requirements for backflow preventers
in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
C.
Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water supply.
3.4
Comply with
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1.
Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating
from approved working plans.
B.
Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.
C.
Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint device
materials and installation in NFPA 13.
D.
Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in
pipe sizes.
E.
Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
F.
Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
G.
Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve,
and sized and located according to NFPA 13.
H.
Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
I.
Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when
sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
Page - 22
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
J.
Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection, to
drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to and
spill over floor drain or to outside building.
K.
Install alarm devices in piping systems.
L.
Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with
requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.
M.
Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each
standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft metal
seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit
removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.
N.
Fill sprinkler system piping with water.
O.
Install electric heating cables and pipe insulation on sprinkler piping in areas subject to freezing.
Comply with requirements for heating cables in Section 210533 "Heat Tracing for FireSuppression Piping" and for piping insulation in Section 210700 "Fire-Suppression Systems
Insulation."
P.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for sleeves specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping."
Q.
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for FireSuppression Piping."
R.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 210518 "Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression
Piping."
3.5
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings
that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for
aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
C.
Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
D.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
E.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
F.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water
service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
Page - 23
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
G.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
H.
Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain end of steel pipe into plain-end-pipe fitting. Rotate retainer
lugs one-quarter turn or tighten retainer pin.
I.
Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join light wall steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittings
with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.
J.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
1.
Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for
galvanized-steel pipe.
K.
Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to
AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe
and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.
L.
Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to
AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe
and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.
M.
Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join Schedule 5 steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittings
with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.
N.
Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"
"Brazed Joints" Chapter.
O.
Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of tube according to
AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join copper tube
and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.
P.
Copper-Tubing, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and copper pressure-seal fittings with
tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.
Q.
Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool
designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating
stop, and braze branch tube into collar.
R.
Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both
piping systems.
S.
Plastic-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
Page - 24
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
2.
3.6
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements. Apply primer.
CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
INSTALLATION OF COVER SYSTEM FOR SPRINKLER PIPING
A.
3.7
Install cover system, brackets, and cover components for sprinkler piping according to
manufacturer's "Installation Manual" and with NFPA 13 or NFPA 13R for supports.
VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A.
Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls,
and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water
supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs
indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
C.
Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of
check valves in potable-water-supply sources.
D.
Specialty Valves:
1.
2.
3.
3.8
General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main
supply to system.
Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line connection.
Deluge Valves: Install in vertical position, in proper direction of flow, and in main
supply to deluge system. Install trim sets for drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball
drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment.
SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A.
Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling
panels.
B.
Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or
sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.
C.
Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on ceiling
grid.
3.9
FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A.
Install wall-type, fire-department connections.
B.
Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection.
Page - 25
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.10
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 13.
B.
Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.11
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"
Chapter.
Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.
Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department equipment.
C.
Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.12
CLEANING
A.
Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B.
Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
3.13
PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
Piping between Fire-Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight
steel pipe with grooved ends; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved
joints.
B.
Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control valves, instead of specified
fittings.
C.
Copper-tube, extruded-tee connections may be used for tee branches in copper tubing instead of
specified copper fittings. Branch-connection joints must be brazed.
D.
Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following:
Page - 26
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
2.
E.
Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4.
1.
2.
F.
2.
A.
Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded
fittings; and threaded joints.
Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings
for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 5 and larger shall be one of the following:
1.
3.14
SPRINKLER SCHEDULE
Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers
Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent sprinklers
Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
Deluge-Sprinkler Systems: Upright and pendent, open sprinklers.
Special Applications: Extended-coverage, flow-control, and quick-response sprinklers
where indicated
Page - 27
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Sleeves.
2.
Stack-sleeve fittings.
3.
Sleeve-seal systems.
4.
Sleeve-seal fittings.
5.
Grout.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SLEEVES
A.
Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron
pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded
steel collar; zinc coated.
C.
Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves:
coated, with plain ends.
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc
D.
Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves:
welded longitudinal joint.
0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with
2.2
STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
B.
2.3
Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping
ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A.
1.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
2.
CALPICO, Inc.
3.
Metraflex Company (The).
4.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
5.
Proco Products, Inc.
B.
Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular
space between piping and sleeve.
1.
Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2.
Pressure Plates: Stainless steel.
3.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to
sealing elements.
2.4
SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A.
1.
Pre-sealed Systems.
B.
Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, water stop assembly made for imbedding in
concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber water stop collar with center opening to match
piping OD.
2.5
GROUT
A.
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
B.
Characteristics: Non-shrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B.
For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to
provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.
1.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C.
Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls
are constructed.
1.
Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP
sleeves.
2.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.
3.
Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal
system.
D.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.
1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
2.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
3.
Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants
specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
E.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements
for firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.2
STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.
1.
Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
2.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane
waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Division 07 Section
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
3.
Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor
level.
4.
Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if
ring is specified.
5.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.
B.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal
pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified
in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.3
SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service
piping entries into building.
B.
Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for
sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,
assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and
sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a
watertight seal.
3.4
SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B.
Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and
walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C.
Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
3.5
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
A.
Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
1.
Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:
a.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron wall sleeves, Galvanized-steel wall sleeves,
Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves or Sleeve-seal fittings.
b.
Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves, Galvanized-steel wall sleeves or
Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
2.
Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:
a.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system,
Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system, Galvanized-steel-pipe
sleeves with sleeve-seal system or Sleeve-seal fittings.
1)
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and
sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
b.
Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system,
Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system or Galvanized-steel-pipe
sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1)
3.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:
a.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system,
sleeves with sleeve-seal system or Sleeve-seal fittings.
1)
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
b.
4.
5.
Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system,
sleeves with sleeve-seal system or Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
1)
Concrete Slabs above Grade:
a.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves, Stack-sleeve fittings
or Sleeve-seal fittings.
b.
Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves or Stack-sleeve fittings.
Interior Partitions:
a.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
b.
Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Escutcheons.
2.
Floor plates.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.
B.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and
spring-clip fasteners.
C.
Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and with concealed hinge and
setscrew.
D.
Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed hinge, and spring-clip
fasteners.
2.2
FLOOR PLATES
A.
One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange.
B.
Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
B.
Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping
and with OD that completely covers opening.
1.
Escutcheons for New Piping:
a.
b.
c.
Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type
with concealed hinge.
d.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting
brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
e.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass
type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
2.
Escutcheons for Existing Piping:
a.
Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated
finish.
b.
Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.
c.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations: Split-casting brass type with polished,
chrome-plated finish.
d.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations: Split-casting brass type with polished,
chrome-plated finish.
C.
Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.
D.
Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD
that completely covers opening.
1.
New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.
2.
Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.
3.2
A.
Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Bimetallic-actuated thermometers.
2.
Filled-system thermometers.
3.
Liquid-in-glass thermometers.
4.
Thermowells.
5.
Dial-type pressure gages.
6.
Gage attachments.
7.
Test plugs.
8.
Test-plug kits.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 21 Section "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping" for fire-protection
water-service meters outside the building.
2.
Division 21 fire-suppression piping Sections for fire-protection pressure gages.
3.
Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for domestic water meters and
combined domestic and fire-protection water-service meters outside the building.
4.
Division 22 Section " Domestic Water Piping" for water meters inside the building.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
A.
1.5
Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
maintenance manuals.
For meters and gages to include in operation and
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS
A.
1.
Ashcroft Inc.
2.
Ernst Flow Industries.
3.
Marsh Bellofram.
4.
Miljoco Corporation.
5.
Nanmac Corporation.
6.
Noshok.
7.
Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.
8.
REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.
9.
Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.
10. Trerice, H. O. Co.
11. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
12. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
13. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.
14. Winters Instruments - U.S.
B.
Standard: ASME B40.200.
C.
Case: Sealed type(s); stainless steel with 3-inch nominal diameter.
D.
Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F.
E.
Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle, with unified-inch screw threads.
F.
Connector Size: 1/2 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
G.
Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch in diameter; stainless steel.
H.
Window: Plain glass or plastic.
I.
Ring: Stainless steel.
J.
Element: Bimetal coil.
K.
Pointer: Dark-colored metal.
L.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.
2.2
FILLED-SYSTEM THERMOMETERS
A.
Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Vapor-Actuated Thermometers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
the following:
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
2.3
a.
Ashcroft Inc.
b.
Marsh Bellofram.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Trerice, H. O. Co.
g.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
Case: Sealed type, cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter.
Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element.
Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in
deg F.
Window: Glass or plastic.
Ring: Metal.
Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in
horizontal plane, with locking device; with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
Thermal System: Liquid-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass stem and
of length to suit installation.
a.
Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.
LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A.
Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:
1.
the following:
a.
Flo Fab Inc.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Trerice, H. O. Co.
f.
g.
Winters Instruments - U.S.
2.
3.
Case: Cast aluminum; 7-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.
6.
Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings
graduated in deg F.
7.
8.
Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.
a.
Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.
9.
Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of
1.5 percent of scale range.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.4
THERMOWELLS
A.
Thermowells:
1.
2.
Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.
3.
Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI.
4.
Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES or CSA.
5.
Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.
6.
External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
7.
Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
8.
Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
9.
Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.
11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of
thermometer connection.
B.
Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.
2.5
PRESSURE GAGES
A.
Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:
1.
the following:
a.
AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.
b.
Ashcroft Inc.
c.
Ernst Flow Industries.
d.
Flo Fab Inc.
e.
Marsh Bellofram.
f.
g.
Noshok.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Trerice, H. O. Co.
l.
Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
m.
n.
WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.
o.
Winters Instruments - U.S.
2.
3.
Case: Liquid-filled type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter.
4.
Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and
bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.
6.
Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
7.
Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi.
8.
9.
10. Ring: Metal.
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
11.
2.6
Accuracy: Grade B, plus or minus 2 percent of middle half of scale range.
GAGE ATTACHMENTS
A.
Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and
piston or porous-metal-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated
piping.
B.
Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
2.7
TEST PLUGS
A.
1.
Flow Design, Inc.
2.
3.
National Meter, Inc.
4.
Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.
5.
Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc.
6.
Trerice, H. O. Co.
7.
8.
B.
Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.
C.
Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include
extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.
D.
Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.
E.
Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.
F.
Core Inserts: EPDM self-sealing rubber.
2.8
TEST-PLUG KITS
A.
1.
Flow Design, Inc.
2.
3.
National Meter, Inc.
4.
Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.
5.
Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc.
6.
Trerice, H. O. Co.
7.
8.
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
Furnish one test-plug kit(s) containing two thermometer(s), one pressure gage and adapter, and
carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be of
diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.
C.
High-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inchdiameter dial and
tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 220 deg F.
D.
Pressure Gage: Small, Bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inchdiameter dial and probe.
Dial range shall be at least 0 to 200 psig.
E.
Carrying Case: Metal or plastic, with formed instrument padding.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid and in vertical
position in piping tees.
B.
Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if
required to match sizes.
C.
Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.
D.
Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.
E.
Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
F.
Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the
most readable position.
G.
Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.
H.
Install test plugs in piping tees.
I.
Install thermometers in the following locations:
1.
Inlet and outlet of each water heater.
2.
Inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger.
3.
Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank.
4.
Inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller.
J.
Install pressure gages in the following locations:
1.
Building water service entrance into building.
2.
Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve.
3.
Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump.
Page - 6
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
3.3
Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance
of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.4
Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
THERMOMETER SCHEDULE
A.
Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be one of the following:
1.
Sealed, bimetallic-actuated type.
2.
Direct-mounted, metal-case, vapor-actuated type.
3.
Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.
B.
Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger shall be one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
at inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank shall be one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller shall be one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.
3.5
THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE
A.
Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.
B.
Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 30 to 240 deg F.
3.6
PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE
A.
Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be the following:
1.
Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case.
B.
Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each water pressure-reducing valve shall be the following:
Page - 7
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
C.
3.7
Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each domestic water pump shall be the following:
1.
2.
Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts.
PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE
A.
Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 100 psi.
B.
Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.
Page - 8
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Metal pipe hangers and supports.
2.
Trapeze pipe hangers.
3.
Metal framing systems.
4.
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
5.
Fastener systems.
6.
Pipe stands.
7.
Pipe positioning systems.
8.
Equipment supports.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze
hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
2.
Division 21 fire-suppression piping Sections for pipe hangers for fire-suppression piping.
3.
Division 22 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe guides
and anchors.
4.
Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
A.
Delegated Design:
Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall
withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.
1.5
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain
approval from authorities having jurisdiction.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and
installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for
components:
1.
Trapeze pipe hangers.
2.
Metal framing systems.
3.
Pipe stands.
4.
Equipment supports.
C.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.
2.
1.6
Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers.
Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.
A.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B.
Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
2.
Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
3.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
4.
Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to
support bearing surface of piping.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
5.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
B.
Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
2.
Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to
support bearing surface of piping.
3.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.
C.
Copper Pipe Hangers:
1.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated
components.
2.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel or
stainless steel.
2.2
TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A.
2.3
Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and Ubolts.
METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:
1.
the following:
a.
Allied Tube & Conduit.
b.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.
c.
Flex-Strut Inc.
d.
GS Metals Corp.
e.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
f.
Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.
g.
Wesanco, Inc.
2.
Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple
parallel pipes.
3.
Standard: MFMA-4.
4.
Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.
5.
Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel
slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.
6.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon or steel stainless
steel.
7.
Metallic Coating: Electroplated zinc, hot-dipped galvanized, mill galvanized, in-line, hot
galvanized, or mechanically-deposited zinc.
B.
Non-MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:
1.
offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.4
a.
Anvil International; a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products Inc.
b.
Empire Industries, Inc.
c.
ERICO International Corporation.
d.
Haydon Corporation; H-Strut Division.
e.
NIBCO INC.
f.
PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
g.
PHS Industries, Inc.
Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels,
accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes.
Standard: Comply with MFMA-4.
Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.
Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel
slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel or stainless
steel.
Coating: Zinc.
THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A.
1.
Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
2.
Clement Support Services.
3.
ERICO International Corporation.
4.
National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
5.
PHS Industries, Inc.
6.
Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
7.
Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
8.
Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.
9.
Value Engineered Products, Inc.
B.
Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig
minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1
polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.
C.
Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate with 100-psig, ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig, or
ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive
strength.
D.
For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
E.
For Clevis Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
F.
Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient
air temperature.
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.5
FASTENER SYSTEMS
A.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete
with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
B.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated or stainless- steel anchors, for
use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
2.6
PIPE STANDS
A.
General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of
manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.
B.
Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped
cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
C.
Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic or stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller,
for roof installation without membrane penetration.
D.
High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:
1.
Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for
roof installation without membrane penetration.
2.
Base: Plastic or Stainless steel.
3.
Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuousthread rods.
4.
Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainlesssteel, roller-type pipe support.
E.
High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:
1.
Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for
roof installation without membrane penetration.
2.
Bases: One or more; plastic.
3.
Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.
4.
Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel.
5.
Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.
F.
Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe supports made from
structural-steel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on permanent
stationary roof curb.
2.7
PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS
A.
Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for
positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.8
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
2.9
Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbonsteel shapes.
A.
Structural Steel:
galvanized.
ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
B.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1.
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building
structure.
B.
Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange
for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated
trapeze pipe hangers.
1.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe
hangers.
2.
Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C.
Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and
support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
D.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
E.
Fastener System Installation:
1.
Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use
operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2.
Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F.
Pipe Stand Installation:
1.
Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on
smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.
Page - 6
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and
mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories"
for curbs.
G.
Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste
piping connections to each plumbing fixture. See Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for
requirements for pipe positioning systems for plumbing fixtures.
H.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
I.
Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
J.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
K.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
L.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger
and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten
inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
M.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
N.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
O.
Insulated Piping:
1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services
piping.
2.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a.
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b.
NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c.
NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
Page - 7
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
5.
6.
3.2
d.
NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
e.
NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts
of length at least as long as protective shield.
Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
C.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.3
METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;
appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the
following:
1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2.
3.
4.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B.
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.5
PAINTING
A.
Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
Page - 8
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
3.6
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A.
Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and
equipment.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E.
Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing
systems and attachments for general service applications.
F.
Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant attachments for hostile
environment applications.
G.
Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and
tubing.
H.
Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
I.
Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
J.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2.
Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow offcenter closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
3.
Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of
noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
4.
Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
5.
U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
6.
Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steelpipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.
7.
Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with
steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and
with U-bolt to retain pipe.
8.
Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion
support and cast-iron floor flange.
Page - 9
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two
rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur.
Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small
horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to
NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition
to expansion and contraction.
K.
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to
NPS 24.
2.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4
to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
L.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
3.
Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4.
Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.
5.
Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
M.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1.
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2.
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3.
Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4.
Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7.
Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to
flange edge.
8.
Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9.
Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams for heavy loads.
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
Page - 10
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a.
Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b.
Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c.
Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
N.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1.
Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer
to prevent crushing insulation.
3.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
O.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
2.
Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed
1-1/4 inches.
3.
Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with
springs.
4.
Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5.
Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
6.
Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from
base support.
7.
Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from
trapeze support.
8.
Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress
from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include
auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These
supports include the following types:
a.
Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
b.
Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c.
Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.
P.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
Q.
Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
Page - 11
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
R.
Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building
attachments where required in concrete construction.
S.
Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and
waste piping for plumbing fixtures.
Page - 12
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:
1.
Domestic cold-water piping.
2.
Domestic hot-water piping.
3.
Domestic recirculating hot-water piping.
4.
Domestic chilled-water piping for drinking fountains.
5.
Sanitary waste piping exposed to freezing conditions.
6.
Storm-water piping exposed to freezing conditions.
7.
Roof drains and rainwater leaders.
8.
Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 22 Section "Plumbing Equipment Insulation."
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor
permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied, if any).
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2.
Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.
3.
Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4.
Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each
type of insulation.
5.
Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access
panels.
6.
Detail application of field-applied jackets.
7.
Detail application at linkages of control devices.
1.4
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include
dates of tests and test methods employed.
C.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and
cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less.
2.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
B.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1.
Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application.
Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for
installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for
maintenance.
C.
Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.7
SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
B.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation
Schedule," and "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," articles for where
insulating materials shall be applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
F.
Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply
with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
a.
Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel.
b.
Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c.
K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock, Insul-Tube, and K-FLEX LS.
G.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied jacket
requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1.
a.
CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap.
b.
Johns Manville; Microlite.
c.
Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap.
d.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
e.
Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.
H.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1.
a.
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
b.
Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
c.
Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.
d.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.
e.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
2.
Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ or with factory-
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied
Jackets" Article.
2.2
INSULATING CEMENTS
A.
Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
1.
a.
Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Super-Stik.
B.
Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.
1.
a.
Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Thermokote V.
C.
Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.
1.
a.
Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote.
2.3
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
1.
a.
Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal.
b.
Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive.
c.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 85-75.
d.
K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive.
C.
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1.
a.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP-127.
b.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
c.
Company; 85-60/85-70.
d.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
D.
ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for
bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1.
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
a.
b.
c.
d.
E.
2.4
Company; CP-82.
Company; 85-20.
PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
1.
a.
Dow Corning Corporation; 739, Dow Silicone.
b.
Johns Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.
c.
P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.
d.
Speedline Corporation; Polyco VP Adhesive.
MASTICS
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
B.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.
1.
a.
Company; 30-80/30-90.
b.
Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry
film thickness.
3.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
4.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
5.
Color: White.
2.5
LAGGING ADHESIVES
A.
Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1.
a.
Company; CP-50 AHV2.
b.
Company; 30-36.
c.
Vimasco Corporation; 713 and 714.
2.
Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fireresistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.
3.
Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.
4.
Color: White.
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.6
SEALANTS
A.
FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
a.
Company; CP-76.
b.
c.
Company; 95-44.
d.
2.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4.
5.
Color: Aluminum.
B.
ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
a.
Company; CP-76.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Color: White.
2.7
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
2.8
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When
factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1.
ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2.
ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
3.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
A.
Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10
strands/sq. in. for covering pipe and pipe fittings.
1.
a.
Company; Chil-Glas Number 10.
B.
Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10
strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for pipe.
Page - 6
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
2.9
a.
Company; Mast-A-Fab.
b.
Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.
FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS
A.
2.10
Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a
minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..
1.
a.
Alpha Associates, Inc.; Alpha-Maritex 84215 and 84217/9485RW, Luben 59.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.
Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
1.
a.
Johns Manville; Zeston.
b.
P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.
c.
Proto Corporation; LoSmoke.
d.
Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.
2.
Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
3.
Color: Color-code jackets based on system. Color as selected by Architect.
4.
Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.
a.
Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,
unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and
supply covers for lavatories.
C.
Metal Jacket:
1.
a.
Company; Metal Jacketing Systems.
b.
ITW Insulation Systems; Aluminum and Stainless Steel Jacketing.
c.
RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.
2.
Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005,
Temper H-14.
a.
Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
b.
Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene
and kraft paper.
c.
Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications:
3-mil- thick, heat-bonded
polyethylene and kraft paper.
Page - 7
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
d.
2.11
Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
1)
Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
2)
Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius
elbows.
3)
Tee covers.
4)
Flange and union covers.
5)
End caps.
6)
Beveled collars.
7)
Valve covers.
8)
Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not
available.
TAPES
A.
ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.
a.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.
b.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836.
c.
Compac Corporation; 104 and 105.
d.
Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
2.
Width: 3 inches.
3.
Thickness: 11.5 mils.
4.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5.
Elongation: 2 percent.
6.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
7.
ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B.
FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
1.
a.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK.
b.
c.
d.
Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.
2.
Width: 3 inches.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C.
PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive;
suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1.
a.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape.
Page - 8
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
2.12
b.
Compac Corporation; 130.
c.
Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.
Width: 2 inches.
Thickness: 6 mils.
Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
1.
a.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF.
b.
c.
d.
Venture Tape; 3520 CW.
2.
Width: 2 inches.
3.
4.
5.
6.
SECUREMENTS
A.
Bands:
1.
a.
ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.
b.
RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping and Seals.
2.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015
inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal.
3.
Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch
thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal.
B.
Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.
C.
Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.
1.
the following:
a.
C & F Wire.
2.13
A.
PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS
Protective Shielding Pipe Covers,:
1.
the following:
a.
Engineered Brass Company.
Page - 9
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
b.
Insul-Tect Products Co.; a subsidiary of MVG Molded Products.
c.
McGuire Manufacturing.
d.
Plumberex.
e.
Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation.
f.
Zurn Industries, LLC; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.
Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and coldwater supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA) requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1.
Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.
2.
Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B.
Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing.
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C.
Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3
Comply with
A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
Page - 10
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3.
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
4.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
L.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2.
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
3.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
a.
For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4.
Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
P.
For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1.
Vibration-control devices.
Page - 11
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.
4.
3.4
Testing agency labels and stamps.
Nameplates and data plates.
Cleanouts.
PENETRATIONS
A.
Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof
penetrations.
1.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,
install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal
joint with joint sealant.
3.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of
roof flashing.
4.
Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B.
Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush
with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations:
Install insulation
continuously through wall penetrations.
1.
2.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface
3.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at
least 2 inches.
4.
Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1.
Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for
firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
F.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1.
Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
2.
Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.
Comply with requirements in
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.5
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
Page - 12
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1.
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from
same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
4.
Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5.
Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
6.
Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7.
Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for
above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8.
For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and
unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation
facing using PVC tape.
9.
Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match
size and color of pipe labels.
C.
Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape
insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating
cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D.
Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1.
Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
Page - 13
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.6
When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainlesssteel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide
the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied
in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
A.
Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as
pipe insulation.
4.
Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
C.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2.
Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
D.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
2.
When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4.
Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.
Page - 14
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.7
INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1.
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4.
Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least
1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2.
When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.
D.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2.
When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to
valve body.
3.
Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
4.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.8
FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A.
Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory-applied jackets.
1.
Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.
2.
Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive.
3.
Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.
B.
Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1.
Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2.
Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
Page - 15
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.
4.
5.
Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at
end joints.
Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation
with vapor-barrier mastic.
C.
Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1.
Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the
finish bead along seam and joint edge.
D.
Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof
sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12
inches o.c. and at end joints.
3.9
FINISHES
A.
Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint
system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
B.
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C.
Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
D.
Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.10
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1.
Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
2.
Underground piping.
3.
Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.11
A.
INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
Domestic Cold Water:
1.
NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:
a.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick.
2.
NPS 1-1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:
a.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
Page - 16
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:
1.
NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:
a.
2.
NPS 1-1/2 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:
a.
C.
Domestic Chilled Water (Potable):
1.
All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a.
D.
Stormwater and Overflow:
1.
a.
E.
Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies:
1.
a.
F.
Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing
Fixtures for People with Disabilities:
1.
a.
Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch thick.
b.
G.
Sanitary Waste Piping Where Heat Tracing Is Installed:
1.
a.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1-1/2 inches thick.
H.
Floor Drains, Traps, and Sanitary Drain Piping within 10 Feet of Drain Receiving Condensate
and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F:
1.
a.
3.12
OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
Domestic Water Piping:
1.
All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a.
Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.
b.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches thick.
B.
Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:
1.
a.
Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.
b.
C.
Sanitary Waste Piping Where Heat Tracing Is Installed:
1.
a.
Page - 17
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.13
INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A.
Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the
field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B.
If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
3.14
OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A.
Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the
field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B.
If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C.
Piping, Concealed or Exposed:
1.
Aluminum, Smooth: 0.024 inch thick.
Page - 18
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and
specialties inside the building.
2.
Encasement for piping.
3.
Flexible connectors.
A.
1.4
Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand
effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: For the following products:
1.
Specialty valves.
2.
Transition fittings.
3.
Dielectric fittings.
4.
5.
Backflow preventers and vacuum breakers.
6.
Water penetration systems.
A.
Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.
B.
Coordination Drawings: For piping in equipment rooms and other congested areas, drawn to
scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input
from Installers of the items involved:
1.
Domestic water piping.
2.
Compressed air piping.
C.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B.
Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging
to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:
1.
Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of water
service.
2.
Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Owner's written permission.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.2
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting
materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
A.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.
1.
Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.
2.
Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.
3.
Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
4.
Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-andsocket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
5.
Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:
a.
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1)
Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division.
2)
NIBCO INC.
3)
Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems.
b.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in
each end.
c.
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber
O-ring seal in each end.
B.
Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, annealed temper.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
2.3
Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.
DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
2.4
Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot
end.
1.
Standard-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron.
2.
Compact-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings: AWWA C153, ductile iron.
a.
Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber
gaskets, and steel bolts.
GALVANIZED-STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
2.5
Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Standard Weight. Include ends
matching joining method.
1.
Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples:
ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or
ASTM A 106/A 106M, Standard Weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.
2.
Galvanized, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.
3.
Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, hexagonal-stock body with ball-andsocket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface, and female threaded ends.
4.
Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125, cast iron.
PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:
AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type
B.
Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
D.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for generalduty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
2.6
ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING
A.
Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
B.
Form: Sheet or Tube.
C.
Material: LLDPE film of 0.008-inch minimum thickness or high-density, cross-laminated PE
film of 0.004-inch minimum thickness.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.7
TRANSITION FITTINGS
A.
1.
Same size as pipes to be joined.
2.
Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.
3.
End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B.
Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system
fitting.
C.
Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.
1.
the following:
a.
Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing.
b.
Dresser, Inc.; Dresser Piping Specialties.
c.
Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).
d.
JCM Industries.
e.
Romac Industries, Inc.
f.
Smith-Blair, Inc; a Sensus company.
g.
Viking Johnson; c/o Mueller Co.
2.8
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B.
Dielectric Unions:
1.
the following:
a.
Capitol Manufacturing Company.
b.
Hart Industries International, Inc.
c.
Jomar International Ltd.
d.
Matco-Norca, Inc.
e.
McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
f.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
g.
Wilkins; a Zurn company.
2.
Description:
a.
Standard: ASSE 1079.
b.
c.
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
C.
Dielectric Flanges:
1.
the following:
a.
b.
Central Plastics Company.
c.
Matco-Norca, Inc.
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
d.
e.
Description:
a.
b.
Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
c.
d.
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solderjoint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
D.
Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
1.
the following:
a.
b.
Calpico, Inc.
c.
d.
2.
Description:
a.
Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.
b.
c.
Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
d.
Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
e.
Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
E.
Dielectric Nipples:
1.
the following:
a.
Elster Perfection.
b.
Grinnell Mechanical Products.
c.
Matco-Norca, Inc.
d.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
e.
Victaulic Company.
2.
Description:
a.
Standard: IAPMO PS 66
b.
Electroplated steel nipple. complying with ASTM F 1545.
c.
Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.
d.
End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
e.
Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
2.9
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
1.
Flex-Hose Co., Inc.
2.
Flexicraft Industries.
3.
Flex Pression, Ltd.
4.
Flex-Weld, Inc.
5.
Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
6.
Mercer Rubber Co.
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Metraflex, Inc.
Tozen Corporation.
Unaflex, Inc.
Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan company
B.
Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering
and ends brazed to inner tubing.
1.
Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig.
2.
End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper tube.
3.
End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.
C.
Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel
wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.
1.
Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig.
2.
End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.
3.
End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EARTHWORK
A.
3.2
Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching,
and backfilling.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic
water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to
layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B.
Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C.
Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600
and AWWA M41.
D.
Install underground ductile-iron pipe in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or
AWWA C105.
E.
Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,
inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in
Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and
Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.
F.
Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
Page - 6
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
G.
Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with
requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for pressure-reducing
valves.
H.
Install domestic water piping level and plumb.
I.
Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint
devices.
J.
Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
K.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
L.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and
coordinate with other services occupying that space.
M.
Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
N.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
O.
Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher
than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
P.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
Q.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
R.
Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and
specialty.
S.
Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing pump and packaged
booster pump. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for
Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages.
T.
Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22
Section "Domestic Water Pumps" for thermostats.
U.
Install thermometers on outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements in
Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.
V.
for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
W.
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Plumbing Piping."
Page - 7
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
X.
3.3
requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing
Piping."
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
C.
1.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2.
damaged.
D.
Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"
"Brazed Joints" Chapter.
E.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and
fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
F.
Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by
fitting manufacturer.
G.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and
thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to
ASME B31.9.
H.
Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both
piping systems.
3.4
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves
for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.
B.
Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or
equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures
that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use
butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
C.
Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping,
and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section
"Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
1.
Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2.
Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.
Page - 8
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
D.
3.5
Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side
of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop
flow. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties"
for calibrated balancing valves.
TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.
B.
Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:
1.
NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.
2.
NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.
C.
Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-tometal transition fittings or unions.
3.6
DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.
C.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges or flange kits.
D.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.
3.7
FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION
A.
Install flexible connectors in suction and discharge piping connections to each domestic water
pump and in suction and discharge manifold connections to each domestic water booster pump.
B.
Install bronze-hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing.
C.
Install stainless-steel-hose flexible connectors in steel domestic water piping.
3.8
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.
B.
Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.
1.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.
2.
Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a.
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b.
Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c.
Longer Than 100 Feet If Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
Page - 9
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.
4.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D.
Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
E.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1.
NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2.
NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
3.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
4.
NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
5.
NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
6.
NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.
7.
F.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
G.
Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1.
NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2.
3.
4.
NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
5.
NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
6.
NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod.
7.
8.
NPS 8 to NPS 12: 12 feet with 7/8-inch rod.
H.
Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.
I.
Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's
3.9
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
D.
Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect
to the following:
1.
Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping.
2.
Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
Page - 10
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.
4.
3.10
Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing
fixture Sections for connection sizes.
Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use
flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification
for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.
B.
Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.
3.11
A.
B.
Piping Inspections:
1.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having
jurisdiction:
a.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b.
Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or
inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C.
Piping Tests:
1.
Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound
and that piping is full of water.
2.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3.
Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
4.
Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
5.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6.
Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
Page - 11
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
D.
Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E.
3.12
A.
3.13
ADJUSTING
Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1.
Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2.
Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3.
Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4.
Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.
a.
Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping
to provide flow of hot water in each branch.
b.
Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
5.
Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during
installation.
6.
Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
7.
Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and are clean and ready for use.
8.
Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
CLEANING
A.
Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1.
Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2.
Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if
methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a.
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b.
Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1)
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2)
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200
ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c.
Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
d.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
B.
Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:
1.
Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2.
Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are
not prescribed, follow procedures described below:
a.
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
Page - 12
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
b.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
C.
Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
D.
Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.14
PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Under-building-slab, domestic water, building service piping, NPS 3 and smaller, shall be the
following:
1.
Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; and brazed
joints.
D.
Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 4 to NPS 8 and larger, shall
be the following:
1.
Mechanical-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard- or compact- pattern mechanical-joint
fittings; and mechanical joints.
E.
Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:
1.
Hard or soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; and
brazed joints.
F.
Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:
1.
Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought- copper solder-joint fittings;
and soldered joints.
2.
Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressuresealed joints.
G.
Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following:
1.
Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought- copper solder-joint fittings;
and soldered joints.
2.
Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressuresealed joints.
3.
Galvanized-steel pipe and nipples; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded
joints.
H.
Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 5 to NPS 8, shall be the following:
1.
Galvanized-steel pipe and nipples; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded
joints.
Page - 13
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.15
VALVE SCHEDULE
A.
Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1.
Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball,
or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
2.
Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or
ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3.
Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.
4.
Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
B.
Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.
Page - 14
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:
1.
Vacuum breakers.
2.
Backflow preventers.
3.
Water pressure-reducing valves.
4.
Balancing valves.
5.
Temperature-actuated water mixing valves.
6.
Strainers.
7.
Outlet boxes.
8.
Hose stations.
9.
Hose bibbs.
10. Wall hydrants.
11. Ground hydrants.
12. Post hydrants.
13. Drain valves.
14. Water hammer arresters.
15. Air vents.
16. Trap-seal primer valves.
17. Trap-seal primer systems.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers, pressure
gages, and flow meters in domestic water piping.
2.
Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters.
3.
Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Filtration Equipment" for water filters in domestic
water piping.
4.
Division 22 Section "Healthcare Plumbing Fixtures" for thermostatic mixing valves for
sitz baths, thermostatic mixing-valve assemblies for hydrotherapy equipment, and outlet
boxes for dialysis equipment.
5.
Division 22 Section "Emergency Plumbing Fixtures" for water tempering equipment.
6.
Division 22 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers" for water filters for water
coolers.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.3
A.
1.4
Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise
indicated.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
1.5
A.
1.6
Field quality-control test reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
NSF Compliance:
1.
Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic
domestic water piping components.
2.
Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VACUUM BREAKERS
A.
Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
the following:
a.
Ames Co.
b.
Cash Acme.
c.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
d.
FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
e.
Rain Bird Corporation.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
f.
Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div.
g.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
h.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.
Body: Bronze.
Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.
Finish: Rough bronze or Chrome plated.
B.
Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:
1.
the following:
a.
Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc.
b.
Cash Acme.
c.
d.
Legend Valve.
e.
MIFAB, Inc.
f.
Prier Products, Inc.
g.
h.
Woodford Manufacturing Company.
i.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
j.
2.
3.
Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.
4.
Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.
5.
Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.
C.
Pressure Vacuum Breakers:
1.
the following:
a.
Ames Co.
b.
c.
d.
Flomatic Corporation.
e.
Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div.
f.
g.
2.
3.
Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
4.
Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
5.
Accessories:
a.
Valves: Ball type, on inlet and outlet.
D.
Laboratory-Faucet Vacuum Breakers:
1.
the following:
a.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
2.2
b.
c.
d.
Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 3/8 matching faucet size.
Body: Bronze.
Finish: Chrome plated.
Spill-Resistant Vacuum Breakers:
1.
the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
Accessories:
a.
Valves: Ball type, on inlet and outlet.
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A.
Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers:
1.
the following:
a.
Cash Acme.
b.
c.
d.
Honeywell Water Controls.
e.
Legend Valve.
f.
g.
2.
3.
4.
Body: Bronze.
5.
End Connections: Union, solder joint.
6.
Finish: Chrome plated or Rough bronze.
B.
Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:
1.
the following:
a.
Ames Co.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with
AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or steel with interior lining complying with
AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
Accessories:
a.
Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet ofNPS 2 and smaller;
outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 21/2 and larger.
b.
Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.
C.
Double-Check Backflow-Prevention Assemblies:
1.
the following:
a.
Ames Co.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
Operation: Continuous-pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated.
4.
5.
AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or steel with interior lining complying with
AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
6.
7.
Accessories:
a.
Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet ofNPS 2 and smaller;
outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 21/2 and larger.
D.
Beverage-Dispensing-Equipment Backflow Preventers:
1.
the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 3/8.
5.
Body: Stainless steel.
6.
E.
Dual-Check-Valve Backflow Preventers:
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
2.
3.
4.
the following:
a.
Cash Acme.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).
f.
g.
Legend Valve.
h.
i.
Mueller Co.; Water Products Div.
j.
k.
Body: Bronze with union inlet.
F.
Carbonated-Beverage-Dispenser, Dual-Check-Valve Backflow Preventers:
1.
the following:
a.
Cash Acme.
b.
Lancer Corporation.
c.
2.
3.
4.
Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 3/8.
5.
6.
G.
Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers:
1.
the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
Operation: Up to 10-foot head of water back pressure.
4.
Inlet Size: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4.
5.
Outlet Size: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
6.
Capacity: At least 3-gpm flow.
H.
Backflow-Preventer Test Kits:
1.
the following:
a.
b.
Page - 6
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
2.3
c.
d.
e.
Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with testprocedure instructions.
WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
A.
Water Regulators:
1.
the following:
a.
Cash Acme.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig.
4.
Body: Bronze with chrome-plated finish for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior
lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3.
5.
Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass.
6.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3.
B.
Water Control Valves:
1.
the following:
a.
CLA-VAL Automatic Control Valves.
b.
c.
OCV Control Valves.
d.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Ames Fluid Control Systems.
e.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Watts ACV.
f.
2.
Description: Pilot-operation, diaphragm-type, single-seated main water control valve.
3.
Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig minimum with AWWA C550 or
FDA-approved, interior epoxy coating. Include small pilot-control valve, restrictor
device, specialty fittings, and sensor piping.
4.
Main Valve Body: Cast- or ductile-iron body with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved,
interior epoxy coating; or stainless-steel body.
a.
Pattern: Angle or globe-valve design.
b.
Trim: Stainless steel.
5.
2.4
BALANCING VALVES
A.
Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves:
Page - 7
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
the following:
a.
Armstrong International, Inc.
b.
Flo Fab Inc.
c.
ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett Div.
d.
NIBCO INC.
e.
TAC Americas.
f.
Taco, Inc.
g.
Type: Ball or Y-pattern globe valve with two readout ports and memory setting
indicator.
Body: Brass or bronze,
Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2.
Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.
B.
Cast-Iron Calibrated Balancing Valves:
1.
the following:
a.
b.
Flo Fab Inc.
c.
ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett Div.
d.
NIBCO INC.
e.
TAC Americas.
f.
2.
Type: Adjustable with Y-pattern globe valve, two readout ports, and memory-setting
indicator.
3.
Size: Same as connected piping, but not smaller than NPS 2-1/2.
C.
Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.
D.
Memory-Stop Balancing Valves:
1.
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
e.
Hammond Valve.
f.
g.
NIBCO INC.
h.
Red-White Valve Corp.
2.
Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves.
3.
Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.
4.
Size: NPS 2 or smaller.
5.
Body: Copper alloy.
6.
Port: Standard or full port.
7.
Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
Page - 8
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
8.
9.
10.
2.5
Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
End Connections: Solder joint or threaded.
Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device.
TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED WATER MIXING VALVES
A.
Water-Temperature Limiting Devices:
1.
the following:
a.
b.
Cash Acme.
c.
d.
e.
Legend Valve.
f.
Leonard Valve Company.
g.
Powers; a Watts Industries Co.
h.
Symmons Industries, Inc.
i.
Taco, Inc.
j.
k.
2.
3.
4.
Type: Thermostatically controlled water mixing valve.
5.
Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.
6.
Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet.
7.
Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, temperaturecontrol handle.
8.
Valve Finish: Chrome plated or Rough bronze.
B.
Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves:
1.
the following:
a.
b.
Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
Type: Thermostatically controlled water mixing valve.
5.
Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.
6.
Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet.
7.
Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies,
and adjustable, temperature-control handle.
8.
Valve Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
9.
Valve Finish: Chrome plated or rough bronze.
10. Piping Finish: Chrome plated or copper.
Page - 9
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
C.
Manifold, Thermostatic, Water-Mixing-Valve Assemblies:
1.
the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Description: Factory-fabricated, exposed-mounting, thermostatically controlled, watermixing-valve assembly in parallel arrangement.
3.
Thermostatic water mixing valve and downstream pressure regulator with pressure gages
on inlet and outlet.
4.
Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Comply with ASSE 1017. Include check stops on hot- and
cold-water inlets and shutoff valve on outlet.
5.
Water Regulator(s): Comply with ASSE 1003. Include pressure gage on inlet and outlet.
6.
Component Pressure Ratings: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
7.
Thermostatic Mixing Valve and Water Regulator Finish: Chrome plated or rough
bronze.
8.
Piping Finish: Chrome plated or copper.
D.
Photographic-Process, Thermostatic, Water-Mixing-Valve Assemblies:
1.
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Standard: ASSE 1017, thermostatically controlled water mixing valve made for precise,
process-water temperature control.
3.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Body: Bronze with corrosion-resistant interior components.
5.
Connections: Threaded inlets and outlet.
6.
Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies,
thermometer, shutoff valve, and adjustable, temperature-control handle.
7.
Cabinet: Factory-fabricated, stainless steel, for surface mounting; with controls and
thermometer mounted on front.
E.
Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves:
1.
the following:
a.
Cash Acme.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled water tempering valve.
Page - 10
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F.
2.6
Body: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.
Temperature Control: Adjustable.
Inlets and Outlet: Threaded.
Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze.
Primary Water Tempering Valves:
1.
the following:
a.
Heat-Timer Corporation.
b.
Holby Valve Co., Inc.
2.
Standard: ASSE 1017, thermostatically controlled tempering valve, listed as tempering
valve.
3.
4.
Body: Bronze.
5.
Temperature Control: Manual.
6.
Inlets and Outlet: Threaded.
7.
Valve Finish: Rough bronze.
STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A.
2.7
Y-Pattern Strainers:
1.
2.
AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller;flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
4.
Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Perforation Size:
a.
StrainersNPS 2 and Smaller: 0.033 inch.
b.
Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.062 inch.
c.
Strainers NPS 5 and Larger: 0.125 inch.
6.
Drain: Pipe plug.
OUTLET BOXES
A.
Clothes Washer Outlet Boxes:
1.
the following:
a.
Acorn Engineering Company.
b.
Guy Gray Manufacturing Co., Inc.
c.
IPS Corporation.
d.
LSP Products Group, Inc.
e.
Oatey.
f.
Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies.
g.
h.
Page - 11
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
2.8
i.
Whitehall Manufacturing; a div. of Acorn Engineering Company.
j.
Mounting: Recessed.
Material and Finish: Enameled-steel or epoxy-painted-steel or stainless-steel box and
faceplate.
Faucet: Combination, valved fitting or separate hot- and cold-water, valved fittings
complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7 on outlets.
Supply Shutoff Fittings: NPS 1/2 gate, globe, or ball valves and NPS 1/2 copper, water
tubing.
Drain: NPS 2 standpipe and P-trap for direct waste connection to drainage piping.
Icemaker Outlet Boxes:
1.
the following:
a.
b.
IPS Corporation.
c.
LSP Products Group, Inc.
d.
Oatey.
e.
Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies.
2.
Mounting: Recessed.
3.
Material and Finish: Enameled-steel or epoxy-painted-steel or stainless-steel box and
faceplate.
4.
Faucet: Valved fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include NPS 1/2 or smaller
copper tube outlet.
5.
Supply Shutoff Fitting: NPS 1/2 gate, globe, or ball valve and NPS 1/2 copper, water
tubing.
HOSE STATIONS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
1.
ARCHON Industries, Inc.
2.
3.
Cooney Brothers, Inc.
4.
DynaFluid Ltd.
5.
6.
Strahman Valves, Inc.
7.
T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.
B.
Single-Temperature-Water Hose Stations:
1.
Standard: ASME A112.18.1.
2.
Cabinet: Stainless-steel enclosure with exposed valve handle, hose connection, and hose
rack. Include thermometer in front.
3.
Hose-Rack Material: Stainless steel.
4.
5.
Body Finish: Rough bronze, chrome plated.
6.
Mounting: Wall, with reinforcement.
Page - 12
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
7.
8.
9.
10.
Supply Fitting: NPS 3/4 gate, globe, or ball valve and check valve and NPS 3/4 copper,
water tubing. Omit check valve if check stop is included with fitting.
Hose: Manufacturer's standard, for service fluid, temperature, and pressure; 25 feet long.
Nozzle: With hand squeeze on-off control.
Vacuum Breaker: Integral or factory-installed, non-removable, manual-drain-type, hoseconnection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011 or backflow preventer
complying with ASSE 1052; and garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 on
outlet.
C.
Hot- and Cold-Water Hose Stations:
1.
2.
Type Faucet: Thermostatic mixing valve.
3.
Cabinet: Stainless-steel enclosure with exposed valve handles, hose connection, and hose
4.
5.
6.
Body Finish: Rough bronze or chrome plate.
7.
8.
Supply Fittings: Two NPS 3/4 gate, globe, or ball valves and check valves and NPS 3/4
copper, water tubing. Omit check valves if check stops are included with fitting.
9.
10. Nozzle: With hand squeeze on-off control.
11. Vacuum Breaker: Integral or factory-installed, nonremovable, manual-drain-type, hoseconnection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011 or backflow preventer
outlet.
D.
Cold-Water and Steam Hose Stations:
1.
2.
Type Faucet: Thermostatic mixing valve.
3.
Cabinet: Stainless-steel enclosure with exposed valve handles, hose connection, and hose
4.
5.
6.
Body Finish: Rough bronze or chrome plate.
7.
8.
Supply Fittings: Two NPS 3/4 gate, globe, or ball valves and check valves and NPS 3/4
copper, water tubing. Omit check valves if check stops are included with fitting.
9.
10. Nozzle: With hand squeeze on-off control.
11. Vacuum Breaker: Integral or factory-installed, nonremovable, manual-drain-type, hoseconnection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011 or backflow preventer
outlet.
2.9
HOSE BIBBS
A.
Hose Bibbs:
1.
Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.
Page - 13
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
2.10
Seat: Bronze, replaceable.
Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet.
Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
Vacuum Breaker: Integral nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker
complying with ASSE 1011.
Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.
Finish for Service Areas: Chrome or nickel plated.
Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.
Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.
Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle.
Operation for Finished Rooms: Wheel handle.
Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.
WALL HYDRANTS
A.
Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants:
1.
the following:
a.
Josam Company.
b.
MIFAB, Inc.
c.
d.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
e.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
f.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
g.
h.
i.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.
Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.
3.
4.
Operation: Loose key.
5.
Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall
clamp.
6.
Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1.
7.
Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7.
8.
Box: Deep, flush mounting with cover.
9.
Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze.
B.
Nonfreeze, Hot- and Cold-Water Wall Hydrants:
1.
the following:
a.
Josam Company.
b.
c.
d.
Page - 14
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
C.
2.11
A.
e.
f.
g.
Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.
Casings and Operating Rods: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall
clamps.
Inlets: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1.
Outlet: Concealed.
Box: Deep, flush mounting with cover.
Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze.
Vacuum Breaker: Nonremovable, manual-drain-type, hose-connection vacuum breaker
complying with ASSE 1011 and with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7
on outlet.
Operating Keys(s): One with each wall hydrant.
Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants:
1.
the following:
a.
Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc.
b.
Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC.
c.
d.
e.
Smith, Jay. R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Standard: ASSE 1019, Type A or Type B.
3.
Type: Freeze-resistant, automatic draining with integral air-inlet valve.
4.
Classification: Type B, for automatic draining with hose removed or with hose attached
and nozzle closed.
5.
6.
7.
Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall
clamp.
8.
Inlet: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4.
9.
Outlet: Exposed with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
GROUND HYDRANTS
Nonfreeze Ground Hydrants:
1.
the following:
a.
Josam Company.
b.
MIFAB, Inc.
c.
Murdock, Inc.
Page - 15
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
2.12
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Standard: ASME A112.21.3M.
Type: Nonfreeze, concealed-outlet ground hydrant with box.
Casing and Operating Rod: Of at least length required for burial of valve below frost
line.
Inlet: NPS 3/4.
Outlet: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
Drain: Designed with hole to drain into ground when shut off.
Box: Standard pattern with cover.
Box and Cover Finish: Rough bronze.
Operating Key(s): One with each ground hydrant.
Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1011.
DRAIN VALVES
A.
Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:
1.
Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.
2.
Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.
3.
Size: NPS 3/4.
4.
Body: Copper alloy.
5.
Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
6.
Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
7.
Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.
8.
Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
9.
Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7
and cap with brass chain.
B.
Gate-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:
1.
Standard: MSS SP-80 for gate valves.
2.
Pressure Rating: Class 125.
3.
Size: NPS 3/4.
4.
Body: ASTM B 62 bronze.
5.
Inlet: NPS 3/4 threaded or solder joint.
6.
Outlet: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.
C.
Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves:
1.
Standard: MSS SP-110 for ball valves or MSS SP-80 for gate valves.
2.
Pressure Rating: 200-psig minimum CWP or Class 125.
3.
Size: NPS 3/4.
4.
Body: Copper alloy or ASTM B 62 bronze.
5.
Drain: NPS 1/8 side outlet with cap.
Page - 16
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.13
A.
WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
Water Hammer Arresters:
1.
the following:
2.
3.
4.
2.14
A.
2.15
A.
a.
AMTROL, Inc.
b.
Josam Company.
c.
MIFAB, Inc.
d.
PPP Inc.
e.
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.
Type: Copper tube with piston.
Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.
AIR VENTS
Welded-Construction Automatic Air Vents:
1.
2.
Pressure Rating: 150-psig minimum pressure rating.
3.
Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.
4.
Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.
5.
Size: NPS 3/8 minimum inlet.
6.
Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.
TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES
Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:
1.
the following:
a.
MIFAB, Inc.
b.
PPP Inc.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
Body: Bronze.
5.
Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.
6.
Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.
7.
Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not
chrome finished.
Page - 17
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
2.16
A.
Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:
1.
the following:
a.
2.
Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8 minimum, trap makeup connection.
3.
Size: NPS 1-1/4 minimum.
4.
Material: Chrome-plated, cast brass.
TRAP-SEAL PRIMER SYSTEMS
Trap-Seal Primer Systems:
1.
the following:
a.
PPP Inc.
2.
Standard: ASSE 1044,
3.
Piping: NPS 3/4, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper, water tubing.
4.
Cabinet: Recessed-mounting steel box with stainless-steel cover.
5.
Electric Controls: 24-hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for 120-V ac power.
6.
Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001.
7.
Number Outlets: Eight maximum.
8.
Size Outlets: NPS 1/2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B.
Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to
other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with
1.
Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
2.
Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap
fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe
diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or
under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.
3.
Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
C.
Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and
outlet.
D.
Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.
E.
Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets
and with shutoff valve on outlet.
Page - 18
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
2.
Install thermometers and water regulators if specified.
Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.
F.
Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each water pressure-reducing valve,
solenoid valve, and pump.
G.
Install outlet boxes recessed in wall. Install 2-by-4-inch fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking
wall reinforcement between studs. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in
Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."
H.
Install hose stations with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with thermometer on outlet.
1.
2.
Install shutoff valve on outlet if specified.
Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified. Install 2by-4-inch fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking wall reinforcement between studs. Fireretardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."
I.
Install ground hydrants with 1 cu. yd. of crushed gravel around drain hole. Set ground hydrants
with box flush with grade.
J.
Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.
K.
Install air vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge onto floor
drain.
L.
Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a
minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for
proper flow.
M.
Install drainage-type, trap-seal primer valves as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched down
toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.
N.
Install trap-seal primer systems with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of
1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust system for proper flow.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping and specialties.
B.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
C.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
Page - 19
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.3
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A.
Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or
sign on or near each of the following:
1.
Pressure vacuum breakers.
2.
Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers.
3.
Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers.
4.
Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies.
5.
Carbonated-beverage-machine backflow preventers.
6.
Dual-check-valve backflow preventers.
7.
Reduced-pressure-detector, fire-protection backflow-preventer assemblies.
8.
Double-check, detector-assembly backflow preventers.
9.
Water pressure-reducing valves.
10. Calibrated balancing valves.
11. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves.
12. Manifold, thermostatic, water-mixing-valve assemblies.
13. Photographic-process, thermostatic, water-mixing-valve assemblies.
14. Primary water tempering valves.
15. Outlet boxes.
16. Hose stations.
17. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.
18. Trap-seal primer systems.
B.
Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to
identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.4
A.
Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:
1.
Test each pressure vacuum breaker, reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer, and
double-check backflow-prevention assembly, according to authorities having jurisdiction
and the device's reference standard.
B.
Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified
above.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.
B.
Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.
C.
Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.
Page - 20
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Pipe, tube, and fittings.
2.
Specialty pipe fittings.
3.
Encasement for underground metal piping.
A.
Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working
pressure unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
2.
Waste, Force-Main Piping: 100 psig.
B.
Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand
the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: For sovent drainage system. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.
1.5
A.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and components,
from manufacturer.
1.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2.
Detailed description of piping anchorage devices on which the certification is based and
their installation requirements.
B.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B.
Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for
plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent
piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied
by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:
1.
Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary
waste service.
2.
Do not proceed with interruption of sanitary waste service without Owner's written
permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.2
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting
materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class(es).
B.
Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
C.
Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.
2.3
HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
B.
CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:
1.
the following:
a.
ANACO-Husky.
b.
Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.
c.
Fernco Inc.
d.
Matco-Norca, Inc.
e.
MIFAB, Inc.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.
2.4
f.
Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
g.
Stant.
h.
Tyler Pipe.
Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.
Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening
devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
GALVANIZED-STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Standard Weight class.
B.
Galvanized-Cast-Iron Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.12, threaded.
C.
Steel Pipe Pressure Fittings:
1.
Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples:
ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or
ASTM A 106/A 106M, Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining
method.
2.
Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Class 150; hexagonal-stock body with ball-andsocket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface; and female threaded ends.
3.
Galvanized-Gray-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.
D.
Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.
1.
Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos-free, 1/8inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
2.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
2.5
DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Ductile-Iron, Mechanical-Joint Piping:
1.
Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot
end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
2.
Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10, mechanical-joint, ductile- or gray-iron
standard pattern or AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile-iron compact pattern.
3.
Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber
gaskets, and steel bolts.
B.
Ductile-Iron, Push-on-Joint Piping:
1.
Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end
unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
2.
Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10, push-on-joint ductile- or gray-iron standard
pattern or AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile-iron compact pattern.
3.
Gaskets: AWWA C111/A21.11, rubber.
2.6
A.
Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper,
solder-joint fittings.
C.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L and Type M, water tube, drawn temper.
D.
Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L, water tube, annealed temper.
E.
Copper Pressure Fittings:
1.
Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper,
solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2.
Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket,
metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
F.
Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end.
1.
Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos-free, 1/8inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
2.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux.
2.7
ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Solid-Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40.
B.
Cellular-Core ABS Pipe: ASTM F 628, Schedule 40.
C.
ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.
D.
Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235.
2.8
PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.
B.
Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40.
C.
PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns
and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.
D.
Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.
E.
Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
2.9
SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A.
Dielectric Fittings:
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be
joined.
Dielectric Unions:
a.
1)
2)
3)
Hart Industries International, Inc.
4)
Jomar International Ltd.
5)
Matco-Norca, Inc.
6)
7)
8)
b.
Description:
1)
2)
3)
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
Dielectric Flanges:
a.
1)
2)
3)
Matco-Norca, Inc.
4)
5)
b.
Description:
1)
2)
Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
3)
4)
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded
solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
a.
1)
2)
Calpico, Inc.
3)
4)
b.
Description:
1)
Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.
2)
3)
Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
4)
Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
5)
Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
Dielectric Nipples:
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
a.
b.
2.10
1)
Elster Perfection.
2)
Grinnell Mechanical Products.
3)
Matco-Norca, Inc.
4)
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
5)
Victaulic Company.
Description:
1)
Standard: IAPMO PS 66
2)
Electroplated steel nipple.
3)
Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.
4)
End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
5)
Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING
A.
Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.
B.
Material: Linear low-density polyethylene film of 0.008-inch or high-density, cross-laminated
polyethylene film of 0.004-inch minimum thickness.
C.
Form: Sheet or tube.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EARTH MOVING
A.
3.2
Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Division 31
Section "Earth Moving."
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
C.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
D.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
Page - 6
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
E.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
F.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
G.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
H.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
J.
Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices
specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
K.
Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used
on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn,
double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side
with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction
of flow is prohibited.
L.
Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping
upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past
each joint as completed.
M.
Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless
otherwise indicated:
1.
Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
2.
Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3.
Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
N.
Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
O.
Install steel piping according to applicable plumbing code.
P.
Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
Q.
Install underground ABS and PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.
R.
Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:
1.
Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
S.
Install underground, ductile-iron, force-main piping according to AWWA C600. Install buried
piping inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to sanitary sewer
Page - 7
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
piping outside building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-block
supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.
1.
Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5, if
piping is in corrosive soil.
T.
Install underground, copper, force-main tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
1.
Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.
U.
Install force mains at elevations indicated.
V.
Plumbing Specialties:
1.
Install backwater valves where required in sanitary waster gravity-flow piping. Comply
with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste
Piping Specialties."
2.
Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with
closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force-main piping. Comply with
requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping
Specialties."
3.
Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for
drains specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."
W.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
X.
for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
Y.
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Plumbing Piping."
Z.
requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing
Piping."
3.3
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.
B.
Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead-and-oakum calked joints.
C.
Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.
D.
Page - 8
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
E.
Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828.
ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder.
F.
Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness.
Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in
cross pattern.
G.
Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe
and fittings according to the following:
1.
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2.
ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
3.
PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.
3.4
Use
SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
3.5
Dielectric Fittings:
1.
Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
2.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.
3.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges or flange kits.
4.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty
Valves for Plumbing Piping."
B.
Shutoff Valves:
1.
Install shutoff valve on each sewage pump discharge.
2.
Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 and smaller.
3.
Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
C.
Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sewage
pump discharge.
D.
Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow.
1.
Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves.
2.
Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves unless drain has integral backwater valve.
3.
Install backwater valves in accessible locations.
4.
Comply with requirements for backwater valve specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary
Waste Piping Specialties."
Page - 9
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.6
A.
Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B.
Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in
Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1.
Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments.
2.
Install stainless-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive environments.
3.
Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments.
4.
Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments.
5.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
6.
Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:
a.
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b.
Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c.
Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
7.
8.
C.
Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling.
D.
E.
Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.
F.
Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1.
2.
NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
3.
NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.
4.
5.
6.
Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to
60 inches.
G.
Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.
H.
Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Page - 10
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
I.
Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.
J.
rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
K.
L.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.7
CONNECTIONS
A.
B.
Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
C.
Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1.
Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code.
2.
Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.
Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code.
4.
Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover
flush with floor.
5.
Install horizontal backwater valves with cleanout cover flush with floor.
6.
Comply with requirements for backwater valves, cleanouts, and drains specified in
Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."
7.
Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and
union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and
larger.
D.
Connect force-main piping to the following:
1.
Sewage Pump: To sewage pump discharge.
E.
Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of
equipment.
F.
Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
2.
Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
Page - 11
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.8
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.9
Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification
specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
A.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2.
Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction
or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report
for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed
before it was tested.
3.
Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside
leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with
water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes
before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect
joints for leaks.
4.
Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps
filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug ventstack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into
piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap
of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without
introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture
connections for gas and water leaks.
5.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
6.
Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
E.
Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence
of published procedures, as follows:
1.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before
it was tested.
Page - 12
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.
4.
3.10
Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
A.
Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
3.11
PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Aboveground, soil and waste piping shall be the following:
1.
Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled
joints.
C.
Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:
1.
joints.
2.
Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.
D.
Aboveground, vent piping NPS 5 and larger shall be the following:
1.
joints.
E.
Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:
1.
Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2.
ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
3.
PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
F.
Underground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following:
1.
Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2.
PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
G.
Aboveground sanitary-sewage force mains NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 shall be any of the following:
1.
Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
2.
Galvanized-steel pipe, pressure fittings, and threaded joints.
H.
Aboveground sanitary-sewage force mains NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6 shall be the following:
1.
Galvanized-steel pipe, pressure fittings, and threaded joints.
Page - 13
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
I.
Underground sanitary-sewage force mains NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:
1.
Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
2.
Ductile-iron, mechanical-joint piping and mechanical joints.
3.
Ductile-iron, push-on-joint piping and push-on joints.
J.
Underground sanitary-sewage force mains NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following:
1.
Ductile-iron, mechanical-joint piping and mechanical joints.
2.
Ductile-iron, push-on-joint piping and push-on joints.
Page - 14
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Backwater valves.
2.
Cleanouts.
3.
Floor drains.
4.
Floor sinks.
5.
Trench drains.
6.
Air-admittance valves.
7.
Roof flashing assemblies.
8.
Through-penetration firestop assemblies.
9.
Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
10. Flashing materials.
11. Grease interceptors.
12. Oil interceptors.
13. Solids interceptors.
DEFINITIONS
A.
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B.
FOG: Fats, oils, and greases.
C.
FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
D.
HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.
E.
PE: Polyethylene plastic.
F.
PP: Polypropylene plastic.
G.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
characteristics, and accessories for the following:
1.
Oil interceptors.
Include rated capacities, operating
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
B.
intended use.
C.
Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary
piping specialty components.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BACKWATER VALVES
A.
Horizontal, Cast-Iron Backwater Valves:
1.
the following:
a.
Josam Company; Josam Div.
b.
MIFAB, Inc.
c.
Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
Body: Cast iron.
5.
Cover: Cast iron with bolted or threaded access check valve.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
6.
7.
B.
2.2
Type Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field
modified to hang closed.
Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full-size, cast-iron, soil-pipe extension to fieldinstalled cleanout at floor; replaces backwater valve cover.
Drain-Outlet Backwater Valves:
1.
the following:
a.
b.
Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
c.
d.
2.
Size: Same as floor drain outlet.
3.
Body: Cast iron or bronze made for vertical installation in bottom outlet of floor drain.
4.
Check Valve: Removable ball float.
5.
Inlet: Threaded.
6.
Outlet: Threaded or spigot.
CLEANOUTS
A.
Exposed Metal Cleanouts:
1.
the following:
a.
b.
MIFAB, Inc.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.
3.
Size: Same as connected drainage piping
4.
Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected
piping.
5.
Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, brass, or cast-iron plug.
6.
Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
B.
Metal Floor Cleanouts:
1.
the following:
a.
b.
Oatey.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
C.
2.3
h.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout.
Size: Same as connected branch.
Type: Adjustable housing.
Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.
Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket or brass plug with tapered threads.
Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.
Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy.
Frame and Cover Shape: Round.
Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.
Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.
Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:
1.
the following:
a.
b.
MIFAB, Inc.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.
3.
Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
4.
Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
5.
Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, drilled-and-threaded brass plug.
6.
Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
7.
Wall Access: Square secured cast nickaloy access frame and cover.
FLOOR DRAINS
A.
Cast-Iron Floor Drains, FD-1:
1.
the following:
a.
Commercial Enameling Co.
b.
c.
MIFAB, Inc.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
3.
Pattern: Floor drain.
4.
Body Material: Gray iron.
5.
Seepage Flange: Required.
6.
Outlet: Bottom.
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
2.4
Sediment Bucket: Not required.
Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
Top Shape: Round.
Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
Trap Features: Trap-seal primer valve drain connection.
Cast-Iron Floor Drains:
1.
the following:
a.
Commercial Enameling Co.
b.
c.
MIFAB, Inc.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
3.
Pattern: Floor drain.
4.
Body Material: Gray iron.
5.
Outlet: Bottom.
6.
Sediment Bucket: 8” deep.
7.
Top or Strainer Material: Gray iron.
8.
Top Shape: Round.
9.
Dimensions of Top or Strainer: 15” diameter.
10. Top Loading Classification: Extra Heavy-Duty.
11. Trap Pattern: Deep-seal P-trap.
12. Trap Features: Trap-seal primer valve drain connection.
FLOOR SINKS
A.
Floor Sinks: (FS-1)
1.
Available Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
the following:
a.
b.
Watts Drainage Products
c.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group
2.
Standard: ASME A 112.6.7
3.
Pattern: Floor sink.
4.
Body Material: Cast iron, acid resisting interior.
5.
Outlet: Bottom.
6.
Aluminum internal dome strainer.
7.
Top Material: Cast iron, acid resisting.
8.
Dimensions of Top: 12” square.
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
9.
2.5
Trap primer.
TRENCH DRAINS
A.
2.6
Trench Drains:
1.
the following:
a.
b.
MIFAB, Inc.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Standard: ASME A112.6.3 for trench drains.
3.
Material: Ductile or gray iron.
4.
Outlet: Bottom.
5.
Grate Material: Ductile iron or gray iron.
6.
Grate Finish: Painted.
7.
Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.
ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES
A.
Roof Flashing Assemblies:
1.
the following:
a.
Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div.
b.
Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.
B.
Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch- thick, lead flashing
collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement
and counterflashing fitting.
2.7
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES
A.
Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:
1.
the following:
a.
ProSet Systems Inc.
2.
Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug.
3.
Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack.
4.
Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing
flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
Page - 6
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.8
MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
Open Drains:
1.
Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot,
cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where
required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.
2.
Size: Same as connected waste piping.
B.
Deep-Seal Traps:
1.
Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping
and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.
2.
Size: Same as connected waste piping.
a.
NPS 2: 4-inch- minimum water seal.
b.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch- minimum water seal.
C.
Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:
1.
Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal
primer valve connection.
2.
Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.
D.
Air-Gap Fittings:
1.
Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between
installed inlet and outlet piping.
2.
Body: Bronze or cast iron.
3.
Inlet: Opening in top of body.
4.
Outlet: Larger than inlet.
5.
Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect
waste piping.
E.
Sleeve Flashing Device:
1.
Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve for
pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top
of fitting that will extend 2 inches above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe
extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.
2.
Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.
F.
Stack Flashing Fittings:
1.
Description: Counter flashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating
roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.
2.
Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
G.
Expansion Joints:
1.
2.
Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland.
3.
End Connections: Matching connected piping.
4.
Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.
Page - 7
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.9
FLASHING MATERIALS
A.
Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights
and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness.
2.
Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0469-inch thickness.
3.
Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness.
B.
Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses,
unless otherwise indicated:
1.
General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft..
2.
Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft..
C.
Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized, millphosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
D.
Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum
thickness.
E.
Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
F.
Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
G.
Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
H.
Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
2.10
A.
OIL INTERCEPTORS
Oil Interceptors:
1.
the following:
a.
Applied Chemical Technology, Incorporated.
b.
c.
MIFAB, Inc.
d.
Rockford Sanitary Systems, Inc.
e.
Schier Products Company.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
Type: Factory-fabricated interceptor for separating and removing light oil from
wastewater.
3.
Body Material: Cast iron or steel.
4.
Interior Lining: Not required.
5.
Exterior Coating: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
6.
Flow-Control Fitting: Required.
Page - 8
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install backwater valves in building drain piping where required. For interior installation,
provide cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of
adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing.
B.
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless
larger cleanout is indicated.
2.
Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3.
Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for
larger piping.
4.
Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
C.
For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.
D.
For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
E.
Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
2.
Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.
Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a.
Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch
total depression.
b.
Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
c.
Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1inch total depression.
3.
Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
4.
Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
F.
Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished surface, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Assemble channel drainage system components according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Install on support devices so that top will be flush with adjacent surface.
H.
Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
I.
Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 2 inches above floor.
J.
Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.
Page - 9
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
K.
Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains.
1.
Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.
2.
Size: Same as floor drain inlet.
L.
Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping
discharge into sanitary drainage system.
M.
Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof
membrane.
N.
Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy
access and maintenance.
O.
Install grease interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to
authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing.
P.
Install oil interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to
authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing. Coordinate oil-interceptor
storage tank and gravity drain with Division 23 Section "Facility Fuel-Oil Piping."
Q.
Install solids interceptors with cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors that do not
have integral cleanout on outlet. Install trap on interceptors that do not have integral trap and
are connected to sanitary drainage and vent systems.
R.
Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.
S.
Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Grease Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet to unit, and connect flow-control fitting and vent
to unit inlet piping. Install valve on outlet of automatic drawoff-type unit.
D.
Oil Interceptors: Connect inlet, outlet, vent, and gravity drawoff piping to unit; flow-control
fitting and vent to unit inlet piping; and gravity drawoff and suction piping to oil storage tank.
E.
Systems."
F.
and Cables."
Page - 10
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.3
FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1.
Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker.
Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.
2.
Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
B.
Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors
and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1.
Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and
skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.
2.
Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.
3.
Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
around specialty.
C.
Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D.
Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E.
Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made
flashing fittings, according to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
F.
Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing
into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
3.4
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A.
Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or
sign on or near each of the following:
1.
Grease interceptors.
2.
Oil interceptors.
3.
Solids interceptors.
B.
Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to
identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.5
PROTECTION
A.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and
to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
Page - 11
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 22 15 13 – GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED AIR PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes piping and related specialties for general-service compressed-air systems
operating at 200 psig and less.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Division 22 Section "Plumbing Meters and Gages" for thermometers and pressure gages.
DEFINITIONS
A.
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B.
CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
C.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
D.
FPM: Vinylidene fluoride-hexafluoropropylene copolymer rubber.
E.
HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.
F.
Low-Pressure Compressed-Air Piping: System of compressed-air piping and specialties
operating at pressures of 125 psig and less.
G.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
H.
PE: Polyethylene plastic.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pipes, tubes, and fittings.
Flexible pipe connectors.
General Service valves.
Safety valves.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
5.
6.
7.
Pressure regulators.
Filters.
Automatic drain valves.
B.
Coordination Drawings: For general-service compressed-air systems. Include relationship to
other services that serve same work area.
C.
Brazing Certificates: As required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, or
AWS B2.2.
D.
Welding Certificates: As required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.
E.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications," or AWS B2.2, "Standard for Brazing
Procedure and Performance Qualification."
B.
Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
C.
Comply with ASME B31.1, "Power Piping," for high-pressure compressed-air piping.
D.
Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for low-pressure compressed-air
piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.3
Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A.
Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L, seamless, drawn-temper, water tube.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
2.
3.
4.
Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type or MSS SP-73,
wrought copper with dimensions for brazed joints.
Cast-Copper-Alloy Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150.
Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123.
Copper Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75, copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze
castings and made by keyed-coupling manufacturer.
a.
Copper-Tubing Keyed Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to
AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, NBR gasket suitable for
compressed air, and bolts and nuts. Provide FPM gasket if indicated.
1)
Manufacturers:
a)
b)
Grinnell Corp.
Victaulic Corp. of America.
B.
Transition Couplings for Metal Piping: Metal coupling or other manufactured fitting same size
as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
C.
Flexible Pipe Connectors: Corrugated tubing with wire-braid covering.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Bronze-Hose Flexible Pipe Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wirebraid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.
a.
b.
2.4
ANAMET Inc.
Flex-Hose Co., Inc.
Flexicraft Industries.
Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
Mercer Rubber Co.
Metraflex, Inc.
Unaflex, Inc.
Working-Pressure Rating: 200 psig minimum.
End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper
tube.
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
2.5
Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods" for joining materials not
in this Section.
VALVES
A.
General-Duty Valves: Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Valves" for metal ball, butterfly,
check, gate, and globe general-duty valves.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.6
SPECIALTIES
A.
Safety Valves: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels,"
construction; National Board certified, labeled, and factory sealed; constructed of bronze body
with poppet safety valve for compressed-air service.
1.
B.
Air-Main Pressure Regulators: Bronze body, direct acting, spring-loaded manual pressuresetting adjustment, and rated for 250-psig inlet pressure, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
C.
Pressure Settings: Higher than discharge pressure and same or lower than receiver
pressure rating.
Type: Pilot operated.
Air-Line Pressure Regulators: Bronze body, direct acting, spring-loaded manual pressuresetting adjustment, and rated for 200-psig minimum inlet pressure, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Type: Diaphragm or pilot operated.
D.
Automatic Drain Valves: Corrosion-resistant metal body and internal parts, rated for 200-psig
minimum working pressure, capable of automatic discharge of collected condensate.
E.
Quick Couplings: Assembly with locking-mechanism feature for quick connection and
disconnection of compressed-air hose.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Aeroquip Corporation.
Bowes Manufacturing, Inc.
Foster Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Milton Industries, Inc.
Parker Hannifin Corporation; Fluid Connectors Group; Quick Coupling Div.
Rectus Corp.
Schrader-Bridgeport; Amflo Div.
Schrader-Bridgeport/Standard Thomson.
Snap-Tite, Inc.
TOMCO Products Inc.
Tuthill Corporation; Hansen Coupling Div.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Install nipples, flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings
same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below, unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Joining of Dissimilar Metal Piping: Use dielectric fittings. Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic
Plumbing Materials and Methods" for dielectric fitting types.
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Dielectric unions.
C.
Specialty and Equipment Flanged Connections: Use cast-copper-alloy companion flange with
gasket and brazed joint for connection to copper tube.
D.
Use metal general-service compressed-air piping between air compressors and air receivers.
Use of plastic piping for this application is prohibited.
E.
Low-Pressure Compressed-Air Piping between Air Compressors and Receivers:
following piping materials for each size range:
1.
F.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Copper tube, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints.
Low-Pressure Compressed-Air Distribution Piping: Use the following piping materials for each
size range:
1.
3.2
Use the
NPS 2 and Smaller: Copper tube, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints.
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
General-Duty Valves: Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Valves" for metal general-duty
valves. Use metal valves, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Metal General-Duty Valves: Use valve types specified in "Valve Applications" Article in
Division 23 Section "Valves" according to the following:
a.
Low-Pressure Compressed Air:
compressed air.
b.
Equipment Isolation NPS 2 and Smaller: Safety-exhaust copper-alloy ball valve
with exhaust vent and pressure rating at least as great as piping system operating
pressure.
Grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping and grooved joints.
c.
3.3
Valve types specified for low-pressure
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B.
Install air and drain piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of airflow.
C.
Install eccentric reducers where piping is reduced in direction of flow, with bottoms of both
pipes and reducer fitting flush.
D.
Install branch connections to compressed-air mains from top of main. Provide drain leg and
drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points.
E.
Install flexible pipe connector on each connection to air compressors.
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
F.
Install thermometer and pressure gage on discharge piping from each air compressor and on
each receiver; install according to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Meters and Gages."
G.
Install pipe expansion joints and anchors according to Division 23 Section "Pipe Expansion
Fittings and Loops."
3.4
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods" for basic piping and
valve installation.
B.
Install metal general-duty valves according to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Valves."
C.
Install shutoff valve at each connection to and from general-service compressed-air specialties,
equipment, and accessories. Install strainer if indicated.
D.
Install check valves to maintain correct direction of fluid flow to and from compressed-air
piping specialties and equipment.
E.
Install safety valves on receivers in quantity and size to relieve at least the capacity of connected
air compressors.
F.
Install automatic drain valves on intercoolers, aftercoolers, receivers, and dryers. Discharge
condensate over nearest floor drain.
G.
Install safety valves where recommended by specialty manufacturers.
3.5
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B.
Pressure-Seal Joints: Select correct type of O-ring seals. Make joints with fitting
manufacturer's tools and according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Grooved Joints: Select correct type of gasket. Assemble joints with keyed-coupling housing,
gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling manufacturer's written instructions. Do not
apply lubricant to pre-lubricated gaskets.
D.
Join copper tubing with brazed joints. Use silver-composition or copper-phosphoruscomposition filler metal and comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," Section VII,
"Brazed Joints."
E.
Dissimilar Metal Piping Material Joints: Use dielectric fittings.
3.6
A.
Refer to Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" for seismic-restraint
Page - 6
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
devices.
B.
Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support
devices. Install the following:
1.
2.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42 clamps.
Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel, clevis hangers.
Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable, roller hangers.
Longer than 100 Feet, if indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
C.
Install supports according to Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports."
D.
Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.
E.
F.
Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.
G.
Install hangers for Schedule 40, steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
H.
rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
I.
3.7
NPS 1/4 to NPS 1/2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 3/4 to NPS 1-1/4: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 1/4: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 3/4: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 1: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
CONNECTIONS
A.
B.
Install piping adjacent to specialties and equipment to allow service and maintenance.
Page - 7
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
C.
3.8
Connect piping to air compressors, accessories, and specialties with shutoff valve and union or
flanged connection.
LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.9
Install identifying labels and devices for general-service compressed-air piping systems. Refer
to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Identification" for labeling and identification materials.
A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
Test and adjust piping safety controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning safety
controls.
2.
Piping Leak Tests: Test new and modified parts of existing piping. Cap and fill generalservice compressed-air piping with oil-free dry air or gaseous nitrogen to pressure of 50
psig above system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig. Isolate test source and
let stand for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if required, to test
pressure; hold for two hours with no drop in pressure.
a.
3.
Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
Report results in writing.
END OF SECTION 22 15 13
Page - 8
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 223300 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Commercial, electric, storage, domestic-water heaters.
2.
Commercial, light-duty, storage, electric, domestic-water heaters.
3.
Domestic-water heater accessories.
A.
1.4
Seismic Performance: Commercial domestic-water heaters shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully
operational after the seismic event."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated. Include rated
capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and
accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
1.5
A.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For commercial domestic-water heaters, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1.
2.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
Product Certificates: For each type of commercial and tankless, electric, domestic-water heater,
from manufacturer.
C.
Domestic-Water Heater Labeling:
D.
Source quality-control reports.
E.
F.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.6
Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric, domestic-water heaters to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
C.
ASME Compliance: Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label
commercial, domestic-water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
D.
NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with
potable water to comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects."
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
1.9
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of electric, domestic-water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Structural failures including storage tank and supports.
b.
Faulty operation of controls.
c.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
2.
Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.
a.
Commercial, Electric, Domestic-Water Booster Heaters:
1)
Controls and Other Components: Three years.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
b.
c.
d.
e.
Commercial, Electric, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:
1)
Storage Tank: Five years.
2)
Controls and Other Components: Five years.
Commercial, Light-Duty, Storage, Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters:
1)
Storage Tank: Three years.
2)
Controls and Other Components: Two years.
Electric, Tankless, Domestic-Water Heaters: One year.
Compression Tanks: Five years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
COMMERCIAL, ELECTRIC, domestic-WATER HEATERS
Commercial, Electric, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:
1.
the following:
a.
American Water Heaters.
b.
Bradford White Corporation.
c.
Cemline Corporation.
d.
Electric Heater Company (The).
e.
GSW Water Heating.
f.
HESco Industries, Inc.
g.
Lochinvar Corporation.
h.
Precision Boilers, Inc.
i.
PVI Industries, LLC.
j.
RECO USA.
k.
Rheem Manufacturing Company.
l.
Smith, A. O. Water Products Co.; a division of A. O. Smith Corporation.
m.
State Industries.
n.
Vaughn Manufacturing Corporation.
2.
Standard: UL 1453.
3.
Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code, steel horizontal or vertical arrangement.
a.
Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank and piping
connections. Attach tappings to tank before testing.
1)
NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
2)
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel
and stainless-steel flanges, and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and
copper-alloy flanges.
b.
c.
Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank
linings, including extending lining material into tappings.
4.
Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:
a.
Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.
b.
Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005.
c.
Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
d.
Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.
e.
Heating Elements: Electric, screw-in or bolt-on immersion type arranged in
multiples of three.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
f.
g.
h.
5.
B.
2.2
Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.
Safety Controls: High-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or systems.
Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped for combination temperature-andpressure relief valves. Include one or more relief valves with total relieving
capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than
domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select one relief valve with
sensing element that extends into storage tank.
Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction.
Commercial, Light-Duty, Storage, Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters:
1.
the following:
a.
American Water Heaters.
b.
Bradford White Corporation.
c.
Electric Heater Company (The).
d.
GSW Water Heating.
e.
Heat Transfer Products, Inc.
f.
Lochinvar Corporation.
g.
Rheem Manufacturing Company.
h.
i.
State Industries.
2.
Standard: UL 174.
3.
Storage-Tank Construction: Steel, vertical arrangement.
a.
Tappings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.
b.
c.
linings, including extending lining material into tappings.
4.
Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:
a.
Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.
b.
Dip Tube: Required unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank.
c.
Drain Valve: ASSE 1005.
d.
Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
e.
Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.
f.
Heat-Trap Fittings: Inlet type in cold-water inlet and outlet type in hot-water
outlet.
g.
Heating Elements:
Two; electric, screw-in immersion type; wired for
simultaneous operation unless otherwise indicated. Limited to 12 kW total.
h.
Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.
i.
Safety Control: High-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.
j.
Relief Valve: ASME rated and stamped for combination temperature-and-pressure
relief valves. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include
pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select
relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
5.
Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction with legs for off-floor installation.
DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A.
Domestic-Water Compression Tanks:
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
2.
3.
4.
the following:
a.
AMTROL Inc.
b.
Flexcon Industries.
c.
Honeywell International Inc.
d.
Pentair Pump Group (The); Myers.
e.
f.
State Industries.
g.
Taco, Inc.
Description: Steel pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factoryinstalled butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating
pressure at tank.
Construction:
a.
Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.
Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.
b.
linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
c.
Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.
Characteristics:
a.
Working-Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
B.
Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Comply with ANSI/CSA LC 3.
Include dimensions not less than base of domestic-water heater, and include drain outlet not less
than NPS 3/4 with ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads or with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads.
C.
Piping-Type Heat Traps:
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
D.
Heat-Trap Fittings: ASHRAE 90.2.
E.
Manifold Kits: Domestic-water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet piping
for field installation, for multiple domestic-water heater installation. Include ball-, butterfly-, or
gate-type shutoff valves to isolate each domestic-water heater and calibrated balancing valves to
provide balanced flow through each domestic-water heater.
1.
Comply with requirements for ball-, butterfly-, or gate-type shutoff valves specified in
Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
2.
Comply with requirements for balancing valves specified in Division 22 Section
"Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
F.
Pressure-Reducing Valves: ASSE 1003 for water. Set at 25-psig- maximum outlet pressure
G.
Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include
relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domesticwater heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends
into storage tank.
H.
Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include pressure setting less than domesticwater heater working-pressure rating.
Field-fabricated
Page - 5
piping
arrangement
according
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
to
I.
Vacuum Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.
J.
Shock Absorbers: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, Size A water hammer arrester.
K.
Domestic-Water Heater Stands: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel stand for floor
mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water. Include dimension that will
support bottom of domestic-water heater a minimum of 18 inches above the floor.
L.
Domestic-Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel bracket for
wall mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water.
2.3
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Factory Tests: Test and inspect domestic-water heaters specified to be ASME-code
construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
B.
Hydrostatically test commercial domestic-water heaters to minimum of one and one-half times
pressure rating before shipment.
C.
Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for
retesting and reinspecting requirements and Division 01 Section "Execution" for requirements
for correcting the Work.
D.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A.
Commercial, Electric, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install commercial, electric,
domestic-water heaters on concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete bases
specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1.
Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial, electric, domestic-water heaters if
installation on stand, bracket, suspended platform, or directly on floor is indicated.
2.
Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.
3.
Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.
4.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.
5.
For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
6.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
7.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
8.
Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.
B.
Electric, Tankless, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install electric, tankless, domestic-water
heaters on wall bracket.
Page - 6
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.
Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.
Install electric, domestic-water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original
design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange
units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.
1.
Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on
domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified
in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
D.
Install commercial, electric, domestic-water heaters with seismic-restraint devices. Comply
with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
E.
Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use
relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater
relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward
pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.
F.
Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in water piping for electric,
domestic-water heaters without storage. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet,
with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge
by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.
G.
Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or
over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for electric,
domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end
drain valves specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
H.
Install thermometers on outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heaters. Comply with
requirements for thermometers specified in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for
Plumbing Piping."
I.
Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple electric, domestic-water
heaters. Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each electric,
domestic-water heater. Include shutoff valve and thermometer in each domestic-water heater
inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each electric, domestic-water heater outlet. Comply with
requirements for valves specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing
Piping," and comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Division 22 Section
"Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."
J.
Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heater storage
tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.
K.
Fill electric, domestic-water heaters with water.
Page - 7
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
L.
3.2
Charge domestic-water compression tanks with air.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water
Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Where installing piping adjacent to electric, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and
maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.4
Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in
Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
A.
1.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
2.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
3.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper operation.
4.
equipment.
B.
Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for
retesting and reinspecting requirements and Division 01 Section "Execution" for requirements
for correcting the Work.
C.
3.5
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial and tankless,
electric, domestic-water heaters.
Page - 8
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 224213.13 - COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Water closets.
2.
Flushometer valves.
3.
Toilet seats.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
Division 22 Section "Healthcare Plumbing Fixtures" for healthcare water closets.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for water closets.
2.
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished
specialties and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves and electronic sensors to include in
operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WALL-MOUNTED WATER CLOSETS
A.
Water Closets: Wall mounted, top spud, accessible. (WC-1)
1.
the following:
a.
American Standard America.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.
4.
2.2
b.
Ferguson Enterprises, Inc.; ProFlo Brand.
c.
Kohler Co.
d.
TOTO USA, INC.
e.
Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures.
Bowl:
a.
Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5.
b.
Material: Vitreous china.
c.
Type: Siphon jet.
d.
Style: Flushometer valve.
e.
Height: Standard.
f.
Rim Contour: Elongated.
g.
Water Consumption: As scheduled.
h.
Spud Size and Location: NPS 1-1/2; top.
Flushometer Valve: As scheduled.
Support:
a.
b.
Description: Waste-fitting assembly as required to match drainage piping material
and arrangement with faceplates, couplings gaskets, and feet; bolts and hardware
matching fixture.
c.
Water-Closet Mounting Height: Standard, Child, Handicapped/elderly according
to ICC/ANSI A117.1, as scheduled.
FLUSHOMETER VALVES
A.
2.3
Lever-Handle, Diaphragm Flushometer Valves:
1.
the following:
a.
Coyne & Delany Co.
b.
Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC.
c.
Sloan Valve Company.
d.
2.
3.
Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig.
4.
Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device.
5.
Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components.
6.
Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated.
7.
Panel Finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel.
8.
Style: Exposed or concealed, as scheduled.
9.
Consumption: As scheduled.
10. Minimum Inlet: NPS 1.
11. Minimum Outlet: NPS 1-1/4.
TOILET SEATS
A.
Toilet Seats:
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
the following:
a.
b.
Bemis Manufacturing Company.
c.
Centoco Manufacturing Corporation.
d.
Church Seats.
e.
Kohler Co.
f.
Olsonite Seat Co.
g.
Sanderson Plumbing Products, Inc.
h.
Sperzel of Lexington.
i.
TOTO USA, INC.
j.
Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5.
Material: Plastic.
Type: Commercial (Heavy duty).
Shape: Elongated rim, open front.
Hinge: Check.
Hinge Material: Noncorroding metal.
Seat Cover: Not required.
Color: White.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections before water-closet installation.
B.
Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where water closets will be installed.
C.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Water-Closet Installation:
1.
Install level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
2.
Install floor-mounted water closets on bowl-to-drain connecting fitting attachments to
piping or building substrate.
3.
Install accessible, wall-mounted water closets at mounting height for
handicapped/elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.
B.
Support Installation:
1.
Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for floor-mounted, back-outlet water
closets.
2.
Use carrier supports with waste-fitting assembly and seal.
3.
Install floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate, onto
waste-fitting seals; and attach to support.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
4.
Install wall-mounted, back-outlet water-closet supports with waste-fitting assembly and
waste-fitting seals; and affix to building substrate.
C.
Flushometer-Valve Installation:
1.
Install flushometer-valve, water-supply fitting on each supply to each water closet.
2.
Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
3.
Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible water closets with handle mounted
on open side of water closet.
4.
Install actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.
5.
Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.
D.
Install toilet seats on water closets.
E.
Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:
1.
Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished
locations and within cabinets and millwork.
2.
Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
3.
Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for
Plumbing Piping."
F.
Joint Sealing:
1.
Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant silicone sealant.
2.
Match sealant color to water-closet color.
3.
Comply with sealant requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Connect water closets with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings
required to match water closets.
B.
Comply with water piping requirements specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water
Piping."
C.
Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary
Waste and Vent Piping."
D.
Where installing piping adjacent to water closets, allow space for service and maintenance.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Operate and adjust water closets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning water
closets, fittings, and controls.
B.
Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.
C.
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.5
A.
Clean water closets and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and
materials.
B.
Install protective covering for installed water closets and fittings.
C.
Do not allow use of water closets for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.
END OF SECTION 224213.13
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 224216.13 - COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Lavatories.
2.
Faucets.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.
and profiles, and finishes for lavatories.
2.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring of automatic faucets.
1.4
A.
1.5
Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For lavatories and faucets to include in operation and
1.
In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data,"
include the following:
a.
Servicing and adjustments of automatic faucets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VITREOUS-CHINA, WALL-MOUNTED LAVATORIES
A.
Lavatory: Vitreous china, wall mounted, with back.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
2.
3.
4.
the following:
a.
b.
Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc.
c.
Crane Plumbing, L.L.C.
d.
e.
f.
Kohler Co.
g.
h.
Peerless Pottery Sales, Inc.
i.
Fixture:
a.
Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1.
b.
Type: For wall hanging.
c.
Nominal Size: Oval, 21 by 18 inches.
d.
Faucet-Hole Location: Top.
e.
Color: White.
f.
Mounting Material: Chair carrier.
Faucet: As scheduled.
Support: ASME A112.6.1M, Type II, concealed-arm lavatory carrier.
B.
Lavatory: Ledge back, vitreous china, wall mounted.
1.
the following:
a.
b.
Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Kohler Co.
g.
h.
2.
Fixture:
a.
b.
Type: For wall hanging.
c.
Nominal Size: Oval, 19 by 16 inches.
d.
e.
Color: White.
f.
Mounting Material: Chair carrier.
3.
4.
Support: ASME A112.6.1M, Type II, concealed-arm lavatory carrier.
C.
Lavatory: Wheelchair, vitreous china, wall mounted.
1.
the following:
a.
b.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.
4.
2.2
c.
d.
e.
Kohler Co.
f.
g.
Fixture:
a.
b.
Type: Slab or wheelchair.
c.
Nominal Size: Rectangular, 27 by 20 inches.
d.
e.
Color: White.
f.
Mounting: For concealed-arm carrier.
Support: ASME A112.6.1M, Type II, concealed-arm lavatory carrier with rectangular,
steel uprights.
SOLID-BRASS, MANUALLY OPERATED FAUCETS
A.
NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health
Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B.
Lavatory Faucets: Manual-type, two-handle mixing, commercial, solid-brass valve.
1.
the following:
a.
b.
Bradley Corporation.
c.
Chicago Faucets.
d.
Delta Faucet Company.
e.
Elkay Manufacturing Co.
f.
Grohe America, Inc.
g.
Just Manufacturing.
h.
Kohler Co.
i.
Moen Incorporated.
j.
Speakman Company.
k.
T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.
l.
2.
3.
General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies
and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
4.
Body Type: Centerset or widespread.
5.
Body Material: Commercial, solid brass.
6.
Finish: Polished chrome plate.
7.
Valve Handle(s): Wrist blade, 4 inches.
8.
Spout: Rigid or rigid, gooseneck type.
9.
Spout Outlet: Laminar flow.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.3
SUPPLY FITTINGS
A.
Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B.
C.
Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply
piping size. Include chrome-plated-brass or stainless-steel wall flange.
D.
Supply Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet
connection matching supply piping.
E.
Operation: Wheel handle.
F.
Risers:
1.
Chrome-plated, rigid-copper-pipe and brass straight or offset tailpieces, chrome-plated,
soft-copper flexible tube or ASME A112.18.6, braided- or corrugated-stainless-steel,
flexible hose riser.
2.4
WASTE FITTINGS
A.
B.
Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 offset and straight tailpiece.
C.
Trap:
1.
Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032-inchthick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated, brass or steel wall flange.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
actual locations of piping connections before lavatory installation.
B.
Examine counters and walls for suitable conditions where lavatories will be installed.
C.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install lavatories level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
B.
Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories.
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
C.
Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for people
with disabilities or the elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.
D.
Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.
Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with
escutcheon requirements specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
E.
Seal joints between lavatories, counters, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildewresistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant
requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
F.
Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of
accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Plumbing Piping
Insulation."
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent
piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
B.
Piping."
C.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Operate and adjust lavatories and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning lavatories,
fittings, and controls.
B.
Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.
C.
3.5
A.
After completing installation of lavatories, inspect and repair damaged finishes.
B.
Clean lavatories, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods
and materials.
C.
Provide protective covering for installed lavatories and fittings.
D.
Do not allow use of lavatories for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 224216.16 - COMMERCIAL SINKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Service basins.
2.
Service sinks.
3.
Supply fittings.
4.
Waste fittings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
1.
and profiles, and finishes for sinks.
2.
A.
1.5
Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Maintenance Data: For sinks to include in maintenance manuals.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
1.
Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
2.
Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SERVICE BASINS
A.
2.2
Service Basins: Terrazzo, floor mounted.
1.
the following:
a.
b.
c.
Florestone Products Co., Inc.
d.
Stern-Williams Co., Inc.
2.
Fixture:
a.
Standard: IAPMO PS 99.
b.
Nominal Size: As scheduled.
c.
Height: 6 inches.
d.
Rim Guard: On all top surfaces.
e.
Drain: Grid with NPS 3 outlet.
3.
Mounting: On floor and flush to wall.
4.
UTILITY SINKS
A.
Utility Sinks: Stainless steel, counter mounted.
1.
the following:
a.
Advance Tabco.
b.
Eagle Group; Foodservice Equipment Division.
c.
d.
Griffin Products, Inc.
e.
Just Manufacturing.
2.
Fixture:
a.
b.
Type: Ledge back.
c.
Number of Compartments: As scheduled.
d.
Overall Dimensions: As scheduled.
e.
Metal Thickness: 0.050 inch.
f.
Compartment:
1)
Drain: Stainless steel basket strainer.
3.
Faucet(s): As scheduled.
4.
Supply Fittings:
a.
b.
Supplies: Chrome-plated brass compression stop with inlet connection matching
water-supply piping type and size.
1)
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2)
5.
6.
2.3
Risers: NPS 1/2, chrome-plated, rigid-copper pipe, chrome-plated, softcopper flexible tube, or ASME A112.18.6, braided or corrugated stainlesssteel flexible hose.
Waste Fittings:
a.
b.
Trap(s):
1)
Size: NPS 2.
2)
Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with
0.032-inch- thick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated brass or steel wall
flange.
c.
Continuous Waste:
1)
Size: NPS 2.
2)
Material: Chrome-plated, 0.032-inch- thick brass tube.
Mounting: On counter with sealant.
SINK FAUCETS
A.
Effects," for faucet-spout materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B.
Sink Faucets: Manual type, two-lever-handle mixing valve.
1.
the following:
a.
b.
Chicago Faucets.
c.
Delta Faucet Company.
d.
e.
Kohler Co.
f.
Moen Incorporated.
g.
2.
3.
General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies
and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and sink receptor.
4.
Body Type: As scheduled.
5.
Body Material: Commercial, solid brass, general-duty, solid brass, or copper or brass
underbody.
6.
Finish: Chrome plated.
7.
Maximum Flow Rate: As scheduled.
8.
Handle(s): Wrist blade, 4 inches.
9.
Spout Type: As scheduled.
10. Vacuum Breaker: Required for hose outlet.
11. Spout Outlet: Laminar flow.
2.4
SUPPLY FITTINGS
A.
Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
C.
Supply Piping: Chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply
piping size. Include chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel wall flange.
D.
Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet
connection matching supply piping.
E.
F.
Risers:
1.
Chrome-plated, rigid-copper pipe, chrome-plated, soft-copper flexible tube, or
ASME A112.18.6, braided or corrugated stainless-steel flexible hose.
2.5
WASTE FITTINGS
A.
B.
Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 offset and straight tailpiece.
C.
Trap:
1.
Size: NPS 1-1/2.
2.
Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032-inchthick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated brass or steel wall flange.
3.
Material: Stainless-steel, two-piece trap and swivel elbow with 0.012-inch- thick
stainless-steel tube to wall; and stainless-steel wall flange.
2.6
GROUT
A.
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
B.
Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C.
D.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
actual locations of piping connections before sink installation.
B.
Examine walls, floors, and counters for suitable conditions where sinks will be installed.
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
C.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install sinks level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
B.
Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung sinks.
C.
Install accessible wall-mounted sinks at handicapped/elderly mounting height according to
ICC/ANSI A117.1.
D.
Set floor-mounted sinks in leveling bed of cement grout.
E.
Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each sink faucet.
1.
Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with sink.
Comply with valve requirements specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves
for Plumbing Piping."
2.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
F.
Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with
G.
Seal joints between sinks and counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildewresistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant
requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
H.
Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of
accessible sinks. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Plumbing Piping
Insulation."
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Connect sinks with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping.
Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
B.
Piping."
C.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Operate and adjust sinks and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning sinks, fittings, and
controls.
B.
Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.5
A.
After completing installation of sinks, inspect and repair damaged finishes.
B.
Clean sinks, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and
materials.
C.
Provide protective covering for installed sinks and fittings.
D.
Do not allow use of sinks for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.
Page - 6
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 224716 - PRESSURE WATER COOLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes pressure water coolers and related components.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of pressure water cooler.
1.
and profiles, and finishes.
2.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance Data: For pressure water coolers to include in maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRESSURE WATER COOLERS
A.
Pressure Water Coolers: Wall mounted , wheelchair accessible.
1.
the following:
a.
b.
Halsey Taylor.
c.
Haws Corporation.
d.
Larco Inc.
e.
Tri Palm International, LLC; Oasis Brand.
f.
Tri Palm International, LLC; Sunroc Brand.
2.
Cabinet: Single or Bi-level with two attached cabinets and with a bi-level skirt kit, all
stainless steel.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
Bubbler: One, with adjustable stream regulator, located on each cabinet deck.
Control: Push button or push bar.
Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/4 tailpiece.
Supply: NPS 3/8 with shutoff valve.
Waste Fitting: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2, NPS 1-1/4 brass P-trap.
Filter: One or more water filters complying with NSF 42 and NSF 53 for cyst and lead
reduction to below EPA standards; with capacity sized for unit peak flow rate.
Cooling System: Electric, with hermetically sealed compressor, cooling coil, air-cooled
condensing unit, corrosion-resistant tubing, refrigerant, corrosion-resistant-metal storage
tank, and adjustable thermostat.
a.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
Capacities and Characteristics:
a.
Cooled Water: 8 gph.
b.
Ambient-Air Temperature: 90 deg F.
c.
Inlet-Water Temperature: 80 deg F.
d.
Cooled-Water Temperature: 50 deg F.
e.
Electrical Characteristics:
1)
Volts: 120-V ac.
2)
Phase: Single.
3)
Hertz: 60.
Support: ASME A112.6.1M, Type I water-cooler carrier.
Pressure Water Coolers: Semirecessed , wheelchair accessible.
1.
the following:
a.
b.
Halsey Taylor.
c.
Haws Corporation.
d.
e.
2.
Standards:
a.
Comply with NSF 61.
b.
Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classification of
Refrigerants," for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant
c.
Comply with ICC A117.1.
3.
Cabinet: All stainless steel.
4.
Bubbler: One, with adjustable stream regulator, located on deck.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. Cooling System: Electric, with hermetically sealed compressor, cooling coil, air-cooled
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
a.
11.
12.
C.
application.
Capacities and Characteristics:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1)
Volts: 120-V ac.
2)
Phase: Single.
3)
Hertz: 60.
Support: Mounting frame or brackets for attaching to substrate.
Pressure Water Coolers: Recessed.
1.
the following:
a.
b.
Halsey Taylor.
c.
Haws Corporation.
d.
e.
2.
Standards:
a.
Comply with NSF 61.
b.
Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classification of
Refrigerants," for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant
3.
Cabinet: All stainless steel.
4.
Bubbler: One, with adjustable stream regulator, located on deck.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. Cooling System: Electric, with hermetically sealed compressor, cooling coil, air-cooled
a.
application.
11. Capacities and Characteristics:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1)
Volts: 120-V ac.
2)
Phase: Single.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
12.
13.
3)
Hertz: 60.
Ventilation Grille: Stainless steel, located below water cooler.
Support: Mounting frame for attaching to substrate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roughing-in for water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation.
B.
Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.
C.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. For fixtures indicated for
children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Install off-the-floor carrier supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted fixtures.
C.
Install mounting frames, affixed to building construction, and attach recessed, pressure water
coolers to mounting frames.
D.
Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to
domestic-water distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locations
where they can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Division 22 Section
"General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
E.
Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage
system.
F.
Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with
G.
Seal joints between fixtures and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone
sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent
piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
Piping."
C.
Install ball, gate, or globe shutoff valve on water supply to each fixture. Comply with valve
requirements specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
D.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.
B.
Adjust pressure water-cooler temperature settings.
3.5
CLEANING
A.
After installing fixture, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.
Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B.
Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Provide protective covering for installed fixtures.
D.
Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,
horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to
600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment
manufacturer for field installation.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1.
Motor controllers.
2.
Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3.
Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4.
Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in
HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.
B.
Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.
2.2
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A.
Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet
(1000 m) above sea level.
B.
Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads
at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,
and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.3
POLYPHASE MOTORS
A.
Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B.
Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C.
Service Factor: 1.15.
D.
Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1.
For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
2.
For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E.
Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.
F.
Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
G.
Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
H.
Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
I.
Insulation: Class F.
J.
Code Letter Designation:
1.
Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2.
Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
K.
Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor
frame sizes smaller than 324T.
2.4
POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection
requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,
suited to control method.
B.
Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1.
Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and
tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by
pulse-width modulated inverters.
2.
Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.
3.
Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
4.
Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected
motors.
C.
Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.5
SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A.
Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and
requirements of specific motor application:
1.
Permanent-split capacitor.
2.
Split phase.
3.
Capacitor start, inductor run.
4.
Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B.
Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C.
Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
D.
Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E.
Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes the following:
1.
Isolation pads.
2.
Isolation mounts.
3.
Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.
4.
Restrained spring isolators.
5.
Housed spring mounts.
6.
Elastomeric hangers.
7.
Spring hangers.
8.
Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.
9.
Pipe riser resilient supports.
10. Resilient pipe guides.
11. Restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails.
12. Restraining braces and cables.
13. Steel and inertia, vibration isolation equipment bases.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
IBC: International Building Code.
A.
1.5
Wind-Restraint Loading:
1.
Basic Wind Speed: 100 MPH
2.
Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. multiplied by the maximum area of the HVAC component
projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either
side of normal.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation
device.
2.
Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation details indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.
Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and
operation, and wind forces required to select vibration isolators, seismic and wind
restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases.
a.
Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment
mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 23 Sections for
equipment mounted outdoors.
2.
Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion
and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring
deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been
examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.
3.
Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and
rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment,
and cantilever loads.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for HVAC piping and
equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and
seismic restraints.
D.
E.
F.
1.6
For air-mounting systems to include in operation and
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are
more stringent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A.
1.
Ace Mountings Co., Inc.
2.
Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
3.
California Dynamics Corporation.
4.
Isolation Technology, Inc.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Kinetics Noise Control.
Mason Industries.
Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
Vibration Isolation.
Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
B.
Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad
area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that
match requirements of supported equipment.
1.
Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
C.
Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed
compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate
for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise
identify to indicate capacity range.
1.
Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and
opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element
and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.
2.
Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridgebearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
D.
Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.
1.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
2.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
4.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
5.
Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, rubber
isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.
6.
Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw
to fasten and level equipment.
E.
Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop
restraint.
1.
Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to
weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, neoprene or
rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting
and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
2.
Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having
jurisdiction.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.
1.
Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint.
2.
Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.
Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel up or down
before contacting a resilient collar.
G.
Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant
elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger
rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
H.
Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert
in compression.
1.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced
cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
7.
Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support
spring coil.
I.
Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert
hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.
1.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7.
Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower
threaded rod.
8.
Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support
spring coil.
J.
Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes
separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit
stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load
on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions.
K.
Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement
separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible,
a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and
contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection
of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.2
RESTRAINED VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF-CURB RAILS
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mason Industries.
6.
Thybar Corporation.
7.
8.
9.
B.
General Requirements for Restrained Vibration Isolation Roof-Curb Rails: Factory-assembled,
fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb rail designed to resiliently support equipment
and to withstand wind forces.
C.
Lower Support Assembly: Formed sheet-metal section containing adjustable and removable
steel springs that support upper frame. Upper frame shall provide continuous support for
equipment and shall be captive to resiliently resist wind forces. Lower support assembly shall
have a means for attaching to building structure and a wood nailer for attaching roof materials,
and shall be insulated with a minimum of 2 inches of rigid, glass-fiber insulation on inside of
assembly.
D.
Spring Isolators: Adjustable, restrained spring isolators shall be mounted on 1/4-inch- thick,
elastomeric vibration isolation pads and shall have access ports, for level adjustment, with
removable waterproof covers at all isolator locations. Isolators shall be located so they are
accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of the installation without interfering with
the integrity of the roof.
1.
Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with wind
restraint.
a.
Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops and adjustable equipment
mounting and leveling bolt.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading
over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory
cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.
a.
Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant standard neoprene.
E.
Snubber Bushings: All-directional, elastomeric snubber bushings at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick.
F.
Water Seal: Galvanized sheet metal with EPDM seals at corners, attached to upper support
frame, extending down past wood nailer of lower support assembly, and counterflashed over
roof materials.
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.32.2
VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mason Industries.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Steel Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails.
1.
Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch
clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide
bases or rails.
a.
Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.
2.
Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.
3.
Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation
mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.
C.
Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for placement of
cast-in-place concrete.
1.
Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch
clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide
bases or rails.
a.
Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.
2.
Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.
3.
Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation
mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.
4.
Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and anchors
in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from supported
equipment manufacturer.
2.42.3
FACTORY FINISHES
A.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment
before shipping.
1.
Powder coating on springs and housings.
2.
All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use.
3.
Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.
4.
Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and wind-control devices to indicate
capacity range.
Page - 6
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and wind-control devices for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance.
B.
Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations
before installation.
C.
3.2
APPLICATIONS
A.
Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application
by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings
to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.
C.
Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads
within specified loading limits.
3.3
VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof
curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
B.
Equipment Restraints:
1.
Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate
snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and
supporting structure.
2.
Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance
between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.
3.
Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.
C.
Piping Restraints:
1.
Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.
2.
Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum
of 80 feet o.c.
3.
Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.
D.
Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
E.
Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
Page - 7
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
F.
Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.
G.
Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at
flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
H.
Drilled-in Anchors:
1.
Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for
anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or
drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are
encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and
telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2.
Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved
full design strength.
3.
Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty
sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to
which anchor is to be fastened.
4.
Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to
installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole
and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air
pockets in the adhesive.
5.
Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
6.
Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior
applications.
3.4
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
C.
1.
Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to
2.
Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to
restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least
seven days' advance notice.
3.
Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary
load-spreading members.
4.
Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by
Architect.
5.
Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
6.
Measure isolator restraint clearance.
7.
Measure isolator deflection.
8.
Verify snubber minimum clearances.
D.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
E.
Page - 8
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B.
Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during
normal operation.
C.
Adjust air-spring leveling mechanism.
D.
Adjust active height of spring isolators.
E.
Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
3.6
DEMONSTRATION
A.
3.7
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain air-mounting systems.
Refer to Division 01 Section
"Demonstration and Training."
HVAC VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE SCHEDULE
A.
Supported Equipment: Chillers, Boilers, Roof Mounted AHUs, Roof Mounted Fans, and Floor
Mounted Pumps.
1.
Equipment Location: Chiller and Boiler Rooms.
2.
Pads:
a.
Material: Neoprene.
b.
Thickness: 1-inch.
c.
Number of Pads: One per foot or base mount.
B.
Suspended Equipment: Air Handling Units and Expansion Tanks.
1.
Equipment Location: Boiler Room / Building.
2.
Isolator Type: Spring hanger with vertical limit stop.
3.
Minimum Deflection: 1-inch.
4.
Component Importance Factor: 1.0.
5.
Component Response Modification Factor: 1.5.
6.
Component Amplification Factor: 1.0.
C.
Supported Equipment: Chillers, Boilers, Pumps
1.
Equipment Location: Roof.
2.
Isolator Type: Spring Isolator.
3.
Minimum Deflection: 1-inch.
Page - 9
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Balancing Air Systems:
a.
Constant-volume air systems.
b.
Variable-air-volume systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B.
TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
C.
TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
D.
TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
1.4
A.
Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation
that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified
in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B.
Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.
C.
Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 90 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB
strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
D.
Certified TAB reports.
E.
Sample report forms.
F.
Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:
1.
Instrument type and make.
2.
Serial number.
3.
Application.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
4.
5.
1.5
Dates of use.
Dates of calibration.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or NEBB
1.
TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC
2.
TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC as a
TAB technician.
B.
TAB Conference: Meet with Engineer on approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan
to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the participation of the TAB field
supervisor and technicians. Provide 10 days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and
location.
1.
Agenda Items:
a.
The Contract Documents examination report.
b.
The TAB plan.
c.
Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
d.
Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
C.
Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:
1.
Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2.
Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures
specified and referenced in this Specification.
D.
TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by the engineer.
E.
Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111,
Section 5, "Instrumentation."
F.
ASHRAE Compliance:
Balancing."
G.
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance:
Applicable
Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."
1.6
Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air
requirements
in
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB
period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
B.
Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial
Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Notice: Provide ten days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.
B.
Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TAB SPECIALISTS
A.
3.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, engage one of the following:
1.
Engineered Air Balance Co.
2.
Air Balance Co.
3.
PEBSCO
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B.
Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer
wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify
that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
C.
Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D.
Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E.
Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to
verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Division 23 Section
"Nonmetal Ducts” and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in
plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.
F.
Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1.
Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects
that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or
part of a system.
2.
Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when
installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment
performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in
AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."
Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
G.
Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,
cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
H.
Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
I.
Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned
and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J.
Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible
and their controls are connected and functioning.
K.
Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated
perforations.
L.
Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or
mixing fluid flows.
M.
Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
N.
Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
O.
Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
P.
Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.3
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B.
Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:
1.
Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.
2.
Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3.
Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4.
Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5.
Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6.
Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7.
Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
8.
Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
3.4
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A.
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance".
1.
Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1.
After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness
as used to construct ducts.
2.
After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with
requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
3.
Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,
coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."
C.
Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position
indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other
suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
D.
Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
3.5
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C.
For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D.
Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
E.
Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F.
Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G.
Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H.
Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I.
Check for airflow blockages.
J.
Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K.
Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
L.
Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."
3.6
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
1.
Measure total airflow.
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse
measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total
airflow.
Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:
a.
Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b.
Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c.
Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d.
Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a.
Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.
Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heatrecovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus
actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments
to accommodate actual conditions.
Obtain approval from the engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections for air-handling
units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit
performance.
Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, fullheating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required
brake horsepower.
B.
Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
1.
Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.
a.
Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow for that zone.
2.
Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
3.
Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C.
Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1.
Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
D.
Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of
indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and
the dampers at air terminals.
1.
Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
Page - 6
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.7
Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS
A.
Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the
indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set-point
airflow with the remainder at maximum-airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal
units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they
are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
B.
Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been
adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1.
Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a
position that simulates full-cooling load.
2.
Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure.
Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for
the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's
recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome
terminal-unit discharge system losses.
3.
Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.
4.
Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to
make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream
from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
5.
Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the
same as described for constant-volume air systems.
a.
If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave
outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
6.
Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outdoor airflow.
a.
Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for
constant-volume air systems.
7.
Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure
controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is
maintained at the most critical unit.
8.
Record final fan-performance data.
C.
Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan systems
have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1.
Balance variable-air-volume systems the same as described for constant-volume air
systems.
2.
Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition.
3.
Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify operation of the
static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets
downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
4.
Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings.
5.
Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan if one is
installed, and verify operation of the static-pressure controller.
Page - 7
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
6.
7.
8.
D.
3.8
Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static
pressure to verify that it is being maintained by the controller.
Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the
a.
If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave
the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outdoor airflow.
a.
Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for
constant-volume air systems.
Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems have
been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1.
Set system at maximum indicated airflow by setting the required number of terminal
units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are
distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
2.
Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable-airflow controller set
at maximum airflow.
3.
Set terminal units at full-airflow condition.
4.
Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing
progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to
indicated airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from
terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
5.
Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow.
6.
Measure static pressure at the sensor.
7.
Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outdoor airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the
PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A.
Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1.
Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.
2.
Motor horsepower rating.
3.
Motor rpm.
4.
Efficiency rating.
5.
Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6.
Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7.
Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B.
Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper
operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number,
serial number, and nameplate data.
3.9
PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS
A.
Verify proper rotation of fans.
Page - 8
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
C.
Record compressor data.
3.10
PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS
A.
Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.
1.
Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.
2.
Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate
information.
3.
Check the refrigerant charge.
4.
Check the condition of filters.
5.
Check the condition of coils.
6.
Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap.
7.
Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.
8.
Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements
taken. Report deficiencies.
B.
Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is
to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished.
Verify the following:
1.
New filters are installed.
2.
Coils are clean and fins combed.
3.
Drain pans are clean.
4.
Fans are clean.
5.
Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.
6.
Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.
C.
Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are
affected by the renovation work.
1.
Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and
determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.
2.
Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face
velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment
manufacturer.
3.
If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates and water flow rates by more than 5
percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or
decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.
4.
Balance each air outlet.
3.11
A.
TOLERANCES
Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1.
Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent
2.
Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent
3.
Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent
4.
Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent
Page - 9
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.12
REPORTING
A.
Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as
specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'
balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to
facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to
HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.
B.
Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe completed procedures,
procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems
found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each
building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.13
FINAL REPORT
A.
General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections
for tested systems and balanced systems.
1.
Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the
certified testing and balancing engineer.
2.
Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
B.
Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:
1.
Pump curves.
2.
Fan curves.
3.
Manufacturers' test data.
4.
Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5.
Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and
product data.
C.
General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1.
Title page.
2.
Name and address of the TAB contractor.
3.
Project name.
4.
Project location.
5.
Architect's name and address.
6.
Engineer's name and address.
7.
Contractor's name and address.
8.
Report date.
9.
Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a.
Indicated versus final performance.
b.
Notable characteristics of systems.
c.
Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.
Page - 10
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
15.
Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a.
Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b.
Conditions of filters.
c.
Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d.
Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e.
Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f.
Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g.
Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h.
Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
D.
System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1.
Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2.
Water and steam flow rates.
3.
Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4.
Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5.
Terminal units.
6.
Balancing stations.
7.
Position of balancing devices.
E.
Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
Unit identification.
b.
Location.
c.
Make and type.
d.
Model number and unit size.
e.
Manufacturer's serial number.
f.
Unit arrangement and class.
g.
Discharge arrangement.
h.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
i.
Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
j.
Number, make, and size of belts.
k.
Number, type, and size of filters.
2.
Motor Data:
a.
Motor make, and frame type and size.
b.
Horsepower and rpm.
c.
Volts, phase, and hertz.
d.
Full-load amperage and service factor.
e.
f.
3.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
Total air flow rate in cfm.
b.
Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c.
Fan rpm.
d.
Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e.
Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.
f.
Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
g.
Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
h.
Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
i.
Outdoor airflow in cfm.
j.
Return airflow in cfm.
Page - 11
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
k.
l.
m.
Outdoor-air damper position.
Return-air damper position.
Vortex damper position.
F.
Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:
1.
Coil Data:
a.
System identification.
b.
Location.
c.
Coil type.
d.
Number of rows.
e.
Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.
f.
Make and model number.
g.
Face area in sq. ft.
h.
Tube size in NPS
i.
Tube and fin materials.
j.
Circuiting arrangement.
2.
a.
Air flow rate in cfm
b.
Average face velocity in fpm
c.
Air pressure drop in inches wg
d.
Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F
e.
Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F
f.
Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F
g.
Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F
h.
Water flow rate in gpm
i.
Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig
j.
Entering-water temperature in deg F
k.
Leaving-water temperature in deg F
l.
Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
m.
Refrigerant suction pressure in psig
n.
Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F
o.
Inlet steam pressure in psig
G.
Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup
equipment reports, include the following:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
b.
Location.
c.
Make and type.
d.
Model number and unit size.
e.
f.
Fuel type in input data.
g.
Output capacity in Btu/h
h.
Ignition type.
i.
Burner-control types.
j.
Motor horsepower and rpm.
k.
Motor volts, phase, and hertz.
l.
Motor full-load amperage and service factor.
m.
n.
2.
Page - 12
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
Total air flow rate in cfm.
Entering-air temperature in deg F.
Leaving-air temperature in deg F.
Air temperature differential in deg F
Entering-air static pressure in inches wg.
Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg.
Air static-pressure differential in inches wg.
Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h.
High-fire fuel input in Btu/h.
Manifold pressure in psig.
High-temperature-limit setting in deg F.
Operating set point in Btu/h.
Motor voltage at each connection.
Motor amperage for each phase.
Heating value of fuel in Btu/h.
H.
Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in
central-station air-handling units, include the following:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
b.
Location.
c.
Coil identification.
d.
Capacity in Btu/h.
e.
Number of stages.
f.
Connected volts, phase, and hertz.
g.
Rated amperage.
h.
Air flow rate in cfm.
i.
Face area in sq. ft.
j.
Minimum face velocity in fpm.
2.
a.
Heat output in Btu/h.
b.
c.
Air velocity in fpm.
d.
e.
f.
Voltage at each connection.
g.
Amperage for each phase.
I.
Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1.
Fan Data:
a.
b.
Location.
c.
Make and type.
d.
Model number and size.
e.
f.
Arrangement and class.
g.
h.
2.
Motor Data:
a.
Motor make, and frame type and size.
b.
Horsepower and rpm.
Page - 13
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.
c.
Volts, phase, and hertz.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Number, make, and size of belts.
a.
Total airflow rate in cfm.
b.
Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c.
Fan rpm.
d.
Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e.
Suction static pressure in inches wg.
J.
Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1.
Report Data:
a.
System and air-handling-unit number.
b.
Location and zone.
c.
Traverse air temperature in deg F.
d.
Duct static pressure in inches wg.
e.
Duct size in inches.
f.
Duct area in sq. ft..
g.
Indicated air flow rate in cfm.
h.
Indicated velocity in fpm.
i.
Actual air flow rate in cfm.
j.
Actual average velocity in fpm.
k.
Barometric pressure in psig.
K.
Air-Terminal-Device Reports:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
System and air-handling unit identification.
b.
Location and zone.
c.
Apparatus used for test.
d.
Area served.
e.
Make.
f.
Number from system diagram.
g.
Type and model number.
h.
Size.
i.
Effective area in sq. ft.
2.
a.
b.
Air velocity in fpm.
c.
Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm.
d.
Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.
e.
Final air flow rate in cfm.
f.
Final velocity in fpm.
g.
Space temperature in deg F.
L.
System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
System and air-handling-unit identification.
b.
Location and zone.
Page - 14
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
c.
Room or riser served.
d.
Coil make and size.
e.
Flowmeter type.
a.
b.
Entering-water temperature in deg F.
c.
Leaving-water temperature in deg F.
d.
Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig.
e.
f.
M.
Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and
include the following:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
Unit identification.
b.
Location.
c.
Service.
d.
Make and size.
e.
Model number and serial number.
f.
Water flow rate in gpm.
g.
Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
h.
Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig.
i.
Pump rpm.
j.
Impeller diameter in inches.
k.
Motor make and frame size.
l.
Motor horsepower and rpm.
m.
n.
o.
p.
Seal type.
2.
a.
Static head in feet of head or psig.
b.
Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.
c.
Actual impeller size in inches.
d.
Full-open flow rate in gpm.
e.
Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig.
f.
Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.
g.
Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig
h.
Final total pressure in feet of head or psig.
i.
Final water flow rate in gpm.
j.
k.
N.
Instrument Calibration Reports:
1.
Report Data:
a.
Instrument type and make.
b.
Serial number.
c.
Application.
d.
Dates of use.
e.
Dates of calibration.
Page - 15
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.14
INSPECTIONS
A.
Initial Inspection:
1.
After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check
measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance
readings documented in the final report.
2.
Check the following for each system:
a.
Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.
b.
Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.
c.
Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the
reading to the set point.
d.
Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
e.
Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.
B.
Final Inspection:
1.
After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that
testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request
that a final inspection be made by the engineer.
2.
The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the
presence of the engineer and construction manager.
3.
Engineer shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be
rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements
recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour
business day.
4.
If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the
final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as
"FAILED."
5.
If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total
measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be
considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
C.
TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails,
proceed as follows:
1.
Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing
device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final
inspection.
2.
If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB
contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the
cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.
D.
3.15
ADDITIONAL TESTS
A.
Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions
are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B.
Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
Page - 16
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
Page - 17
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes insulating the following duct services:
1.
Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
2.
Indoor, exposed supply and return air.
3.
Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 23 Section "HVAC Equipment Insulation."
2.
Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor
permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2.
Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges for each
type of insulation.
3.
Detail application of field-applied jackets.
4.
Detail application at linkages of control devices.
C.
Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing
product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:
1.
Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches square.
2.
Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches square.
3.
Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range
of colors available for each type of finish material.
D.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
E.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include
dates of tests and test methods employed.
Page – 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
F.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship
program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes,
and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
2.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
1.5
A.
1.6
Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before
preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for
installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for
maintenance.
C.
Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum
Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule"
articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
Page – 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
D.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
F.
Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply
with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel.
b.
Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c.
K-Flex USA; Insul-Sheet, K-Flex Gray Duct Liner, and K-FLEX LS.
G.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK
jacket Type III with factory-applied FSP jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are
specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1.
a.
CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap.
b.
Johns Manville; Microlite.
c.
Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap.
d.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
e.
Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.
H.
Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide
insulation with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in
"Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1.
a.
CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.
b.
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.
c.
Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.
d.
Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.
e.
Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.
f.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
2.2
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
1.
a.
Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal.
b.
Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive.
c.
Company; 85-75.
d.
K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive.
2.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
Page – 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
C.
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1.
a.
Company; CP-127.
b.
c.
Company; 85-60/85-70.
d.
2.
D.
ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for
bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1.
a.
Company; CP-82.
b.
c.
Company; 85-50.
d.
2.
E.
PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
1.
a.
Dow Corning Corporation; 739, Dow Silicone.
b.
Johns Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.
c.
P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.
d.
Speedline Corporation; Polyco VP Adhesive.
2.
2.3
MASTICS
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
B.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1.
a.
Company; 30-80/30-90.
b.
Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry
film thickness.
3.
4.
5.
Color: White.
C.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1.
Page – 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Company; CP-30.
b.
c.
Company; 30-35.
d.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.
Color: White.
D.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.
1.
a.
Company; Encacel.
b.
c.
Company; 60-95/60-96.
2.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness.
3.
4.
5.
Color: White.
E.
Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
1.
a.
Company; CP-10.
b.
c.
Company; 46-50.
d.
e.
Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.
2.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.
3.
4.
Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.
5.
Color: White.
2.4
LAGGING ADHESIVES
A.
Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1.
For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.
a.
Company; CP-50 AHV2.
b.
Company; 30-36.
c.
Vimasco Corporation; 713 and 714.
Page – 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fireresistant lagging cloths over duct insulation.
Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.
Color: White.
SEALANTS
A.
FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
a.
Company; CP-76.
b.
c.
Company; 95-44.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Color: Aluminum.
6.
For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
B.
ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
a.
Company; CP-76.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Color: White.
6.
For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
2.6
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When
factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1.
ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2.
ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
3.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;
4.
FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing;
5.
Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to
ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
Page – 6
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.7
FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
A.
Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 5 strands by 5
strands/sq. in. for covering ducts.
1.
a.
Company; Chil-Glas No. 5.
B.
Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10
strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for ducts.
1.
a.
Company; Mast-A-Fab.
b.
Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.
2.8
FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS
A.
2.9
Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a
minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd.
1.
a.
Alpha Associates, Inc.; Alpha-Maritex 84215 and 84217/9485RW, Luben 59.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.
2.10
TAPES
A.
ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
1.
a.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.
b.
c.
d.
Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
2.
Width: 3 inches.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B.
FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
1.
a.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK.
Page – 7
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
b.
c.
d.
Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.
Width: 3 inches.
FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C.
PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive;
suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1.
a.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape.
b.
c.
Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.
2.
Width: 2 inches.
3.
Thickness: 6 mils.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following
a.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF.
b.
c.
d.
Venture Tape; 3520 CW.
2.
Width: 2 inches.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.11
SECUREMENTS
A.
Bands:
1.
a.
ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.
b.
RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.
2.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015
inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
3.
Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch
thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
4.
Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept
metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
B.
Insulation Pins and Hangers:
Page – 8
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for
capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation
indicated.
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following
1)
AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.
2)
GEMCO; CD.
3)
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD.
4)
Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.
Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully
annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth
of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.
a.
1)
AGM Industries, Inc.; CHP-1.
2)
GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin.
3)
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head.
4)
Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.
Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to
projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in
position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
a.
1)
AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Perforated Base Insul-Hangers.
2)
GEMCO; Perforated Base.
3)
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.
b.
Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches
square.
c.
Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inchdiameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
d.
Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without
damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened
to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely
in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
a.
1)
GEMCO; Nylon Hangers.
2)
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers.
b.
Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
c.
Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation
indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches.
d.
Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without
damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is
capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when
self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
a.
1)
AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Self-Adhering Insul-Hangers.
2)
GEMCO; Peel & Press.
3)
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick.
Page – 9
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
b.
c.
6.
7.
Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inchdiameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
d.
Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick,
galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in
place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a.
1)
AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.
2)
GEMCO; R-150.
3)
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.
4)
Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.
b.
Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place
but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
GEMCO.
2)
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.
C.
Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.
D.
Wire: 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) soft-annealed, stainless steel.
1.
following:
a.
C & F Wire.
2.12
CORNER ANGLES
A.
PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.
B.
Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch aluminum according to
ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.
C.
Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according
to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1.
Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.
2.
Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
Page – 10
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.
B.
Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for
each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
H.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
I.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1.
2.
3.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
J.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
K.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2.
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
Page – 11
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.
4.
5.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive
self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a.
For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
L.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
M.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
N.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
3.4
PENETRATIONS
A.
Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof
penetrations.
1.
2.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface
3.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of
roof flashing.
4.
Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations:
Install insulation
continuously through wall penetrations.
1.
2.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface
3.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at
least 2 inches.
4.
Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
C.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
D.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at
fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper
sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.
1.
Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping"irestopping
and fire-resistive joint sealers.
Page – 12
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
E.
3.5
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1.
Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper
sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct
insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.
2.
Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
A.
3.6
Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A.
Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation
pins.
1.
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2.
Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3.
Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitordischarge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a.
On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
b.
On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c.
Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d.
Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e.
Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
f.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
4.
For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch
o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vaporbarrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a.
Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vaporbarrier seal.
b.
Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the
insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.
Page – 13
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
5.
6.
7.
B.
Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.
At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1.
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2.
Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3.
Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitordischarge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a.
On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
b.
On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c.
Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d.
Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
4.
For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch
o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vaporbarrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a.
Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vaporbarrier seal.
b.
Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the
insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.
5.
Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and
inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with
individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
6.
Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
Page – 14
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.7
FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A.
Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory-applied jackets.
1.
Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.
2.
Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive.
3.
Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.
B.
Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1.
Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2.
Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
3.
Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4.
Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at
end joints.
5.
Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation
with vapor-barrier mastic.
C.
Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks
and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1.
Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the
finish bead along seam and joint edge.
D.
Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof
sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12
inches o.c. and at end joints.
3.8
FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and
supports to maintain a continuous fire rating.
B.
Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.
C.
Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.
specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.9
Fire-stop systems are
FINISHES
A.
Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint
system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
1.
Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket
material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a.
Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B.
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
Page – 15
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
C.
Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
D.
Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.10
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
C.
1.
Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and
insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be
limited to one location for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule,
General" Article.
D.
All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements.
3.11
DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1.
Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
2.
Indoor, exposed supply and return air.
3.
Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.
4.
Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space.
B.
Items Not Insulated:
1.
Fibrous-glass ducts.
2.
Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
3.
Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
4.
5.
Vibration-control devices.
6.
Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
3.12
INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
Concealed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
B.
Concealed, round and flat-oval, return-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1.
C.
Concealed, round and flat-oval, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 1-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
D.
Concealed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
Page – 16
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
E.
Concealed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1.
F.
Concealed, rectangular, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1.
G.
Concealed, supply-air plenum insulation shall be the following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
H.
Concealed, return-air plenum insulation shall be[ the following:
1.
I.
Exposed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1.
J.
Exposed, round and flat-oval, return-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1.
K.
Exposed, round and flat-oval, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 1-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
L.
Exposed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1.
M.
Exposed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1.
N.
Exposed, rectangular, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
O.
Exposed, supply-air plenum insulation shall be the following:
1.
P.
Exposed, return-air plenum insulation shall be the following:
1.
Q.
Exposed, outdoor-air plenum insulation shall be the following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
Page – 17
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.
2.
Barometric relief dampers.
3.
Manual volume dampers.
4.
Control dampers.
5.
Fire dampers.
6.
Smoke dampers.
7.
Combination fire and smoke dampers.
8.
Flange connectors.
9.
Duct Silencers.
10. Turning Vanes.
11. Remote damper operators.
12. Duct mounted access doors.
13. Flexible connectors.
14. Flexible ducts.
15. Duct accessory hardware.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 23 Section "HVAC Gravity Ventilators" for roof-mounted ventilator caps.
2.
Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" for duct-mounted fire and smoke
detectors.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.
For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data.
breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.
Include
Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and
attachments to other work.
1.
Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.
Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field
assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:
a.
Special fittings.
b.
Manual volume damper installations.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
c.
d.
e.
f.
Control damper installations.
Fire-damper, smoke-damper, combination fire- and smoke-damper, ceiling, and
corridor damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors
and remote damper operators.
Duct security bars.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted
access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and
coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved.
D.
E.
F.
Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
G.
Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.
For air duct accessories to include in operation and
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1.
Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 or G90.
2.
Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
C.
Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2
finish for concealed ducts and No. 4 finish for exposed ducts.
D.
Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for
concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
E.
Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.
F.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
G.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.2
BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS
A.
following:
1.
Duro Dyne Inc.
2.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
3.
Nailor Industries Inc.
4.
Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
5.
Ruskin Company.
B.
Description: Gravity balanced.
C.
Maximum Air Velocity: 3000 fpm.
D.
Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg.
E.
Frame: 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel 0.052-inch- thick stainless steel, with welded
corners and mounting flange.
F.
Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center-pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.050-inch- thick
aluminum sheet with sealed edges.
G.
Blade Action: Parallel.
H.
Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked.
I.
Blade Axles:
1.
Material: Stainless steel.
2.
Diameter: 0.20 inch.
J.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
K.
Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
L.
Bearings: Steel ball.
M.
Accessories:
1.
Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
2.
Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.
3.
Electric actuators.
4.
Chain pulls.
5.
Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.
a.
Sleeve Thickness: 20-gage minimum.
b.
Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum.
6.
Screen Mounting: Rear mounted.
7.
Screen Material: Galvanized steel.
8.
Screen Type: Bird.
9.
90-degree stops.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.3
BAROMETRIC RELIEF DAMPERS
A.
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
1.
Duro Dyne Inc.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Ruskin Company.
B.
Suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.
C.
D.
Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg.
E.
Frame: 0.063-inch- thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners and mounting flange.
F.
Blades:
1.
Multiple, 0.025-inch- thick, roll-formed aluminum.
2.
Maximum Width: 6 inches.
3.
Action: Parallel.
4.
Balance: Gravity.
5.
Eccentrically pivoted.
G.
Blade Seals: Neoprene.
H.
Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
I.
Tie Bars and Brackets:
1.
Material: Galvanized steel.
2.
Rattle free with 90-degree stop.
J.
Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
K.
Bearings: Stainless steel.
L.
Accessories:
1.
Flange on intake.
2.
Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressures.
2.4
MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A.
Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:
1.
following:
a.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
b.
c.
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
d.
Ruskin Company.
e.
Trox USA Inc.
Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.
Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
Frames:
a.
Hat-shaped, galvanized-steel channels, 0.064-inch minimum thickness.
b.
Mitered and welded corners.
c.
Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
Blades:
a.
Multiple or single blade.
b.
Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
c.
Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d.
Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.
Blade Axles: Stainless steel.
Bearings:
a.
Stainless-steel sleeve.
b.
Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full
length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
Low-Leakage, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:
1.
following:
a.
b.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
c.
d.
e.
Ruskin Company.
f.
Trox USA Inc.
2.
Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified
Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.
3.
Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
4.
Frames:
a.
Angle shaped.
b.
Galvanized-steel channels, 0.064 inch thick.
c.
d.
Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
5.
Blades:
a.
Multiple or single blade.
b.
Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
c.
Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d.
Galvanized, roll-formed steel, 0.064 inch thick.
6.
Blade Axles: Stainless steel.
7.
Bearings:
a.
b.
Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full
length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
8.
Blade Seals: Neoprene.
9.
Jamb Seals: Cambered aluminum.
10. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
11. Accessories:
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
a.
Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without
vibration.
C.
Jackshaft:
1.
Size: 1-inch diameter.
2.
Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on
supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
3.
Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in
multiple-damper assembly.
D.
Damper Hardware:
1.
Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated steel,
and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.
2.
Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.
3.
Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
2.5
CONTROL DAMPERS
A.
following:
1.
Duro Dyne Inc.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Ruskin Company.
6.
Young Regulator Company.
B.
Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal
for both air performance and air leakage.
C.
Frames:
1.
Angle shaped.
2.
Galvanized-steel channels, 0.064 inch thick.
3.
D.
Blades:
1.
Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches.
2.
Parallel-blade design.
3.
Galvanized steel.
4.
0.064 inch thick.
5.
Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene edging.
6.
Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.
E.
Blade Axles: 1/2-inchdiameter; nonferrous metal; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel
and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.
1.
Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
F.
Bearings:
1.
Page - 6
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
3.
2.6
Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of
damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
FIRE DAMPERS
A.
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ruskin Company.
B.
Type: Static or dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.
C.
Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm velocity.
D.
Fire Rating: Refer to architectural drawings.
E.
Frame: Curtain type with blades inside airstream Curtain type with blades outside airstream
except when located behind grille where blades may be inside airstream; fabricated with rollformed, 0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
F.
Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.
1.
Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit
application.
2.
Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must
comply with sleeve requirements.
G.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
H.
Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of
interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.
I.
Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.
J.
Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.
2.7
SMOKE DAMPERS
A.
following:
1.
2.
3.
Ruskin Company.
B.
General Requirements: Label according to UL 555S by an NRTL.
C.
Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.
Page - 7
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
D.
Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream except when located behind grille where
blades may be inside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel;
with mitered and interlocking corners.
E.
Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In
place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade
connectors.
F.
Leakage: Class I or Class II.
G.
Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.
H.
Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit
wall or floor application with factory-furnished silicone calking.
I.
Damper Motors: two-position action.
J.
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1.
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical
devices and connections specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control
for HVAC."
3.
Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear
trains.
4.
Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated.
Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or
adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating
of 150 in. x lbf.
5.
Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed
to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal
operation at minus 40 deg F.
6.
Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running
torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf.
7.
Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.
2.8
COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
A.
following:
1.
2.
3.
Ruskin Company.
B.
Type: Static; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S by an NRTL.
C.
Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm velocity.
Page - 8
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
D.
Fire Rating: 3 hours.
E.
F.
Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.
G.
Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.
H.
I.
Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In
place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade
connectors.
J.
Leakage: Class I or Class II.
K.
Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.
L.
Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit
wall or floor application with factory-furnished silicone calking.
M.
Master control panel for use in dynamic smoke-management systems.
N.
Damper Motors: two-position action.
O.
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor
1.
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical
devices and connections specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control
for HVAC."
3.
Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear
trains.
4.
Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated.
Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or
adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating
of 150 in. x lbf.
5.
Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed
to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal
operation at minus 40 deg F.
6.
Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running
torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf.
7.
Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.
Page - 9
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.9
FLANGE CONNECTORS
A.
following:
1.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2.
Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.
3.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B.
Description: roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and
components.
C.
Material: Galvanized steel.
D.
Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.
2.10
DUCT SILENCERS
A.
1.
Industrial Noise Control, Inc.
2.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
3.
Ruskin Company.
4.
Vibro-Acoustics.
B.
1.
Factory fabricated.
2.
Fire-Performance Characteristics: Adhesives, sealants, packing materials, and accessory
materials shall have flame-spread index not exceeding 25 and smoke-developed index not
exceeding 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
3.
Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
C.
Shape:
1.
Rectangular straight with splitters or baffles.
2.
Round straight with center bodies or pods.
3.
Rectangular elbow with splitters or baffles.
4.
Round elbow with center bodies or pods.
5.
Rectangular transitional with splitters or baffles.
D.
Rectangular Silencer Outer Casing: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 or G60, galvanized sheet steel,
0.034 inch thick.
E.
Round Silencer Outer Casing: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 or G60, galvanized sheet steel.
1.
Sheet Metal Thickness for Units up to 24 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch thick.
2.
Sheet Metal Thickness for Units 26 through 40 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch thick.
3.
4.
F.
Inner Casing and Baffles: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 or G60 galvanized sheet metal, 0.034
inch thick, and with 1/8-inchdiameter perforations.
Page - 10
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
G.
Special Construction:
1.
Suitable for outdoor use.
2.
High transmission loss.
H.
Connection Sizes: Match connecting ductwork unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Principal Sound-Absorbing Mechanism:
1.
Controlled impedance membranes and broadly tuned resonators without absorptive
media.
2.
Lining: None.
J.
Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or otherwise react to
system pressure variations. Do not use mechanical fasteners for unit assemblies.
1.
Lock form and seal or continuously weld joints or Flange connections.
2.
Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to frame in
quantities and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion.
3.
Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension.
K.
Source Quality Control: Test according to ASTM E 477.
1.
Testing of mockups to be witnessed by Engineer.
2.
Record acoustic ratings, including dynamic insertion loss and generated-noise power
levels with an airflow of at least 2000-fpm face velocity.
3.
Leak Test: Test units for airtightness at 200 percent of associated fan static pressure or 6inch wg static pressure, whichever is greater.
2.11
TURNING VANES
A.
following:
1.
2.
Duro Dyne Inc.
3.
METALAIRE, Inc.
4.
SEMCO Incorporated.
5.
B.
Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support
with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1.
Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated
faces and fibrous-glass fill.
C.
Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded
fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into
vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
D.
General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
E.
Vane Construction: Single wall.
Page - 11
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
F.
2.12
Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger
dimensions.
REMOTE DAMPER OPERATORS
A.
following:
1.
2.
Young Regulator Company.
B.
Description: Cable system designed for remote manual damper adjustment.
C.
Tubing: Brass.
D.
Cable: Stainless steel.
E.
Wall-Box Mounting: Recessed, 3/4 inches deep.
F.
Wall-Box Cover-Plate Material: Steel.
2.13
DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
A.
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"
and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."
1.
Door:
a.
Double wall, rectangular.
b.
Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct
pressure class.
c.
Vision panel.
d.
Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
e.
Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
2.
Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
3.
Number of Hinges and Locks:
a.
Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.
b.
Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
c.
Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression
latches with outside and inside handles.
d.
Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression
latches with outside and inside handles.
Page - 12
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
C.
2.14
Pressure Relief Access Door:
1.
Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel.
2.
Door: Double wall with insulation fill with metal thickness applicable for duct pressure
class.
3.
Operation: Open outward for positive-pressure ducts and inward for negative-pressure
ducts.
4.
Factory set at 10-inch wg.
5.
Doors close when pressures are within set-point range.
6.
Hinge: Continuous piano.
7.
Latches: Cam.
8.
Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber.
9.
Insulation Fill: 1-inch- thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES
A.
following:
1.
2.
Flame Gard, Inc.
3.
3M.
B.
Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.
C.
Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel.
D.
Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.
E.
Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for
minimum 2000 deg F.
F.
Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.
2.15
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
following:
1.
2.
Duro Dyne Inc.
3.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
4.
B.
Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
C.
Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
D.
Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2
strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick
aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
Page - 13
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
E.
Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1.
Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..
2.
Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
3.
Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
F.
Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof,
synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1.
2.
3.
G.
High-Temperature System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber.
1.
2.
3.
H.
High-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with chemicalresistant coating.
1.
2.
3.
I.
Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in
compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan
discharge and duct.
1.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of
30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2.
Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
3.
4.
5.
6.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7.
Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at
start and stop.
2.16
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A.
1.
2.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
3.
B.
Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film.
1.
Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.
2.
3.
Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.
Page - 14
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
4.
Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
C.
Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film.
1.
Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative.
2.
3.
Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F.
4.
Insulation R-Value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
D.
Flexible Duct Connectors:
1.
Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a
worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.
2.
Non-Clamp Connectors: Adhesive plus sheet metal screws.
2.17
DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A.
Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap
and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to
suit duct-insulation thickness.
B.
Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline
and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous
Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B.
Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in
galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and
aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C.
Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust
fan unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend
from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with
hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.
1.
Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.
2.
Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.
E.
Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
F.
Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G.
Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing.
Page - 15
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
H.
Install duct security bars. Construct duct security bars from 0.164-inch steel sleeve,
continuously welded at all joints and 1/2-inchdiameter steel bars, 6 inches o.c. in each
direction in center of sleeve. Weld each bar to steel sleeve and each crossing bar. Weld 2-1/2by-2-1/2-by-1/4-inch steel angle to 4 sides and both ends of sleeve. Connect duct security bars
to ducts with flexible connections. Provide 12-by-12-inch hinged access panel with cam lock in
duct in each side of sleeve.
I.
Connect ducts to duct silencers with flexible duct connectors or rigidly.
J.
Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining
accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1.
On both sides of duct coils.
2.
Upstream and downstream from duct filters.
3.
At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.
4.
At drain pans and seals.
5.
Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and
equipment.
6.
Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.
Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure
relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream
from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.
7.
At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing.
8.
Upstream and downstream from turning vanes.
9.
Upstream or downstream from duct silencers.
10. Control devices requiring inspection.
11. Elsewhere as indicated.
K.
Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
L.
Access Door Sizes:
1.
One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.
2.
Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
3.
Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.
4.
Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.
5.
Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.
6.
Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.
M.
Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.
N.
Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
O.
For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with
loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
P.
Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not
use flexible ducts to change directions.
Q.
Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct
clamped or strapped in place.
Page - 16
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
R.
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws.
S.
Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
T.
Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach
thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start
and stop of fans.
3.2
A.
1.
Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.
2.
Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be
performed.
3.
Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of
movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.
4.
Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
5.
Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and
damper.
Page - 17
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 233416 - CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
1.
Adjust list below to suit Project.
2.
Airfoil centrifugal fans.
3.
Backward-inclined centrifugal fans.
4.
Forward-curved centrifugal fans.
5.
Plenum fans.
6.
Plug fans.
A.
Project Altitude: Base fan performance ratings on actual Project site elevations above sea level.
B.
Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated and include the following:
1.
Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2.
Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3.
Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
4.
Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
5.
Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
2.
Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic
restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
3.
Vibration Isolation Base Details:
Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and
rails, and base weights.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
C.
Coordination Drawings: Show fan room layout and relationships between components and
adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and
weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
D.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For centrifugal fans to include in emergency, operation, and
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
intended use.
B.
AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be
licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C.
NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA 1.
1.6
A.
Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.
B.
Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location, according to
C.
Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
B.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
C.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.8
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Belts: One set for each belt-driven unit.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
AIRFOIL CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A.
B.
following:
C.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or a comparable
product by one of the following:
1.
Chicago Blower Corporation.
2.1. Loren Cook Company.
3.2. Greenheck.
D.
Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven centrifugal fans
consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly,
and support structure.
E.
Housings: Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff, with doors or
panels to allow access to internal parts and components.
1.
Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and
supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.
2.
Horizontally split, bolted-flange housing.
3.
Spun inlet cone with flange.
4.
Outlet flange.
F.
Airfoil Wheels: Single-width-single-inlet and double-width-double-inlet construction with
curved inlet flange; heavy backplate; hollow die-formed, airfoil-shaped blades continuously
welded at tip flange and backplate; and cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate and
fastened to shaft with set screws; and special coating.
G.
Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at maximum
rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1.
Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with protective coating
of lubricating oil.
2.
Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed
range.
H.
Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings.
1.
Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, Ll0 at 12050,000 hours.
2.
Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, Ll0 at 12050,000 hours.
I.
Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
1.
Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5.
2.
Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at
factory.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.
4.
5.
6.
Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use
with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range
at fan design conditions.
Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.
Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements of diamondmesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan
or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation. Include provisions for
adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place.
Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
J.
Accessories:
1.
Scroll Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick-opening latches and
gaskets.
2.
Cleanout Door: Bolted gasketed door allowing access to fan scroll, of same material as
housing.
3.
Scroll Drain Connection: NPS 1 steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan scroll.
4.
Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as housing.
5.
Variable Inlet Vanes: With blades supported at both ends with two permanently
lubricated bearings of same material as housing. Variable mechanism terminating in
single control lever with control shaft for double-width fans.
6.
Discharge Dampers: Assembly with opposed blades constructed of two plates formed
around and to shaft, channel frame, and sealed ball bearings; with blades linked outside
of airstream to single control lever of same material as housing.
7.
Inlet Screens: Grid screen of same material as housing.
8.
Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate heat
from shaft.
9.
Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99.
10. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans.
11. Weather Cover: Enameled-steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing.
K.
Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for
HVAC Equipment."
1.
Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
L.
Capacities And Characteristics:
1.
Housing Material: Aluminum.
2.
Wheel Material: Aluminum or as required based on construction class.
3.
Drive Type: Belt.
4.
Vibration Isolators: Spring isolators or studs with rubber neoprene.
5.
Spark Arrestance Class: Exhaust fans serving batteries, EF-CP4 and EF-CP5 shall be
Class B. Remaining exhaust fans shall be Class A construction.
2.2
BACKWARD-INCLINED CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A.
B.
following:
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
C.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or a comparable
product by one of the following:
1.
2.1. Loren Cook Company.
3.2. Greenheck.
D.
Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven centrifugal fans
consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly,
and support structure.
E.
Housings: Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff; with doors or
panels to allow access to internal parts and components.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Outlet flange.
F.
Backward-Inclined Wheels:
Single-width-single-inlet and double-width-double-inlet
construction with curved inlet flange, backplate, backward-inclined blades welded or riveted to
flange and backplate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate and fastened to shaft with
set screws.
G.
Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at maximum
rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1.
Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective
coating of lubricating oil.
2.
range.
H.
Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings.
1.
2.
I.
Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, tapered roller bearings
with double-locking collars and two-piece, cast-iron housing.
1.
2.
J.
Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
1.
2.
factory.
3.
4.
5.
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
6.
K.
Accessories:
1.
Scroll Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick-opening latches and
gaskets.
2.
Cleanout Door: Bolted gasketed door allowing access to fan scroll, of same material as
housing.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Discharge Dampers: Assembly with opposed blades constructed of two plates formed
7.
8.
from shaft.
9.
L.
Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for
HVAC Equipment."
1.
M.
2.3
Capacities And Characteristics:
1.
Housing Material: Aluminum.
2.
Wheel Material: Aluminum or as required based on construction class.
3.
Drive Type: Belt.
4.
Vibration Isolators: Spring isolators or studs with rubber neoprene.
5.
Spark Arrestance Class: Exhaust fans serving batteries, EF-CP4 and EF-CP5 shall be
Class B. Remaining fans shall be Class A construction.
FORWARD-CURVED CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A.
following.
1.
Retain "Basis-of-Design Product" Paragraph and list of manufacturers below to identify a
specific product or a comparable product from manufacturers listed. Retain option and
delete insert note if manufacturer's name and model number are indicated on Drawings.
2.
Review list below if AMCA-certified fans are required; not all manufacturers are AMCA
members.
3.
Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.
4.
Loren Cook Company.
5.
Greenheck.
6.
New York Blower Company (The).
Page - 6
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
Description:
1.
2.
3.
Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven centrifugal fans
consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor, drive assembly, and support
structure.
Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations.
Factory-installed and -wired disconnect switch.
C.
Housings:
1.
Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Outlet flange.
D.
Forward-Curved Wheels:
1.
2.
E.
Black-enameled or galvanized-steel construction with inlet flange, backplate, shallow
blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow.
Mechanically secured to flange and backplate; cast-steel hub swaged to backplate and
fastened to shaft with set screws.
Shafts:
1.
2.
3.
Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at maximum
rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning.
of lubricating oil.
range.
F.
Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings:
1.
Self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings.
2.
3.
G.
Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings:
1.
2.
3.
H.
Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, tapered roller bearings with double-locking collars and
two-piece, cast-iron housing.
1.
2.
3.
Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball or roller bearings with adapter mount and twopiece, cast-iron housing.
Page - 7
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
I.
Belt Drives:
1.
Factory mounted, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning.
2.
3.
factory.
4.
5.
6.
7.
J.
Accessories:
1.
Retain applicable accessories below. Verify availability with manufacturers.
2.
Retain "Access for Inspection, Cleaning, and Maintenance" Subparagraph below if
applying for LEED certification. LEED Prerequisite EQ 1 requires compliance with
ASHRAE 62.1, which includes requirements for equipment access for inspection,
cleaning, and maintenance.
3.
Access for Inspection, Cleaning, and Maintenance: Comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Discharge Dampers: Assembly with parallel blades constructed of two plates formed
8.
9.
from shaft.
10. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99.
2.42.3
A.
PLENUM FANS
following:
1.
2.
members.
3.1. Aerovent; a Twin City Fan company.
4.
5.
CML Northern Blower Inc.
Page - 8
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
6.
7.2.
8.3.
B.
Howden Buffalo Inc.
Loren Cook Company.
Description:
1.
2.
3.
consisting of wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor, drive assembly, and support structure.
C.
Airfoil Wheels:
1.
Single-width-single-inlet construction with smooth-curved inlet flange.
2.
Heavy backplate.
3.
Hollow die-formed, airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange and
backplate.
4.
Cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws.
D.
Shafts:
1.
2.
3.
Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at maximumrated fan speed and motor horsepower, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning.
of lubricating oil.
range.
E.
1.
2.
3.
F.
1.
2.
3.
G.
1.
2.
3.
H.G. Belt Drives:
1.
2.
Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5
3.
factory.
Page - 9
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
4.
5.
6.
7.
I.H.
2.5
Accessories:
1.
2.
from shaft.
3.
4.
Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans.
PLUG FANS
A.
following:
1.
2.
members.
3.
Aerovent; a Twin City Fan company.
4.
5.
ACME Fan.
6.
Greenheck.
7.
Howden Buffalo Inc.
8.
Loren Cook Company.
9.
B.
Description:
1.
consisting of wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor, drive assembly, and support structure.
2.
3.
C.
Airfoil Wheels:
1.
Single-width-single-inlet construction with smooth-curved inlet flange.
2.
Heavy backplate.
3.
Hollow die-formed, airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange and
backplate.
4.
Cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws.
D.
Shafts:
Page - 10
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
2.
3.
Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at maximum
rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning.
of lubricating oil.
range.
E.
1.
2.
3.
F.
1.
2.
3.
G.
1.
2.
3.
H.
Belt Drives:
1.
2.
3.
factory.
4.
5.
6.
7.
I.
Accessories:
1.
2.
from shaft.
3.
4.
Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans.
Page - 11
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.6
A.
Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B.
Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation,
and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of
Testing Fans for Rating."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install centrifugal fans level and plumb.
B.
Support floor-mounting units using spring isolators or as indicated in Par 2 having a static
deflection of 1 inch. Vibration- and seismic-control devices are specified in Division 23
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
1.
Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in
concrete base.
C.
Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
D.
Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases designed to withstand, without damage to
equipment, the seismic force required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
E.
Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers with
vertical-limit stops having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-control devices are specified
in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
F.
Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
G.
Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC
Piping and Equipment."
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section
"Air Duct Accessories."
B.
Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance.
Page - 12
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
C.
Install line-sized piping from scroll drain connection, with trap with seal equal to 1.5 times
specified static pressure, to nearest floor drain.
D.
Systems."
E.
and Cables."
3.3
A.
1.
Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2.
Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
3.
Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4.
Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan
wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and
adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5.
Adjust belt tension.
6.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
7.
Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
8.
Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
9.
Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing,
adjusting, and balancing procedures.
10. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
B.
Test and adjust controls and safeties.
equipment.
3.4
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fans. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and
Training."
Page - 13
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Round ceiling diffusers.
2.
Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers.
3.
Drum louvers.
4.
Adjustable bar registers and grilles.
5.
Fixed face registers and grilles.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 089000 "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents,
whether or not they are connected to ducts.
2.
Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control
dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:
1.
Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
2.
Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location,
quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color
finishes.
C.
Samples for Verification: For diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's standard sizes
to verify color selected.
D.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:
1.
Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2.
Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3.
Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4.
Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
5.
Duct access panels.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
E.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CEILING DIFFUSERS
A.
Round Ceiling Diffuser:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Price Industries.
c.
Titus.
2.
Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.
3.
Finish: Baked enamel, white.
4.
Material: Prime coated steel and/or extended aluminum.
B.
Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Price Industries.
c.
Titus.
2.
3.
Material: Prime coated steel and/or extended aluminum.
2.2
HIGH-CAPACITY DIFFUSERS
A.
2.3
Drum Louver:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Price Industries.
c.
Titus.
2.
Airflow Principle: Extended distance for high airflow rates.
3.
Material: Aluminum, heavy gage extruded.
4.
Finish: White baked acrylic.
5.
Border: 1-1/4-inch width with countersunk screw holes.
6.
Gasket between drum and border.
7.
Body: Drum shaped; adjustable vertically.
8.
Blades: Individually adjustable horizontally.
REGISTERS AND GRILLES
A.
Adjustable Bar Register:
1.
following:
a.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.
b.
Price Industries.
c.
Titus.
B.
Adjustable Bar Grille:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Price Industries.
c.
Titus.
2.
C.
Fixed Face Register:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Price Industries.
c.
Titus.
2.
D.
Fixed Face Grille:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Price Industries.
c.
Titus.
2.
3.
2.4
A.
Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,
"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
equipment.
B.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,
and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make
final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels,
locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with
installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 235400 - FURNACES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
1.
Gas-fired and Electric furnaces and accessories complete with controls.
2.
Air filters.
3.
Humidifiers.
4.
Refrigeration components.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories for each of the following:
1.
Furnace.
2.
Thermostat.
3.
Humidistat.
4.
Air filter.
5.
Humidifier.
6.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
connection.
1.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For each furnace to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals for each of the following:
1.
Furnace and accessories complete with controls.
2.
Air filter.
3.
Humidifier.
4.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
intended use.
B.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and
Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
C.
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,
Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.
B.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
replace the following components of furnaces that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period:
1.
Warranty Period, Commencing on Date of Substantial Completion:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Furnace Heat Exchanger: 20 years.
Integrated Ignition and Blower Control Circuit Board: Five years.
Draft-Inducer Motor: Five years.
High-Efficiency Oil Furnace Burner: Three years.
Refrigeration Compressors: 10 years.
Evaporator and Condenser Coils: Five years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GAS-FIRED FURNACES
A.
following:
1.
Carrier Corporation; Div. of United Technologies Corp.
2.
Trane.
3.
York International Corp.; a division of Unitary Products Group.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
General Requirements for Gas-Fired, Noncondensing Furnaces: Factory assembled, piped,
wired, and tested; complying with ANSI Z21.47/CSA 2.3, "Gas-Fired Central Furnaces," and
with NFPA 54.
C.
Cabinet: Steel.
1.
Cabinet interior around heat exchanger shall be factory-installed insulation.
2.
Lift-out panels shall expose burners and all other items requiring access for maintenance.
3.
Factory paint external cabinets in manufacturer's standard color.
4.
D.
Fan: Centrifugal, factory balanced.
1.
Fan Motors:
Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor
E.
Type of Gas: Natural.
F.
Heat Exchanger: Stainless steel.
G.
Burner:
1.
Gas Valve: 100 percent safety modulating main gas valve, main shutoff valve, pressure
regulator, safety pilot with electronic flame sensor, limit control, transformer, and
combination ignition/fan timer control board.
2.
Ignition: Electric pilot ignition, with hot-surface igniter or electric spark ignition.
H.
Gas-Burner Safety Controls:
1.
Electronic Flame Sensor: Prevents gas valve from opening until pilot flame is proven;
stops gas flow on ignition failure.
2.
Flame Rollout Switch: Installed on burner box; prevents burner operation.
3.
Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting; de-energizes burner on
excessive bonnet temperature; automatic reset.
I.
Combustion-Air Inducer: Centrifugal fan with thermally protected motor and sleeve bearings
prepurges heat exchanger and vents combustion products; pressure switch prevents furnace
operation if combustion-air inlet or flue outlet is blocked.
J.
Furnace Controls: Solid-state board integrates ignition, heat, cooling, and fan speeds; and
adjustable fan-on and fan-off timing; terminals for connection to accessories.
K.
Vent Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 235100 "Breechings, Chimneys, and
Stacks" for Type B metal vents.
2.2
ELECTRIC FURNACES
A.
following:
1.
Carrier Corporation; Div. of United Technologies Corp.
2.
Trane
3.
York International Corp.; a division of Unitary Products Group.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
General Requirements for Electric Furnaces: Factory assembled, piped, wired, and tested.
C.
Cabinet: Steel, UL184 comply liner.
D.
Fan: Centrifugal, factory balanced, resilient mounted, direct drive.
1.
Fan Motors:
Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor
E.
Electric-Resistant Heating Elements: Helix-wound, nickel-chromium wire-heating elements in
ceramic insulators mounted on steel supports.
F.
Heating-Element Control: Sequencer relay with relay for each element; switches elements on
and off, with delay between each increment; initiates, stops, or changes fan speed.
G.
Summer Fan Switch: Connected to permit independent on-off switch of unit fan.
2.3
THERMOSTATS AND HUMIDISTATS
A.
Controls shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Controls."
B.
Solid-State Thermostat: Wall-mounting or Freestanding, programmable, microprocessor-based
unit with automatic or manual switching from heating to cooling, preferential rate control,
seven-day programmability with minimum of four temperature presets per day, and battery
backup protection against power failure for program settings.
C.
Single-Stage, Heating-Cooling Thermostat: Adjustable, heating-cooling, wall-mounting unit
with fan on-automatic selector.
D.
Two-Stage, Heating-Cooling Thermostat: Adjustable, heating-cooling, wall-mounting unit with
fan on-automatic selector.
E.
Two-Stage, Heating-Only Thermostat: Wall-mounting unit with fan on-automatic selector.
F.
Solid-State, Combination Thermostat and Humidistat: Wall-mounting or Freestanding,
programmable, microprocessor-based unit with automatic switching from heating to cooling
and humidifying to dehumidifying, preferential rate control, seven-day programmability with
minimum of four temperature presets per day, and battery backup protection against power
failure for program settings.
G.
Humidistat: Adjustable, wall or duct-mounting unit.
H.
Control Wiring: Unshielded twisted-pair cabling.
1.
No. 24 AWG, 100 ohm, four pair.
2.
Cable Jacket Color: Blue.
2.4
AIR FILTERS
A.
Washable Filters: 1-inch-thick, urethane pad.
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
Disposable Filters: 1-inch- thick fiberglass media with ASHRAE 52.2 MERV rating of 6 or
higher, in sheet metal frame.
C.
Charged Media Air Filters: Sheet metal housing arranged to be ducted in return-air duct
connection to furnace, generates electrostatic charge; MERV 10 rating.
D.
HEPA Air Filter Units: Sheet metal housing with fan arranged to be ducted to return-air duct
connection to furnace, with activated carbon prefilter, high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA)
disposable filter, and carbon VOC. HEPA shall be as follows:
1.
Standard: UL 586, "High-Efficiency, Particulate, Air Filter Units."
2.
Rating: ASHRAE 52.1, dust-spot efficiency of 65 percent; ASHRAE 52.2, 99.97 percent
efficiency to 0.03-micrometer particle size.
2.5
HUMIDIFIERS
A.
Selected humidifier shall comply with Texas Department of State Health Service (TDSHS)
requirements.
B.
Minimum capacity rating indicated according to ARI 610, "Central System Humidifiers for
Residential Applications."
C.
Media-wheel bypass type with bypass damper and motor-driven media wheel in reservoir with
float-valve level control; arranged for mounting on return duct or plenum with bypass
connection to supply duct.
D.
Wetted-pad, continuous-drain, bypass type with bypass damper and water-flow control orifice;
arranged for mounting on return duct or plenum with bypass connection to supply duct.
E.
Fan-powered, wetted-pad, continuous-drain type with water-flow control orifice and motor;
arranged for mounting on duct or plenum.
F.
Pumped, fan-powered, wetted-pad type with reservoir-level control and pump and fan motors;
arranged for mounting on duct or plenum.
G.
Steam type with electric heating element in stainless-steel reservoir with float-valve level
control; arranged for attachment to duct or plenum and for control by humidistat.
H.
Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
2.6
REFRIGERATION COMPONENTS
A.
General Refrigeration Component Requirements:
1.
Refrigeration compressor, coils, and specialties shall be designed to operate with CFCfree refrigerants.
2.
Energy Efficiency: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,
"Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
B.
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tubes mechanically expanded into aluminum fins. Comply with
ARI 210/240, "Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment." Match size
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
with furnace. Include condensate drain pan with accessible drain outlet complying with
ASHRAE 62.1.
1.
Refrigerant Coil Enclosure: Steel, matching furnace and evaporator coil, with access
panel and flanges for integral mounting at or on furnace cabinet and galvanized sheet
metal drain pan coated with black asphaltic base paint.
C.
Refrigerant Line Kits: Annealed-copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized with nitrogen, sealed, and with suction line insulated. Provide in standard lengths
for installation without joints, except at equipment connections.
1.
Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I, 1/2 inch.
D.
Refrigerant Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 232300 "Refrigerant Piping."
E.
Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Unit:
1.
Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls,
weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves,
fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
2.
Compressor: Hermetically sealed.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Crankcase heater.
Vibration isolation mounts for compressor.
Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start
capacitor, relay, and contactor.
Two-speed compressor motors shall have manual-reset high-pressure switch and
automatic-reset low-pressure switch.
Refrigerant Charge: R-410A.
Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying
with ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
Heat-Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature air cut-off thermostat.
Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F.
Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine factory-installed insulation before furnace installation. Reject units that are wet,
moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C.
Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before
equipment installation.
Page - 6
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
D.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install gas-fired furnaces and associated fuel and vent features and systems according to
NFPA 54.
B.
Install oil-fired furnaces and associated fuel and vent piping according to NFPA 31.
C.
Suspended Units: Suspend from structure using threaded rods, spring hangers, and building
attachments. Secure rods to unit hanger attachments. Adjust hangers so unit is level and
plumb.
1.
Install seismic restraints to limit movement of furnace by resisting code-required seismic
acceleration.
D.
Base-Mounted Units: Secure units to substrate. Provide optional bottom closure base if
required by installation conditions.
1.
Anchor furnace to substrate to resist code-required seismic acceleration.
E.
Controls: Install thermostats and humidistats at mounting height of 60 inches above floor.
F.
Wiring Method: Install control wiring in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board
partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal control wiring except in
unfinished spaces.
G.
Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- thick, reinforced
concrete base; 4 inches larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
are specified in Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete.” Coordinate anchor installation
with concrete base.
H.
Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting base.
I.
Install roof-mounted, compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in
Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmiumplated fasteners.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Gas piping installation requirements are specified in Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas
Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Connect gas
piping with union or flange and appliance connector valve.
B.
Oil piping installation requirements are specified in Section 231113 "Facility Fuel-Oil Piping."
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Connect oil piping
with union or flange and ball valve.
C.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
Page - 7
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
D.
in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,
fittings, and specialties. Connect water piping with union and ball valve.
E.
Vent Connection, Noncondensing, Gas-Fired Furnaces: Connect Type B vents to furnace vent
connection and extend outdoors. Type B vents and their installation requirements are specified
in Section 235100 "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks"
F.
Connect ducts to furnace with flexible connector. Comply with requirements in Section 233300
"Air Duct Accessories."
G.
Connect refrigerant tubing kits to refrigerant coil in furnace and to air-cooled, compressorcondenser unit.
1.
Flared Joints: Use ASME B16.26 fitting and flared ends, following procedures in CDA's
"Copper Tube Handbook."
2.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated,
to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
3.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and
Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
H.
Comply with requirements in Section 232300 "Refrigerant Piping" for installation and joint
construction of refrigerant piping.
3.4
A.
1.
Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection.
2.
Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for leaks.
Repair leaks, replace lost refrigerant and oil, and retest until no leaks exist.
3.
proper operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements.
4.
Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding.
5.
equipment.
B.
Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission
to structure.
3.5
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and
perform the following:
1.
Inspect for physical damage to unit casings.
2.
Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight.
3.
Clean units and inspect for construction debris.
4.
Verify that all bolts and screws are tight.
5.
Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections.
6.
Verify that controls are connected and operational.
Page - 8
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.
C.
Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions and complete manufacturer's
operational checklist.
D.
Measure and record airflows.
E.
Verify proper operation of capacity control device.
F.
After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings and adjust belt tension if any.
3.6
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
B.
Set controls, burner, and other adjustments for optimum heating performance and efficiency.
Adjust heat-distribution features, including shutters, dampers, and relays, to provide optimum
heating performance and system efficiency.
3.7
CLEANING
A.
After completing installation, clean furnaces internally according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Install new filters in each furnace within 14 days after Substantial Completion.
3.8
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain condensing units. Refer
to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."
Page - 9
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 237433 – PACKAGED ROOF TOP UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes factory-packaged units capable of supplying up to 100 percent outdoor air and
providing cooling and heating.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and
furnished specialties and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
connection.
Prepare the following by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer:
a.
b.
C.
Mounting Details: For securing and flashing roof curb to roof structure. Indicate
coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.
Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For design of vibration isolation, seismic restraints and wind
restraints, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
1.
2.
3.
Unit fabrication and assembly details.
Vibration Isolation Base Details:
Detail fabrication including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases,
rails, and frames for equipment mounting.
Design Calculations:
a.
b.
Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and
wind restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
Indicate compliance with "Performance Requirements" article.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.4
A.
Coordination Drawings: Roof-curb mounting details, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items
involved:
1.
2.
B.
Size and location of unit-mounted rails and anchor points and methods for anchoring
units to roof curb.
Required roof penetrations for ducts, pipes, and electrical raceways, including size and
location of each penetration.
Seismic Qualification Certificates:
components, from manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
For dedicated outdoor-air units, accessories, and
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
C.
Startup service reports.
D.
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
For units to include in emergency, operation, and
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
1.
2.
1.7
Fan Belts: One set for each belt-driven fan.
Filters: One sets for each unit.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace components of units that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
2.
Warranty Period for Compressors: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial
Completion.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Carrier
Trane
Daikin
York
A.
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 "Systems and Equipment," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."
B.
Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements," to design vibration isolation and wind restraints.
1.
C.
Wind-Restraint Performance:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Maximum Overall U-Value: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
Maximum Overall U-Value: 0.10 Btu/h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.57 W/sq. m x deg K)
Include effects of metal-to-metal contact and thermal bridges in the calculations.
Cabinet Surface Condensation:
1.
2.
F.
Basic Wind Speed: Coordinate with structural Drawings
Building Classification Category: Coordinate with Architectural Drawings
Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft (48.8 kg/sq. m) multiplied by the maximum area of unit projected
on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction and 45 degrees either side of
normal.
Cabinet Thermal Performance:
1.
2.
3.
E.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after
the seismic event."
Cabinet shall have additional insulation and vapor seals if required to prevent
condensation on the interior and exterior of the cabinet.
Portions of cabinet located downstream from the cooling coil shall have a thermal break
at each thermal bridge between the exterior and interior casing to prevent condensation
from occurring on the interior and exterior surfaces. The thermal break shall not
compromise the structural integrity of the cabinet.
Maximum Cabinet Leakage: 1 perrcent of the total supply-air flow at a pressure rating equal to
the fan shut-off pressure.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
G.
Cabinet Deflection Performance:
1.
2.
Walls and roof deflection shall be within 1/240 of the span at the design working
pressure equal to the fan shut-off pressure. Deflection limits shall be measured at any
point on the surface.
Floor deflections shall be within 1/240 of the span considering the worst-case condition
caused by the following:
a.
b.
c.
H.
2.3
Service personnel.
Internal components.
Design working pressure defined for the walls and roof.
Electrical components, devices, and accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
CABINET
A.
Construction: double wall.
B.
Exterior Casing Material: Galvanized steel with paint finish
C.
Interior Casing Material: Galvanized steel.
D.
Lifting and Handling Provisions: Factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs.
E.
Base Rails: Galvanized steel rails for mounting on roof curb or pad as indicated.
F.
Access for Inspection, Cleaning, and Maintenance:
ASHRAE 62.1.
1.
Service Doors: Hinged access doors with gaskets. Material and construction of doors
shall match material and construction of cabinet in which doors are installed.
G.
Roof: Standing seam or membrane; sloped to drain water.
H.
Floor: Reinforced, metal surface; reinforced to limit deflection when walked on by service
personnel. Insulation shall be below metal walking surface.
I.
Cabinet Insulation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
J.
Type: Fibrous-glass duct lining complying with ASTM C 1071, Type II or flexible
elastomeric insulation complying with ASTM C 534, Type II, sheet materials.
Thickness: Minimum 1”
Insulation Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.
Mechanical Fasteners: Suitable for adhesive, mechanical, or welding attachment to
casing without damaging liner and without causing air leakage when applied as
recommended by manufacturer.
Condensate Drain Pans:
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
2.
Shape: Rectangular, with 1 percent slope in at least two planes to direct water toward
drain connection.
Size: Large enough to collect condensate from cooling coils including coil piping
connections, coil headers, and return bends.
a.
b.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Configuration: Single wall.
Configuration: Double wall, with space between walls filled with foam insulation and
moisture-tight seal.
Material: Stainless-steel sheet.
Drain Connection:
a.
b.
c.
7.
Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with
ASHRAE 62.1.
Depth: A minimum of 2 inches (50 mm deep.
Located on both ends of pan, at lowest point of pan.
Terminated with threaded nipple.
Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1” (DN 25).
Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate from
top coil.
K.
Surfaces in Contact with Airstream: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1 for resistance
to mold and erosion.
L.
Roof Curb: Full-perimeter curb of sheet metal, minimum 12 inches (300 mm) high, with wood
nailer, neoprene sealing strip, and welded Z-bar flashing.
1.
2.4
Comply with requirements in "The NRCA Roofing Manual."
SUPPLY FAN
A.
Forward-Curved Fan Type: Centrifugal; statically and dynamically balanced.
1.
2.
B.
Plenum Fan Type: Single width, non-overloading, with backward-inclined or airfoil blades.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Fan Wheel Material: Galvanized steel, mounted on solid-steel shaft.
Bearings: Self-aligning, permanently lubricated ball bearings
Fan Wheel Material: Aluminum; attached directly to motor shaft.
Fan Wheel Drive and Arrangement: Direct drive, AMCA Arrangement 4.
Fan panel and frame Material: Powder-coated steel, stainless steel, or aluminum.
Fan Enclosure: Easily removable enclosure around rotating parts.
Fan Balance: Precision balance fan below 0.08 inch/s (2.0 mm/s) at design speed with
filter in.
Service Factor for Belt Drive Applications: V-belt drive with matching fan pulley and
adjustable motor sheaves and belt assembly with minimum 1.5 service factor.
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.5
COOLING COILS
Options in this article are not available from all manufacturers on all models; verify availability with manufacturers.
A.
Capacity Ratings: Comply with ASHRAE 33 and ARI 410 [and coil bearing the ARI label].
B.
Coil Casing Material: Manufacturer's standard material
C.
Tube Material: Copper
D.
Tube Header Material: Copper
E.
Fin Material: Aluminum.
F.
Fin and Tube Joints: Mechanical bond.
G.
Leak Test: Coils shall be leak tested with air underwater.
H.
Refrigerant Coil Capacity Reduction: Circuit coils for interleaved control.
2.6
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
A.
Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems."
B.
Refrigerant Charge: Factory charged with refrigerant and filled with oil.
C.
Compressors: Scroll compressors with integral vibration isolators, internal overcurrent and
over-temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater.
D.
Refrigerant: R-410A
1.
2.
E.
Refrigeration System Specialties:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Classified as Safety Group A1 according to ASHRAE 34.
Provide unit with operating charge of refrigerant.
Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.
Refrigerant dryer.
High-pressure switch.
Low-pressure switch.
Thermostat for coil freeze-up protection during low ambient temperature operation or
loss of air.
Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines.
Capacity Control:
1.
2.
Hot-gas bypass refrigerant control for capacity control with continuous dehumidification
on a single compressor.
Patented, Rawal APR control with zero to 100 percent modulating capacity control using
hot-gas bypass. Evaporator coil shall be continuously active for dehumidification.
Page - 6
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.
G.
Condenser Fan Assembly:
1.
2.
Fans: Direct-drive propeller type with statically and dynamically balanced fan blades.
Fan Motors:
a.
b.
3.
H.
Fan Safety Guards: Steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
Safety Controls:
1.
2.
2.7
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency
requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor
Motor Enclosure: Totally enclosed non-ventilating (TENV) or totally enclosed air
over (TEAO) enclosure.
Compressor motor and condenser coil fan motor low ambient lockout.
Overcurrent protection for compressor motor.
INDIRECT-FIRED GAS FURNACE HEATING
A.
Furnace Assembly:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Factory assembled, piped, and wired.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code," and ANSI Z21.47,
"Gas-Fired Central Furnaces."
AGA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of AGA.
Burners:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Heat-Exchanger Material: Manufacturers standard material with a minimum thermal
efficiency of 80 percent.
Fuel: Natural gas.
Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark with flame sensor.
High-Altitude Kit: For Project elevations more than 2000 feet (610 m) above sea level.
C.
Heat-Exchanger Drain Pan Material: Stainless steel.
D.
Venting: Gravity vented.
E.
Venting: Power vent with integral, motorized centrifugal fan interlocked with gas valve.
F.
Safety Controls:
1.
2.
Gas Control Valve: Two stage.
Gas Train: Single-body, regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing
pilot solenoid valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff.
Page - 7
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.8
OUTDOOR-AIR INTAKE HOOD
A.
Type: Manufacturer's standard hood or louver.
B.
Materials: Match cabinet.
C.
Bird Screen: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
D.
Configuration: Designed to inhibit wind-driven rain and snow from entering unit.
2.9
FILTERS
A.
Cleanable Filters: 2-inch- (50-mm-) thick, cleanable metal mesh.
B.
Extended-Surface, Disposable Panel Filters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Mounting Frames:
1.
2.
3.
2.10
Comply with NFPA 90A.
Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface type.
Thickness: 4 inches (100 mm).
Minimum Merv: 8 , according to ASHRAE 52.2.
Media: Fibrous material formed into deep-V-shaped pleats and held by self-supporting
wire grid.
Panel filters arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors on both sides of
unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or from access plenum.
Extended surface filters arranged for flat orientation, removable from access plenum.
Galvanized or stainless steel with gaskets and fasteners, suitable for bolting together into
built-up filter banks.
ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTIONS
A.
General Electrical Power Connection Requirements: Factory-installed and -wired switches,
motor controllers, transformers, and other necessary electrical devices shall provide a singlepoint field power connection to unit.
B.
Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 3R, mounted in unit with hinged access door in unit cabinet
having a lock and key or padlock and key,
C.
Wiring: Numbered and color-coded to match wiring diagram.
D.
Wiring Location: Install factory wiring outside an enclosure in a raceway.
E.
Power Interface: Field power interface shall be to wire lugs.
F.
Factory Wiring: Branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with one of the following
disconnecting means:
Page - 8
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
2.
3.
NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with rejection-type fuse clips rated for fuses.
Select and size fuses to provide Type 2 protection according to IEC 60947-4-1.
NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, non-fusible switch.
UL 489, motor-circuit protector (circuit breaker) with field-adjustable, short-circuit trip
coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.
G.
Factory-Mounted, Overcurrent-Protection Service: For each motor.
H.
Controls: Factory wire unit-mounted controls where indicated.
I.
Receptacle: Factory wire unit-mounted, ground fault interrupt (GFI) duplex receptacle.
J.
Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays.
2.11
A.
CONTROLS
Control Dampers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
Damper Location: Factory installed inside unit for ease of blade axle and bushing
service. Arrange dampers located in a mixing box to achieve convergent airflow to
minimize stratification.
Damper Leakage: Comply with requirements in AMCA 500-D. Leakage shall not
exceed 6.5 cfm per sq. ft. (33 L/s per sq. m) at a static-pressure differential of 4.0 inches
water column (1000 Pa) when a torque of 5 inch pounds per sq. ft. (30.1 Newton meters
per sq. m) is applied to the damper jackshaft.
Damper Rating: Rated for close-off pressure equal to the fan shutoff pressure.
Blade Configuration: Unless otherwise indicated, use parallel blade configuration for
two-position control and equipment isolation service and use modulating control when
mixing two airstreams. For other applications, use an opposed-blade configuration.
Damper Frame Material:
a.
Extruded Aluminum or Galvanized steel
b.
Coastal applications shall be Stainless Steel
Blade Type: hollow-shaped airfoil.
Blade Material:
a.
Extruded Aluminum or Galvanized Steel
b.
Coastal applications shall be Anodized Aluminum
Maximum Blade Width: 6 inches (150 mm).
Maximum Blade Length: 48 inches (1200 mm).
Blade Seals: Replaceable, continuous perimeter vinyl seals and jambs with stainless-steel
compression-type seals.
Bearings: Thrust bearings for vertical blade axles.
Damper Operators:
1.
2.
Factory-installed electric operator for each damper assembly with one operator for each
damper assembly mounted to the damper frame.
Operator capable of shutoff against fan pressure and able to operate the damper with
sufficient reserve power to achieve smooth modulating action and proper speed of
response at the velocity and pressure conditions to which the damper is subjected.
Page - 9
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
C.
Refrigeration System Controls:
1.
D.
2.
3.
2.12
A.
Unit-mounted enthalpy controller shall lock out refrigerant system when outdoor-air
enthalpy is less than 28 Btu/lb of dry air or outdoor-air temperature is less than 60 deg F
(15 deg C)<Insert value>.
Furnace Controls:
1.
E.
Maximum Operating Time: Open or close damper 90 degrees in [60] [90] <Insert value>
seconds.
Adjustable Stops: For both maximum and minimum positions.
Position Indicator and Graduated Scale: Factory installed on each actuator with words
"OPEN" and "CLOSED," or similar identification, at travel limits.
Spring-return operator to fail-safe; either closed or open as required by application.
Operator Type: Direct coupled, designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated
torque.
Position feedback Signal: For remote monitoring of damper position.
Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
Circuitry: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.
Factory-mounted sensor in supply outlet with sensor adjustment located in control panel
to modulate gas furnace burner to maintain space temperature.
Remote Setback: Adjustable room thermostat selected by timer, set at 50 deg F (10
deg C)]; cycles supply fan and gas furnace burner to maintain space temperature.
Staged Burner Control: Two steps of control.
Damper Controls: Space pressure sensor modulates outdoor- and return-air dampers to
maintain a positive pressure in space at a minimum of [0.05 inch wg (12.4 Pa)] <Insert value>
with respect to outdoor reference.
ACCESSORIES
Duplex Receptacle: Factory mounted in unit supply-fan section, with 20 amp 120 V GFI
duplex receptacle and weatherproof cover.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for piping, ducts, and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment installation.
C.
Examine roof curbs and equipment supports for suitable conditions where units will be
installed.
Page - 10
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
D.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading units and
moving to final locations.
B.
Curb Support: Install roof curb on roof structure according to "The NRCA Roofing Manual."
1.
2.
3.
Install and secure units on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof
construction.
Coordinate size, installation, and structural capacity of roof curbs, equipment supports,
and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."
Coordinate size, location, and installation of unit manufacturer's roof curbs and
equipment supports with roof Installer.
C.
Restrained Curb Support: Install restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails on roof structure
according to "The NRCA Roofing Manual."
D.
Equipment Mounting:
1.
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in
Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."
E.
Comply with requirements for gas-fired furnace installation in NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas
Code."
F.
Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed.
G.
Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting, and
balancing.
H.
Install drain pipes from unit drain pans to sanitary drain.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Where installing piping adjacent to units, allow space for service and maintenance.
B.
Gas Piping Connections:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Comply with requirements in Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping."
Connect gas piping to furnace, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with
union, pressure regulator, and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal
and service.
Install AGA-approved flexible connectors.
Duct Connections:
1.
2.
Comply with requirements in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."
Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts.
Page - 11
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.
D.
Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements for power wiring, switches, and motor
controls in electrical Sections.
1.
3.4
Connect ducts to units with flexible duct connectors. Comply with requirements for
flexible duct connectors in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
Install electrical devices furnished by unit manufacturer but not factory mounted.
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1.
2.
3.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Inspect units for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber.
Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing and adjust
burner for peak efficiency:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
Verify operation of remote panel including pilot-light operation and failure modes.
Inspect the following:
a.
b.
5.
6.
Cooling coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.
Cooling coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.
Condenser coil entering-air dry-bulb temperature.
Condenser coil leaving-air dry-bulb temperature.
Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following:
a.
b.
8.
9.
10.
High-limit heat exchanger.
Alarms.
Inspect units for visible damage to refrigerant compressor, condenser and evaporator
coils, and fans.
Start refrigeration system when outdoor-air temperature is within normal operating limits
and measure and record the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
7.
Measure gas pressure at manifold.
Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber.
Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge.
Perform flue-gas analysis. Measure and record flue-gas carbon dioxide and
oxygen concentration.
Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing
rate and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.
Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures.
Short-circuiting of air through outside coil or from outside coil to outdoor-air
intake.
Inspect casing insulation for integrity, moisture content, and adhesion.
Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.
Verify that controls are connected and operable.
Page - 12
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
Verify that filters are installed.
Clean coils and inspect for construction debris.
Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris.
Inspect operation of power vents.
Purge gas line.
Inspect and adjust vibration isolators and seismic restraints.
Verify bearing lubrication.
Clean fans and inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without
vibration and binding.
Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.
Start unit.
Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices including response to
smoke detectors by fan controls and fire alarm.
Operate unit for run-in period.
Calibrate controls.
Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits.
Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers.
Verify operational sequence of controls.
Measure and record the following airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve.
a.
b.
c.
Supply-air volume.
Return-air flow.
Outdoor-air flow.
B.
After startup, change filters, verify bearing lubrication, and adjust belt tension.
C.
Remove and replace components that do not properly operate and repeat startup procedures as
specified above.
D.
Prepare written report of the results of startup services.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
B.
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions.
Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
Page - 13
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 238126 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat-pump units consisting of separate
evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Include performance data in terms of
capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements,
and electrical characteristics.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
WARRANTY
A.
replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period:
a.
For Compressor: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
b.
For Parts: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
c.
For Labor: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product:
1.
Carrier Corporation; Home Comfort and HVAC Building & Industrial Systems.
2.
Trane; a business of American Standard companies.
3.
YORK; a Johnson Controls company.
4.
Approve equal by engineer.
2.2
INDOOR UNITS (5 TONS OR LESS)
A.
Concealed Evaporator-Fan Components:
1.
Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and
insulation on back of panel.
2.
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermalexpansion valve. Comply with ARI 210/240.
3.
Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements; with refractory
ceramic support bushings, automatic-reset thermal cutout, built-in magnetic contactors,
manual-reset thermal cutout, airflow proving device, and one-time fuses in terminal box
for overcurrent protection.
4.
Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to
motor.
5.
Fan Motors:
a.
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure
type, and efficiency requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Common
Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
b.
Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent
lubrication.
c.
Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
6.
a.
Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from
cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends)
and humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection.
b.
Single-wall, galvanized-steel sheet.
B.
Floor-Mounted, Evaporator-Fan Components:
1.
Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by
Architect.
2.
3.
Water Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer
than 0.1 inch; leak tested to 300 psig underwater; with a two-position control valve.
4.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
5.
6.
7.
C.
Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal.
Fan Motors:
a.
b.
lubrication.
Air Filtration Section:
a.
General Requirements for Air Filtration Section:
1)
Minimum Arrestance: According to ASHRAE 52.1 and MERV according
to ASHRAE 52.2.
2)
Filter-Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access
doors on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or
lifted out from access plenum.
Wall-Mounted, Evaporator-Fan Components:
1.
Architect, and discharge drain pans with drain connection.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Fan Motors:
a.
b.
lubrication.
c.
d.
NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1.
e.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for
electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.
f.
Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on exterior of unit.
6.
7.
a.
b.
8.
a.
1)
Minimum Arrestance: According to ASHRAE 52.1 and MERV according
to ASHRAE 52.2.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2)
2.3
INDOOR UNITS (6 TONS OR MORE)
A.
Concealed Evaporator-Fan Components:
1.
Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and
insulation on back of panel.
2.
3.
4.
Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to
motor.
5.
Fan Motors:
a.
b.
lubrication.
c.
Three-phase, permanently lubricated, ball-bearing motors with built-in thermaloverload protection.
d.
Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
6.
Filters: 1 inch thick, in fiberboard frames.
7.
a.
b.
B.
Floor-Mounted, Evaporator-Fan Components:
1.
Architect.
a.
Discharge Grille: Steel with surface-mounted frame.
b.
Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner (Hospital grade).
2.
a.
b.
Single-wall, galvanized steel sheet.
3.
4.
Water Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer
than 0.1 inch; leak tested to 300 psig underwater; with a two-position control valve.
5.
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
6.
7.
8.
2.4
Fan Motors:
a.
b.
lubrication.
c.
d.
NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1.
e.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for
electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.
f.
Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on exterior of unit.
a.
1)
Minimum Arrestance: According to ASHRAE 52.1 and a MERV according
to ASHRAE 52.2.
2)
OUTDOOR UNITS (5 TONS OR LESS)
A.
2.5
Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:
1.
Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable
panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base.
Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
2.
Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration
isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload
devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
3.
4.
OUTDOOR UNITS (6 TONS OR MORE)
A.
Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:
1.
Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable
panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base.
Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
2.
Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration
isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload
devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
3.
4.
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units level and plumb.
B.
Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.
C.
Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch-thick, reinforced
concrete base that is 4 inches larger, on each side, than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and
formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor
installation with concrete base.
D.
Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting base.
E.
Install roof-mounted, compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in
Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmiumplated fasteners.
F.
Install seismic restraints.
G.
Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum static
deflection of 1 inch. See Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping
and Equipment."
H.
Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install
tubing to allow access to unit.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of unit.
C.
Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Metal
Ducts" Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to
split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are
specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
3.3
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B.
Page - 6
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
C.
1.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
2.
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
3.
equipment.
D.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
E.
3.4
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Page - 7
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 260500 – BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
It is the intent of the Contract Documents to provide an installation complete in every respect. In the event
that additional details or special construction may be required for work indicated or specified in this section
or work specified in other sections, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish same as well as
furnish and install material and equipment usually furnished with such systems or required to complete the
installation.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.3
Supporting devices for electrical components.
Concrete equipment bases.
Codes, fees, permits, standards, inspections, field quality control, and submittal requirements.
Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
Project record documentation.
Safety guards.
Space and equipment arrangement.
Refinishing and touchup painting.
Cleaning and protection of apparatus.
Electrical component identification.
CODES, FEES, PERMITS, STANDARDS AND INSPECTIONS
A.
Work performed under these Specifications shall be in strict accordance with the National Electrical Code
(NEC), Occupational Safety and Hazard Act (OSHA), Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
(IEEE), Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), all applicable City,
County, State, and National codes, specifications, standards and ordinances, and in accordance with all
Utility Company regulations.
B.
Refer to conditions of the Contract for payment of fees and permits.
C.
Drawings and these specifications are intended to comply with all the above mentioned rules and
regulations, however, some discrepancies may occur. Where such discrepancies occur, the Contractor
shall immediately notify the Architect in writing of said discrepancies and apply for an interpretation and,
unless the Architect offers an interpretation in writing, the applicable rules and regulations shall be
complied with as a part of the contract.
D.
In case of difference between building codes, specifications, state laws, industry standards and the
Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. However, inform the Architect of the discrepancy
and ask for a written response.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts of electrical equipment rooms.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
B.
Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Drawings showing the extent and arrangement of the work of a particular trade
and the extent and arrangement of work of other trades to insure that the Contractor in laying out and
installing his work, shall do so in a manner such that the work of the several trades may progress in the
most direct, workmanlike and harmonious manner.
D.
Submittal Schedule: List of proposed submittals shall be provided in a schedule form indicating the extent
of the submittal, shop drawings, product data, test reports, record drawings, and similar items that the
Contractor intends to submit for approval. The submittal schedule shall be provided within thirty (30) days
of award of contract and prior to any formal submittals being provided.
E.
Deviations: The approval of Submittal Drawings by the Architect, or his Representative, shall not relieve
the Contractor from responsibility for deviation from Drawings or the specifications unless he has called
attention in writing to such deviations at the time of submission and has obtained written approval from the
Architect, or his Representative, of such deviations. The Contractor at no extra cost will make any
proposed change necessary for compliance with the specifications to the Owner.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide products and materials that are listed and labeled. The terms “Listed” and “Labeled” shall be as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
B.
Materials shall be new and of the quality specified. All materials shall be free from defects at the time of
installation. Materials or equipment damaged in shipment or otherwise damaged shall NOT be repaired at
the jobsite, but shall be replaced with new materials.
C.
Equipment installed shall have local representation; local factory authorized service, and a local stock of
repair parts, within 100 miles of the Project site.
D.
Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing electrical
power, communications and other services.
E.
Equipment Changes: The electrical design and drawings are based on the equipment scheduled, specified
and indicated by the drawings and should any equipment requiring changes to the electrical design be
approved, the required electrical changes shall be made at the expense of the Contractor at no cost to the
Owner.
1.6
PRODUCT UNIFORMITY
A.
In order to insure an integrated electrical system providing ease of maintenance, operation, and repair,
similar types of equipment shall be provided by a single manufacturer. The following categories of
equipment shall be provided by a single manufacturer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.7
Electrical distribution equipment consisting of switchboards, panelboards, transformers, disconnects and switches.
Motor controllers
Lamps.
Ballasts.
Fuses.
Wiring devices.
PRODUCT INTEGRATION
A.
In order to insure an integrated electrical system providing ease of maintenance, operation, repair, and
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
provide integrated control functions and operation, a single Contractor who is regularly engaged in the
integration of such systems shall provide the entire system including accessories.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in
building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow. Set
inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural components as they
are constructed.
B.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the
Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building.
C.
Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies. Coordinate
installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services, including provision
for electricity-metering components.
D.
Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished
surfaces. Access doors and panels shall be as specified in Division 08 of these specifications.
1.9
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A.
Provide all necessary excavation and backfill for the installation of electrical work in accordance with
Division 02 of these Specifications.
B.
Trenches for all underground conduits shall be excavated to the required depths. The bottoms of the
trenches shall be tamped hard and evenly graded to assure the conduit is supported for its entire length on
solid ground. Should rock be encountered, it shall be removed and backfilled to the proper grade with pea
gravel or select fill thoroughly tamped. Conduit laid in trenches dug in fill shall be supported on thoroughly
tamped load bearing soil. After the conduits have been inspected and approved by inspecting authorities,
the trenches shall be backfilled.
C.
Trenches shall be carefully backfilled with select fill material, or pea gravel, to a depth of 6 inches above
the top of the conduit. The next layer and subsequent layers of backfill may be excavated materials if of
earth, loam, sand or gravel, free of large clods and with rocks no larger than 1-1/2-inch in diameter.
Backfill shall be installed in layers 12-inches deep, adequately tamped and wetted down or flushed before
the second layer of earth is laid in place.
D.
Underground cables or conduits shall be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code, but in
no case shall the buried depth be less than 24-inches below finished grade.
1.10
OPERATION PRIOR TO COMPLETION
A.
When any piece of electrical equipment is operable and it is to the advantage of the Contractor to operate
the equipment, he may do so providing that he properly supervises the operation.
B.
The warranty period shall, however, not commence until such time as the equipment is operated for the
beneficial use of the Owner or until final acceptance by the Owner.
C.
Regardless of whether or not the equipment has or has not been operated, the Contractor shall properly
clean the equipment, and properly adjust the operation of the equipment before final acceptance by the
Owner.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
1.11
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS AND RECORDS FOR OWNER
A.
Project record documentation and records for the Owner shall be as specified in Division 01, General
Requirements Section.
B.
In addition to the Division 01 of these specification provide the following minimum items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.12
A.
1.13
A.
1.14
Operations & Maintenance Manuals: Include, as appropriate to each item, sufficient information to
provide for the Owner’s operation and maintenance of equipment furnished.
As-Builts Drawings: Provide three (3) sets of the following:
Electronic drawings files, in AutoCAD “.DWG” format, of all documents on CD disks or flash drives,
corrected with “As Installed” work.
Electronic drawings files, in “PDF” format, of all documents on CD disks or flash drives, corrected
with “As Installed” work.
Full-Size hard copies of all documents corrected with “As Installed” work.
Contacts: Include with each product, name, address, and telephone numbers, of installing
contractor, factory and local service representative.
Instructions of Owner’s Personnel: Prior to final inspection and acceptance, fully instruct the
Owner’s designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operating and performance of the
equipment furnished.
Warranties: Include warranty information properly executed by respective manufacturers, suppliers,
or sub-contractors for the equipment and system furnished.
WARRANTY
Project warranty shall be as specified in Division 01, General Requirements Section, but not less than one
(1) year from final acceptance.
SAFETY GUARDS
Contractor shall furnish and install all safety guards required. All electrical equipment, belt driven
equipment, projecting shafts and other rotating or energized parts shall be properly enclosed or adequately
guarded.
SPACE AND EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENT
A.
Size of equipment shown by the drawings is based on the dimensions of a particular manufacturer. Where
other manufacturers are acceptable, it is the responsibility of the contractor to determine if the equipment
he proposes to furnish will fit the space.
B.
Equipment shall be installed in a manner that will permit access to all surfaces requiring access. Proper
clearances shall be maintained to meet all safety and operating requirements or codes and standards.
1.15
A.
1.16
A.
FLOOR, CEILING AND WALL PLATES
In finished spaces furnish a chromium plated sectional escutcheon on each conduit penetrating a wall,
floor or ceiling. Escutcheons shall be sized to fit snugly to all conduits. Where required, these plates shall
be provided with set-screws so that they fit snugly against the finished surface.
PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND APPARATUS
At all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect the electrical apparatus from
damage. This shall include the creation of all required temporary shelters and environmental control to
adequately protect any electrical apparatus. Electrical apparatus shall be cribbed up from the floor and
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
covered with protective coverings where necessary to protect the apparatus from damage.
B.
As required, apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of
each ventilated-type unit throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and is not in a space
that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.
C.
Damage resulting from failure to comply with this requirement will be considered justification for rejection
of the damaged apparatus and requiring its complete replacement by the Contractor.
1.17
A.
1.18
A.
1.19
INSPECTION OF BUILDING SITE:
Contractor shall visit the site, verifying all existing items indicated on plans and/or specified, and familiarize
himself with the existing work conditions, hazards, grades, actual formations, soil, conditions, and local
requirements. The submission of bids shall be deemed evidence of each visit. All Proposals shall take
these existing conditions into consideration, and the lack of specific information on the drawings shall not
relieve the Contractor of any responsibility.
ROOF PENETRATIONS:
Roof openings shall be made in accordance with Division 07 of these Specifications.
DEFINITIONS:
A.
Approved: As specified or having received Architect’s approval.
B.
Furnish: Purchase and deliver to job site.
C.
Install: Fix permanently in place and make all necessary connections as related to all trades involved,
place in operation, and test.
D.
Provide: Furnish and install.
E.
Replace: Remove and provide.
F.
Relocate: Remove and install in new location.
G.
Contractor: Contractor responsible for all trades under the specifications covered by this Division.
H.
Work: Labor and/or materials accruing in the provision of a system as defined by the drawings and these
specifications.
I.
Store: Provide an environmentally controlled space to protect the stored equipment from damage prior to
installation.
J.
Remove: De-energize, disconnect, and de-commission the designated equipment as related to the trades
required to take the equipment out of service. This shall include transporting the equipment to an off-site
location as required by authorities having jurisdiction and regulatory agencies, unless directed otherwise
by the Architect.
1.20
A.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Specifications and drawings are intended to indicate a minimum standard of quality for materials and
equipment which is established by the listing of manufacturers’ names and catalog numbers and/or the
defining of the technical characteristics in detail or by referenced standards. Materials and equipment that
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
do not comply with these standards of quality will NOT be considered.
B.
Contractor shall be responsible to identify any deviation of the submittal from the specified manufacturer,
product, equipment or material. Approval by the Architect shall NOT be considered as acceptance of the
deviation unless specifically identified and acknowledged by the Architect during the submittal process.
C.
Where only one manufacturer’s name is listed in the equipment specification, other manufacturers of
similar characteristics and of equal or better performance capacities may be considered for "or equal"
approval by the Architect. Where more than one manufacturer is listed in the equipment specification, only
those named manufacturers will be considered.
D.
Should a substitution be accepted, and should the substitute material prove defective, or otherwise
unsatisfactory for the service intended, within the guarantee or warranty period, this material or equipment
shall be replaced with the material or equipment specified at no cost to the Owner.
1.21
AVOIDING ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE
A.
Avoid potential sources of Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) such as motors, transformers, and power
wiring when installing raceways for communication and data cabling.
B.
To avoid EMI, communication and data cabling pathways should cross perpendicular to fluorescent
lighting fixtures and electrical power cables or conduits. As a minimum, communication and data cabling
pathways should be provided with at least the following clearances:
1.
2.
3.
48 inches from motors or transformers
12 inches from conduit and cables used for electrical power distribution including branch circuits.
6 inches from fluorescent lighting fixtures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORTING DEVICES
A.
Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
C.
Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch diameter slotted holes at
a maximum of 2 inches on centers in webs.
1.
2.
Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.
Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.
D.
Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps with
retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-type hangers.
E.
Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and
insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number and
size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body constructed of malleable-iron
casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.
Page - 6
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A.
Each and every conduit, regardless of material, which passes through a concrete slab (except slab on
grade), masonry wall, roof or other portion of the building structure, shall be free from the structure and
shall pass through a sleeve.
B.
Above grade and dry location sleeves shall be constructed from 20 gauge galvanized steel and shall be
flush on both sides of wall surface penetrated. The sleeves shall be sized to allow free passage of the
conduit to be inserted, and when this conduit is to be provided with firestopping, the sleeves shall be large
enough to pass the conduit and install the necessary firestopping material. Floor sleeves shall extend two
(2”) inches above the finished floor slab elevation.
C.
Sleeves passing through walls or floors (except slab on grade) at or below finished grade elevation and/or
in moist areas shall be constructed of galvanized steel, schedule 40 pipe, and shall be designed with
suitable flange in the center of the floor or wall to form a waterproof passage. After the conduits have
been installed in the sleeves, insure a waterproof penetration by the use of a "Link-Seal" by Thunderline or
"Pipe-Linx" by Mason-Dallas, Inc. wall sleeve, or shall fabricate a sleeve in accordance with
recommendation and sizing furnished by the Thunderline Corporation or Mason-Dallas, Incorporated.
D.
Sleeves passing through fire rated walls or floors shall be sealed with an approved fire-stop material, after
installation of the conduit, such that the fire rating of the wall or floor is not degraded.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Switchboards, panelboards, transformers, cabinets, and other specified equipment shall be labeled with
laminated plates, with 3/8 inch engraved letters. Punch tapes with mastic backings are NOT acceptable.
B.
Disconnect switches and other specified equipment shall be marked with laminated plastic plates with 1/4
inch engraved letters. Where individual switches or circuit breakers in power or distribution panelboards
do not have cardholders, they shall also be marked with engraved plates.
C.
Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate installation of
identification devices with completion of finished surface.
D.
Where acoustical ceilings and similar finishes will conceal electrical identification markings and devices,
coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation.
E.
Underground electrical service entrance conduits and underground main electrical feeders shall be
identified by a continuous plastic tape 12 inches below grade in line with the trench. Tape shall be yellow
or red with black letters “CAUTION-ELECTRIC LINE BELOW”.
3.3
SERVICES
A.
Scope of Work: Furnish all materials and equipment and perform all labor and services necessary to
complete the installation of the new electrical service and the installation of underground communication
service conduit to the building as indicated by the drawings and as specified herein.
B.
Electrical Service: Electrical service equipment shall be of the characteristics, size and capacity indicated
by the drawings. The service shall be continuous without splice from the power company connections to
the main switchgear and shall be as specified under Division 26 sections specifying raceways and
conductors. Primary electrical service shall include the service raceways and fittings required by the
power company.
Page - 7
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
C.
Equipment Pads: Concrete pads required for the electrical service shall be provided unless provided by
the Power Company. The contractor shall obtain the required information from the Power Company as to
the construction of the concrete pad(s).
D.
Current-Transformer Cabinets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company.
E.
Meter Sockets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company.
F.
Communication Service: Service conduit shall be schedule 40 PVC, sized as indicated by the drawings.
Elbows shall be PVC coated rigid steel. The exact location and requirements of the communication
service conduit terminations shall be verified with the Service Company before installation.
3.4
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install
components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.
B.
Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect
for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.
D.
Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.5
WIRING METHODS
A.
Splices and Taps: Installation shall be compatible with conductor material and shall possess equivalent or
better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
B.
Wiring at Outlets: Install wiring at outlets with at least 12 inches of slack conductor at each outlet.
C.
Outlet Locations: The exact location of outlets shall be approved by the Owner, who reserves the right to
change the position of any outlet by a distance of 6 feet in any direction, from the position shown on the
drawings, before work is roughed-in, without cost to the Owner. Outlet boxes shall NOT be installed backto-back in walls.
D.
Electrical Capacities: Verify the electrical capacities of all motors and electrical equipment furnished under
the other sections of these specifications and install wiring as required to completely connect all equipment
requiring electrical power.
E.
Control Wiring: Except as otherwise indicated in Division 26, control wiring is provided under Division 23.
F.
Power Wiring: Except for such items that are normally wired at their point of manufacture and so delivered
and, unless specifically noted to the contrary herein, the Contractor shall do all electric wiring for power
supply.
G.
Equipment Furnished Under Other Sections: Install all motors, starters, and miscellaneous items of
electrical equipment furnished under other sections of these specifications that are not integrally mounted
with their equipment. All such equipment shall be securely mounted in a neat and workmanlike manner.
H.
Motor Starting Equipment: Except as otherwise indicated in Division 26, all motor starting equipment, will
be furnished under Division 23.
Page - 8
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.6
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
A.
Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials, U-channel system components.
B.
Dry Locations: Steel materials.
C.
Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four;
minimum of 200-lb design load.
3.7
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.
B.
Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U-bolts,
clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods
and conduits.
C.
Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze or bracket-type hangers.
D.
Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in
the future.
E.
Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.
F.
Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used instead
of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch
circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports.
G.
Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by
raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.
H.
Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.
I.
Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheetmetal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to
raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than
24 inches from the box.
J.
Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards; disconnect switches, control enclosures,
pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to
structural elements of adequate strength.
K.
Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled holes are
used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of all
other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls.
3.8
FIRESTOPPING
A.
Apply firestopping or fireproofing materials to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall
assemblies to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping or fireproofing materials and
installation requirements shall be as specified in Division 7 of these specifications.
Page - 9
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.9
CONCRETE BASES
A.
3.10
Construct concrete bases not less than 4 inches larger, around the exposed perimeters, than the
supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's anchorage recommendations and setting
templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise indicated. Concrete strength and
reinforcement shall be as specified in Division 03 of these specifications.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit
electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
B.
Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces.
Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and
other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
3.11
A.
Inspect installed components for damage or faulty work and repair or replace as necessary. The following
minimum items shall be inspected:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
3.12
A.
REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
Refinish and Touch Up Paint. Paint materials and application requirements shall be as specified in
Division 09 of these specifications.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.13
Raceways and junction boxes.
Building wire and connectors.
Supporting devices for electrical components.
Concrete bases.
Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
Refinishing and touchup painting.
Firestopping and fireproofing material.
Safety guards.
Equipment identification.
Grounding and lightning protection systems
Lighting and lighting control system.
Electrical distribution equipment.
Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the
degree of damage at each location.
Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and
application of successive coats.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.
A.
On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove
burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.
B.
Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets
are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
Page - 10
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.14
A.
OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT
The Owner has elected to procure some equipment for the project. It is the intent of these specifications
that the Contractor will accept responsibility of this equipment and provide the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Provide supervision to coordinate shipping and accept delivery.
Process, review, and coordinate the shop drawings and equipment submittals and shop drawings
to insure a completely coordinated installation.
Install and set in place.
Provide materials and labor for all control, monitoring, and interconnect wiring necessary to provide
the full functionality of the procured equipment/systems.
Cleaning and Testing per Specifications Section 269520.
Provide the debugging, testing, and commissioning necessary to provide reliable and full functional
operation.
Provide labor and materials to perform on-site testing, and start-up
Provide supervision to coordinate Owner training and preparation of O&M Manuals.
The following equipment has been procured by the Owner:
1.
2.
Light fixture interior and exterior packages. Lighting control package by the EC.
Electrical switchgear – main service disconnect, Main Distribution Panel, panelboards.
Page - 11
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 260519 – CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Division 01 Specification Section apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes building wires and cables with associated connectors, splices, and terminations for
wiring systems rated 600 V and less.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product data for wire, cable, connectors, and conductor splices.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide wires and cables specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. The Terms "Listed" and
"Labeled" shall be as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Authorities
Having Jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with the current edition of NFPA 70 or the edition adopted by local Authorities with amendments
where applicable.
1.5
A.
1.6
Deliver, store and handle wires and cables according to applicable NEMA standards.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of cables with other installations.
B.
Revise locations and elevations as required to suit field conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements herein specified and as approved by the
Authority Having Jurisdiction. Provide products by one of the following:
1.
Wires and Cables:
a.
Alcan Aluminum Corporation; Alcan Cable Div.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Metal Clad Cables:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Alcan Aluminum Corporation; Alcan Cable Div.
AFC Cable Systems
Southwire Company.
Okonite Company
Perilli Cable North America
Connectors for Wires and Cables:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.2
Carol Cable Co., Inc.
Senator Wire & Cable Company.
Southwire Company.
Okonite Company
Perilli Cables North America
AMP Incorporated.
General Signal; O-Z/Gedney Unit.
Monogram Co.; AFC.
Square D Co.; Anderson.
3M Company; Electrical Products Division.
BUILDING WIRES AND CABLES
A.
General: UL-listed building wires and cables with conductor material, insulation type, cable construction,
and rating as specified herein shall comply with applicable NEMA standards.
B.
Conductor Material: Copper 98% minimum conductivity, soft-drawn annealed.
C.
Stranding: Solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded conductor for larger than No. 10 AWG.
D.
Control wire: Copper stranded only.
E.
Metal Clad Cable (MC): Cable shall be two or more factory assembled insulated conductors and an
insulated green wire ground enclosed in a metallic sheath of interlocked galvanized steel strip in
accordance with UL Standard 1569. The insulated conductors shall have a minimum operating
temperature of 90C and shall meet all other requirements herein specified.
2.3
CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A.
UL-listed, factory-fabricated wiring connectors of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for
application and service indicated. Comply with Project's installation requirements and as herein specified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wires and cables. Do not proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.2
WIRE AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS
A.
Service Entrance: Type XHHW-2 in raceway.
B.
Feeders: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway.
C.
Underground Feeders: Type XHHW-2, 90C insulation.
D.
Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway.
E.
Branch Circuits: If approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction MC Cable may be used but shall be
limited to branch circuit wiring to lighting fixture and convenience receptacle installations within wall
cavities or above the ceilings. Type MC cable shall be installed in a neat workmanlike manner, shall not
be installed for home runs, shall not be installed exposed to view within finished areas, and shall not be
installed within electrical or mechanical equipment rooms.
F.
Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway.
G.
Class 2 Control Circuits: Power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install wires and cables as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and NECA's
"Standard of Installation."
B.
Before wire is pulled into conduit, the conduit shall be thoroughly swabbed in such a manner as to remove
all foreign material, and to permit the wire to be pulled into a clean dry conduit.
C.
Minimum wire size for branch circuits shall be No. 12 AWG. Minimum wire size for control circuits shall be
No. 14.
D.
Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary. Compound used must not
deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling
tensions and sidewall pressure values.
E.
Use pulling means including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will not damage
cables or raceway.
F.
Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow
surface contours where possible.
G.
Unless larger sizes are indicated otherwise on the contract drawings, provide No. 10 AWG conductors for
20 Amp, 120 Volt branch circuit homeruns longer than 60 feet and No. 8 AMG conductors for 20 Amp, 120
Volt branch circuit homeruns longer than 120 feet.
H.
Unless larger sizes are indicated otherwise on the contract drawings, provide No. 10 AWG conductors for
20 Amp, 277 Volt branch circuit homeruns longer than 150 feet and No. 8 AWG conductors for 20 Amp,
277 Volt branch circuit homeruns longer than 300 feet.
I.
Unless noted otherwise, branch circuit wiring may be combined into a single raceway in accordance with
the NEC provided the conductors are properly derated. All neutral conductors shall be considered current
carrying conductors. The maximum number of circuits that can be combined into a single raceway is six
(6).
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
No splicing or joints will be permitted in branch circuits except at outlets or accessible junction
boxes. Service and feeders shall run their entire length without joints or splices
B.
In the making of a splice, connectors shall be brought up securely upon the conductors in such a way that
all conductors are equally engaged, the insulation is not ruptured and no bare wires are exposed or have
"backed-off" due to the application of pressure.
C.
Screw-on pigtail connectors may be used for splicing wire up to and including No. 8 AWG. Wires shall be
twisted together with a minimum of one turn of the stripped conductors before insertion into connectors.
Connectors shall be installed so that the conductor is fully insulated by a skirt, or taped in such a manner
that cold flow of the insulation will not be induced when the conductor is positioned in its final operational
position.
D.
Terminations or splices for copper conductors No. 6 AWG and larger shall utilize copper bolt clamp-type
connectors or hydraulically crimped copper crimp connectors UL approved for the application in which they
are used. Crimped connectors shall be applied using only tooling specifically recommended by the
connector manufacturer, and tooling shall not release the connector until proper crimping force has been
achieved.
E.
Install splices and tapes that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than
conductors being spliced.
F.
Use splice and tap connectors compatible with conductor material.
G.
Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap connector for aluminum conductors.
H.
Use full UL listed concentric compression lugs for aluminum conductors.
I.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening
values.
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 260526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified
in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each product specified including grounding conductors, clamps and accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled"
shall be as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
1.
Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.2
Erico Inc. (Caldweld)
Burndy Electrical Products.
Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co.
Lyncole XIT Grounding.
O-Z/Gedney Company
Thomas & Betts Electrical Products.
PRODUCTS
A.
Conductors: Comply with Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables" for insulated conductors. All conductors shall be copper, stranded, and insulated, unless noted otherwise.
B.
Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators.
C.
Connectors: Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467 for listed use of specific types, sizes, and combinations of
conductors and connected items. Mechanical connectors shall be bolted-pressure-type connectors, or
compression type. Welded connectors shall be exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written instructions. Exothermically welded electrical connections made within existing buildings
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
shall be made with low emission type process, "CALDWELD - EXOLON" or approved equal.
D.
Ground Rods: Copper-clad 3/4 inch diameter by 120 inches in length.
E.
Ground Plates: Copper-clad minimum 12" x 24" x 20 gauge as manufactured by Heary Brothers Model
#HB54-C or approved equal. Ground plates shall be provided with two (2) bolt plates, which shall be attached utilizing stainless steel nuts & bolts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
General: Provide adequate and permanent equipment grounding in accordance with NFPA 70, and subject
to the additional requirements herein specified. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare
grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone and similar materials.
Install conductors in raceways for physical protection unless noted otherwise. Use exothermic-welded
connections for connections to structural steel and for underground connections, except those at test
wells.
B.
Raceways: Install insulated equipment grounding conductors in ALL raceways of ALL systems. Assure
the electrical continuity of all metallic raceway systems, pulling up all conduits and/or locknuts wrenchtight. Where raceway expansion joints or telescoping joints occur, provide braided bonding jumpers. Provide grounding bushings on all feeder raceways terminating within panelboards and transformers. Install
grounding jumpers from these bushings to the equipment ground bus where one occurs or to ground lugs
mounted to the frame of the enclosures.
C.
Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to
the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor from raceway and from panelboard
grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Provide a grounding electrode in addition to installing a
separate equipment grounding conductor with supply branch-circuit conductors.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Ground Rods: Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or below final grade, unless
otherwise indicated. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic
welds, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating. Driven ground rods shall be used for all electrode locations. In the event that the
ground rods can not be driven (i.e., due to rock), inform the Architect's Representative immediately. At the
recommendation of the Architect's Representative, ground plates, shall be substituted in place of the
ground rods.
B.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and
supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor
locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly
to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.
C.
Metal Domestic Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from
building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building.
Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp connectors. Where
a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Bond metal
grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
D.
3.3
Gas Piping: Where applicable, bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system upstream from
equipment shutoff valve.
CONNECTIONS
A.
General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors,
connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically
compatible.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact
points closer to order of galvanic series.
Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps.
Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical
clamps.
Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration
of moisture to contact surfaces.
B.
Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding
lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.
C.
Torque: Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in applicable UL Standards.
3.4
GRADING AND PLANTING
A.
Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this Section. Reestablish
original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after
backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include application of topsoil, fertilizer, lime, seed, sod, sprig, and mulch.
Comply with Division 2 Section "Landscaping." Maintain restored surfaces. Restore disturbed paving as
indicated.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
SECTION 260533 – RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
1.
Raceways include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1.3
Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC).
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC).
PVC externally coated IMC.
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT).
Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC).
Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC).
Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC).
Wireways.
Surface raceways.
Device boxes.
Floor boxes.
Outlet boxes.
Pull and junction boxes.
Cabinets and hinged-cover enclosures.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For conduits, fittings, expansion joints assembly, through-wall and floor seals assembly,
surface raceways, wireways, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Listed and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. The Terms
“Listed” and “Labeled” shall be as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to
Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B.
Standards: Comply with applicable UL and NEMA Standards. Comply with NECA's "Standard of
Installation."
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of raceways and boxes with other construction elements to ensure
adequate headroom, working clearance, and access.
Page - 1
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
1.
Metal Conduit and Tubing:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
2.
Nonmetallic Conduit and Tubing:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
3.
American Electric; Construction Materials Group.
Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries.
Emerson Electric Co.; Appleton Electric Co.
Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.
Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal.
Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM.
Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
Metal Wireways:
a.
b.
c.
5.
Anamet, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
Arnco Corp.
Breeze-Illinois, Inc.
Cantex Industries; Harsco Corp.
Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.
Cole-Flex Corp.
Condux International; Electrical Products.
Electri-Flex Co.
George-Ingraham Corp.
Hubbell, Inc.; Raco, Inc.
R&G Sloan Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Spiraduct, Inc.
Thomas & Betts Corp.
Conduit Bodies and Fittings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
4.
Alflex Corp.
Anamet, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
Anixter Brothers, Inc.
Carol Cable Co., Inc.
Cole-Flex Corp.
Electri-Flex Co.
Flexcon, Inc.; Coleman Cable Systems, Inc.
Grinnell Co.; Allied Tube and Conduit Div.
Monogram Co.; AFC.
Spiraduct, Inc.
Triangle PWC, Inc.
Wheatland Tube Co.
Hoffman Engineering Co.
Keystone/Rees, Inc.
Square D Co.
Nonmetallic Wireways:
a.
Hoffman Engineering Co.
Page - 2
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
b.
6.
Surface Metal Raceways:
a.
b.
c.
d.
7.
Anixter Brothers, Inc.
Butler Manufacturing Co.; Walker Division.
Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Device Division.
JBC Enterprises, Inc.; Enduro Fiberglass Systems.
Panduit Corp.
Thermotools Co.
United Telecom; Premier Telecom Products, Inc.
Wiremold Co. (The); Electrical Sales Division.
Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
2.2
Airey-Thompson Co., Inc.; A-T Power Systems.
American Electric; Construction Materials Group.
Wiremold Co. (The); Electrical Sales Division.
Surface Nonmetallic Raceways:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
8.
American Electric; FL Industries.
Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries.
Electric Panelboard Co., Inc.
Erickson Electrical Equipment Co.
Hoffman Engineering Co.; Federal-Hoffman, Inc.
Hubbell Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.
Hubbell Inc.; Raco, Inc.
O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal.
Parker Electrical Manufacturing Co.
Robroy Industries, Inc.; Electrical Division.
Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM.
Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
Thomas & Betts Corp.
Woodhead Industries, Inc.; Daniel Woodhead Co.
METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A.
General: UL-Listed conduit and tubing with material herein specified shall comply with applicable NEMA
and ANSI Standards.
B.
EMT Fittings: EMT fittings shall be set-screw or compression type for telephone system raceway other
than telephone service. Fittings for power, lighting or control circuits shall be compression type.
C.
Material: Aluminum or zinc-coated steel.
D.
LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
E.
Expansion joints: Equal with O-Z Gedney type “AX-8” with external bonding jumper type “BJ” for IMC and
“TX” for EMT.
F.
Moisture Sealing: Sealing assembly around conduits passing through concrete wall or floor equal with O-Z
Gedney type “FSK”.
Page - 3
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.3
NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A.
General: UL-Listed non-metallic conduit and tubing with material herein specified shall comply with
applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.
B.
Type: Non-metallic conduit and tubing shall be Schedule 40, PVC.
C.
Fittings: Matched to conduit or tubing type and material.
2.4
METAL WIREWAYS
A.
Material: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated.
B.
Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps,
end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
C.
Wireway Covers: Standard covers shall be hinged type unless noted otherwise. Provide flanged and
gasketed type covers when required by the application or installation.
D.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.5
NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS
A.
Description: PVC plastic extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on cover and
mechanically coupled connections using plastic fasteners.
B.
Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps,
end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
2.6
SURFACE RACEWAYS
A.
Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Finish with manufacturer's standard
prime coating.
B.
Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC compound with matte
texture and manufacturer's standard color.
C.
Accessories: Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that
match and mate with raceways.
2.7
OUTLET, DEVICE, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A.
Sheet Metal Boxes: UL-Listed, galvanized steel metal boxes shall comply with applicable NEMA and ANSI
Standards.
B.
Cast-Metal Outlet Boxes: UL-Listed, Type FD, cast box with gasketed cover.
C.
Cast-Metal Boxes: UL-Listed cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
2.8
FLOOR BOXES
A.
Floor Boxes: Refer to floor plans for requirements.
Page - 4
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
2.9
ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS
A.
Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Enclosures shall be UL-Listed, comply with applicable NEMA and ANSI
Standards, and provided with continuous hinge cover and flush latch. Provide galvanized steel with
manufacturer's standard enamel finish inside and out.
B.
Cabinets: Cabinets shall be UL-Listed, comply with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards. Provide
galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with
manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key
latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage,
and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of raceway installation. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
WIRING METHODS
A.
Outdoors: Use the following wiring methods:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Indoors: Use the following wiring methods:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.3
Exposed: RMC, IMC or EMT.
Concealed: RMC, IMC or EMT.
Underground, Single Run: RNC.
Underground, Grouped: RNC.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric
Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4.
Roof and Truck docks: RMC or IMC.
Exposed: EMT.
Concealed: EMT.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric
Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC except in wet or damp locations, use LFMC.
Damp or Wet Locations: IMC.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1.
Damp or Wet Location Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets as indicated, according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Minimum raceway size for home runs shall be 3/4-inch trade size.
C.
Conceal raceway, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors.
D.
Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
E.
Install raceways level and square, at proper elevations, and with adequate headroom.
Page - 5
06 October 2015
JJA, Inc. 3815047.020
F.
Use temporary closure devices to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.
G.
Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of
conduit bend is not visible above the finished slab.
H.
Make bends and offsets so inside diameter is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and
straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Use raceway fittings compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. For intermediate steel
conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.
J.
Run concealed raceways, with a minimum of bends, in the shortest practical distance considering the type
of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.
K.
Raceways embedded in slabs shall be installed in middle third of slab thickness where practical and only
where approved by the Structural Engineer. Leave minimum 1-inch concrete cover. Secure raceways to
reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. Space raceways laterally to
prevent voids in concrete. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size parallel to or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Transition
from nonmetallic tubing to rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above floor.
L.
All underground change of directions shall be made with factory applied PVC coated rigid, factory applied
PVC coated IMC steel, or UL Schedule 40 PVC elbows.
M.
Installs exposed raceways parallel to or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members, and
follow the surface contours as much as practical. Run parallel or banked raceways together, on common
supports where practical. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make bends
parallel. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for
parallel raceways.
N.
Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight. Make raceway
terminations tight and use insulating bushings to protect conductors.
O.
Tighten set-screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools.
P.
Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install
locknuts with dished part against

Caliber Collision - O`Haver Contractors

Transcription

Similar documents

Pharmaceutical Facility Process Piping Installation

project manual - Hall Construction

Dry Cleaners and Laundromats

HB 125 HYDRAULIC CHAIN TENSIONER INSTRUCTIONS

Noor Fadzli Yahaya UniKL MICET, 2006

Jetons De Poker Ceramiques Casino Replica

Hymax Couplings 1.5

simplicity Automatic

Pegasus final w industries

Polyisocyanurate Pipe Insulation